JP6778002B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachislot machine or a pachinko machine.

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a game machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 6-3506 JP-A-2009-240459

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the angle of view may deviate greatly each time the screen (projection surface) is switched, and there is a possibility that the appearance of the projected image may gradually change with the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a gaming machine capable of projecting an image at an appropriate position even by switching the projection surface and eliminating the discomfort of the image. The purpose is to do.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image on a plurality of projection surfaces (for example, the reflection surfaces of the reflection portions D1 to D4, the projection surface E11a, the projection surface F1a, etc.), and among the plurality of projection surfaces. A projection surface drive mechanism (for example, front screen drive mechanism E2, reel screen drive mechanism F2) that switches by shifting at least one projection surface (for example, projection surface E11a, projection surface F1a, etc.) relative to the projection device. Etc.) and a game machine (for example, game machine 1 etc.)
The projection device
An image position changing means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, a sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, etc.) capable of changing the position of the image projected on the projection surface .
A focus mechanism for projecting an image on each of the plurality of projection surfaces, and
A focus adjusting means for adjusting the focus mechanism each time at least one of the plurality of projection planes is switched by the projection plane driving mechanism is provided.
The focus adjusting means, each time the projection plane is switched at the timing in which the projection surface is moving operation is completed on the basis of the difference between the change operation time by moving the operating time and the focus adjustment means according to the projection plane driving mechanism, There line adjustment of the focus position by adjusting the focus mechanism,
The change operation time is characterized in that it is composed of a data transmission time associated with a change in the focus position setting and an operation time of the focus mechanism .

According to such a configuration, the horizontal and vertical positions of the projected image are adjusted each time the projection plane is switched, so that the projection position of the image with respect to each projection plane can be appropriately set, and the image can be set appropriately. Discomfort can be eliminated.

When the switches are pre SL projection plane, after said positioning of the projected image is performed by the image position changing means, characterized in that the focus position by the focus mechanism is adjusted by the focus adjusting means is adjusted And.

According to such a configuration, when the projection plane is switched, the horizontal and vertical positions of the projected image are adjusted, and then the focus position of the focus mechanism is adjusted, so that the horizontal and vertical directions are adjusted. Deterioration of image quality can be suppressed not only by the position of but also by the focus position.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of projecting an image at an appropriate position by switching the projection surface and eliminating the discomfort of the image.

It is a front perspective view of a game machine. It is a back perspective view of the game machine. It is a front view of a game machine. It is a front view of the game machine when the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism are in the open state. It is an exploded perspective view of a game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game machine. It is a vertical sectional view of a display unit. It is an upper perspective view of the projector device. It is a perspective view when the display unit is attached to a cabinet. It is a lower perspective view of the projector device. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is a left exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is a right side exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is a rear perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the reel screen mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of the front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of the reel screen mechanism. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a projector apparatus. It is the whole perspective view of the projector device. It is an exploded perspective view of the projector device. It is a figure which shows the lens unit of a projector apparatus. It is a top view which shows the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal for fixing a projector device. It is sectional drawing of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal along the XXVI-XXVI line of FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. It is a figure for demonstrating the positioning method of the upper pedestal. It is a figure for demonstrating the posture adjustment method of the lower pedestal. It is a figure which shows the connection form of a projector device and an adjustment PC. It is a perspective view which shows the case of the projector apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the state which arranged the heat sink and the optical element in the case of a projector apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating the air flow path formed in the case of a projector apparatus. It is a front view which shows the inside of a cabinet. It is a side view of the cabinet with the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism open. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower door mechanism. It is a block diagram which shows the system configuration of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a sub-control board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a reel drive board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a door relay board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the auxiliary relay board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a scaler board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a multi-output scaler LSI. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the sub liquid crystal I / F board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the divided display pattern of a projector device and a sub liquid crystal display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 1 of the division display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 2 of the division display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 3 of the division display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 4 of the division display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 5 of the division display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 6 of the division display pattern. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the communication specification of a game machine. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged between a scaler board and a sub-control board. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged between a sub liquid crystal I / F board and a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged between a projector control board | sub-control board. It is a figure which shows the error information transmitted as a command from each board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map of the adjustment PC. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of power-on of a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process of a main control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map 1 of a sub-control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map 2 of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of power-on of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the LED control task of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control task of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the screen accessory control task of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the screen accessory control process of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the focus change request processing of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main task of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main board communication task of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the animation task of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-device task of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub device reception interrupt processing of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub device initialization processing of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the scaler control process of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the scaler control reception processing of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving a scaler activation parameter request of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the scaler setting change process of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving a scaler status command of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the scaler reception confirmation reception processing of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub liquid crystal control processing of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal control of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal start parameter request of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub liquid crystal setting change processing of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal status command of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception processing of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control processing of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control reception processing of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the projector start parameter request of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector setting change process of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector reception confirmation reception processing of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the projector error notification of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the projector status of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector drift correction processing of a sub-control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map 1 of a scaler board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map 2 of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st serial line reception interrupt processing of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub device bypass transmission processing of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of reception between sub-control-scaler of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis process of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of transmission between sub-control and scaler of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control bypass transmission processing of a scaler board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map of the projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control main processing of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the serial line reception interrupt processing of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of reception between the sub-control of the projector control board-projector. It is a flowchart which shows the internal setting change process of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector setting value storage process of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis process of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control of a projector control board-the processing at the time of transmission between projectors. It is a flowchart which shows the status transmission data creation process of a projector control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the sub liquid crystal control main processing of a sub liquid crystal I / F substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the serial line reception interrupt processing of a sub liquid crystal I / F board. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of reception between the sub control-sub liquid crystal of a sub liquid crystal I / F substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis process of a sub liquid crystal I / F substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control-sub-liquid crystal transmission processing of a sub-liquid crystal I / F substrate. It is a figure which shows the adjustment screen at the time of optical adjustment of a projector apparatus. It is a figure which shows the adjustment screen at the time of optical adjustment of a projector apparatus. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the 1st modification of a projector apparatus. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the 2nd modification of the projector apparatus. It is a front view which shows the arrangement form of the projector apparatus which concerns on 3rd modification. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the projector apparatus applied to the 4th modification and subsequent modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control main processing of the projector control board which concerns on 4th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis process of the projector control board which concerns on 4th modification. It is a figure which shows the LED temperature control table and FAN temperature control table provided in the projector control board which concerns on 4th modification. It is a figure which shows the FAN temperature control table provided in the projector control board which concerns on 5th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the projector error notification of the auxiliary control board which concerns on 6th modification. It is a figure which shows the FAN temperature rotation speed control table provided in the projector control board which concerns on 7th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control of the projector control board which concerns on 8th modification | process at the time of transmission between projectors. It is a flowchart which shows the projector initialization processing of the projector control board which concerns on 8th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control processing of the auxiliary control board which concerns on 9th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector-controlled reception processing of the sub-control board which concerns on 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector drift correction processing of the auxiliary control board which concerns on 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector setting change process of the sub-control board which concerns on 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the focus origin adjustment instruction transmission processing of the auxiliary control board which concerns on 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control processing of the sub-control board which concerns on 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the focus origin adjustment determination process of the auxiliary control board which concerns on 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the effect content determination process of the sub-control board which concerns on 11th modification. It is a figure which shows the display example of the image projected by the projector apparatus which concerns on 11th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the effect content determination process of the auxiliary control board which concerns on 12th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the effect content determination process of the auxiliary control board which concerns on 13th modification. It is a figure which shows the drift correction temperature table provided in the sub-control board which concerns on a 14th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector drift correction processing of the auxiliary control board which concerns on 14th modification. It is a figure which shows the drift correction temperature table provided in the sub-control board which concerns on 15th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the demo command transmission processing of the main control board which concerns on 15th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the game state which concerns on the 16th modification. It is a figure which shows the focus adjustment frequency setting table provided in the sub-control board which concerns on 17th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the effect content determination process of the auxiliary control board which concerns on 17th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the focus origin adjustment determination process of the auxiliary control board which concerns on 18th modification. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence at the time of activation of a projector apparatus and a sub CPU which concerns on 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged in the communication sequence at the time of startup of a projector apparatus and a sub CPU which concerns on 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence at the time of a normal operation of a projector apparatus and a sub CPU which concerns on 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged in the communication sequence at the time of a normal operation between a projector apparatus and a sub CPU which concerns on 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence at the time of screen switching between a projector apparatus and a sub CPU which concerns on 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged in the communication sequence at the time of screen switching between a projector apparatus and a sub CPU which concerns on 19th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the main control main processing executed in the main control board of the pachinko machine which concerns on 20th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the system timer interrupt process executed in the main control board of the pachinko machine which concerns on 20th modification.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the gaming machine 1 is a so-called pachislot machine. The game machine 1 can be played using coins, medals, game balls, tokens, and other game media such as cards that are given or given to the player and that store game value information. , Hereinafter, it will be described assuming that a medal is used.

In the following description, the side (direction) from the game machine 1 toward the player is referred to as the front side (front direction) of the game machine 1, and the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). The right side and the left side when viewed from the player are referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the game machine 1, respectively. Further, the direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-rear direction or a thickness direction, and the direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. The direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as a vertical direction or a height direction.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the appearance of the game machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 includes a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as the main body of the game machine, an upper door mechanism UD arranged on the upper front surface of the cabinet G, and a lower surface arranged on the lower front surface of the cabinet G. It has a door mechanism DD.

Further, the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G is formed with two openings G41 penetrating in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. Then, a wooden plate member G42 is attached to the upper surface wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G41.

As shown in FIG. 3, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so as to be able to close the upper part and the lower part of the opening in the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 in the center. The upper display window UD1 is provided with a transparent panel UD11 that transmits light.

The lower door mechanism DD is provided with a main display window DD4 formed as a rectangular opening in a substantially central portion of the upper portion. A reel unit RU attached from the inside of the cabinet G is mounted on the back surface side of the main display window DD4. Further, a main control board MS is attached to the back surface of the reel unit RU.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels RL (left reel), RC (middle reel), and RR (right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel. These reels RL, RC, and RR are arranged in parallel (horizontally in a row) so that each of them can rotate at a constant speed in the vertical direction. For the reels RL, RC, and RR, the operation of each reel RL, RC, and RR and the patterns drawn on each reel RL, RC, and RR can be visually recognized through the main display window DD4.

A transparent panel DD41 made of a rectangular acrylic plate or the like is attached and fixed to the surface of the main display window DD4 so that a player or the like cannot touch the reel unit RU. Below the main display window DD4, first, second, and third pedestals DD2a, DD2b, and DD2c on a substantially horizontal surface are formed. The first pedestal portion DD2a located on the right side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a medal insertion port DD5 for inserting medals. The medal insertion slot DD5 is an opening into which medals are inserted by the player. The medals inserted from the medal slot DD5 are credited or bet on the game.

The second pedestal portion DD2b located on the left side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a maximum BET button DD8 (also referred to as a MAXBET button) as an effective line setting means for betting a credited medal. When the maximum BET button DD8 is pressed, "3" is selected as the number of medals to be inserted.

A sub-display device DD20 is provided on the third pedestal portion DD2c located on the front side of the main display window DD4. The sub-display device DD20 displays, for example, the number of medals paid out and the number of remaining medals credited when a prize is established. Since the maximum number of medals credited to the game machine 1 is usually 50, the number of credits of 50 or less is displayed on the sub display device DD20. In the state where 50 medals, which is the maximum number of medals, are credited, the inserted medals are paid out as they are from the medal payout outlet DD14.

On the front side of the maximum BET button DD8, a start lever DD6 is provided that rotationally drives the reels RL, RC, and RR by the operation of the player and starts the variable display of the symbol in the main display window DD4. The start lever DD6 is tiltably attached within a predetermined angle range.

On the right side of the start lever DD6 and on the front side of the sub display device DD20, there are three stop buttons DD7L for stopping the rotation of the three reels RL, RC, and RR by the player's pressing operation (stop operation). , DD7C, DD7R are provided.

A C / P button DD13 is provided on the left side of the maximum BET button DD8. The C / P button DD13 switches the credit / payout of medals acquired by the player in the game by a push button operation. In the state where payout is selected by switching the C / P button DD13 (non-credit state), medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet DD14 (cancellation shoot) provided on the coin guard plate portion on the lower side of the lower door mechanism DD. The paid-out medals are collected in the medal receiving unit DD15.

A lumbar panel DD18 (lumbar light guide plate) is arranged on the lower side of the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, and DD7R. The waist panel DD18 is configured as a decorative panel using an acrylic plate or the like. On the waist panel DD18, a name representing the model of the game machine 1 and various patterns are drawn by printing.

Further, a speaker DD25L is provided on the left side of the medal payout outlet DD14, and a speaker DD25R is provided on the right side. The speakers DD25L and DD25R notify the player of various information about the game by sounds such as voice and music. Further, a sub liquid crystal display device DD19 is arranged on the right side of the main display window DD4. The sub-liquid crystal display device DD19 is a so-called touch panel DD19T in which a touch sensor panel DD10T as a touch-type position input device is arranged on the panel surface of the liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel). The touch sensor panel may be, for example, a capacitive type that detects contact with a part of the human body (fingertip or the like) or an electrostatic pen and outputs the detection signal. It may be of a method of detecting contact with a hard substance such as a pen tip and outputting the detection signal, or of another method or structure (in-cell structure or the like). In the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T can be used to perform optical adjustment of the projector device B2 described later.

The sub-liquid crystal display device DD19 functions as a SUI (smart user interface), and on the display screen, for example, game information such as the number of games played as the game progresses is displayed, and the player can display the game information. A message or input key for requesting selection or input is displayed.

In the sub-liquid crystal display device DD19, for example, as the game progresses, it is possible to display the content (effect information) according to the effect related to the game on the display screen. Further, as the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, for example, an attachment having a function as a directing accessory, a jog dial, a push button, or the like may be attached as a dedicated attachment. Further, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 may be omitted by allocating its function to the display unit A or the like described later. Further, a sub liquid crystal display device different from the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 may be arranged on the left side of the main display window DD4. As such another sub-liquid crystal display device, an LED substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted is provided on the back side thereof, and a display surface is provided with a transparent and decorated panel capable of producing an effect. May be formed.

As shown in FIG. 4, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1. That is, the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that divides the inside of the cabinet G into an upper space and a lower space. The upper space is a space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the display unit A and the like. Further, the lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the reel unit RU, the main control board MS that controls the operation of the entire game machine 1, and the like.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit A is interchangeably mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device having an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for displaying an image and a screen device C that causes an image to appear when the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B is irradiated.

Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a structure or a natural object, and for example, the position (projection distance or angle) of an accessory which is a screen described later. Etc.) and by projecting an image according to the production information generated based on the shape, it is possible to produce an advanced and powerful production.

The display unit A has a housing A1 having an opening formed in the front. The housing A1 is composed of a projector cover B1 forming the upper portion of the irradiation unit B and a screen housing C10 (see FIGS. 12, 13, etc.) of the screen device C. Although details will be described later, the screen housing C10 has a box shape having a bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2, a left side plate C3, and a back plate C4. The projector cover B1 is replaceably attached to the upper surface of the screen housing C10.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation unit B is a screen device that is arranged in front of the projector device B2 that emits the irradiation light forward and the projector device B2, and is arranged diagonally downward and rearward from the projector device B2. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the direction of C, and a projector cover B1 that houses a projector device B2 and a mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Projector device B2)
The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 while being exteriorized by the case B22, and is arranged at the rear portion in the cabinet G. The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 via a horizontally arranged flat upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221. The entire upper surface of the case B22 is open. As a result, the lens unit B21 and the optical mechanism B24 (see FIG. 21) housed in the case B22 are located on the lower surface of the lower pedestal B221. The lens unit B21 transmits the irradiation light emitted from the plurality of LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B (see FIG. 33) of the optical mechanism B24 and reflected by the DMD241 (Digital Micromirror Device: see FIG. 33) forward through a lens or the like. It is arranged so as to emit light toward the mirror mechanism B3. Details of the projector device B2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 to 33.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, a mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector device B2 (the emission direction of the irradiation light). The mirror mechanism B3 holds the optical mirror B32 by the mirror holder B31. The mirror mechanism B3 is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 in the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the front central portion of the projector cover B1 and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The mirror mechanism B3 is attached to the reflector holding portion B11 so that the distance thereof can be adjusted. As a result, the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2 can be finely adjusted.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 7, the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 are housed in the projector cover B1. The lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 has an inclined surface B2a1 inclined upward from the rear to the front in the front portion thereof. As shown in FIG. 8, the projector cover B1 is arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction of the horizontally arranged upper wall portion B12, the reflector holding portion B11 arranged on the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and the upper wall portion B12. It has side wall portions B13 and B13. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 projects forward of the cabinet G (see FIG. 5). A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in a form protruding forward in the central portion of the front portion of the upper wall portion B12, and the above-mentioned mirror mechanism B3 is held in an angle-adjustable space portion formed by the protrusion. There is.

Further, the side wall portions B13 and B13 have protruding portions B131 protruding from the lower end portion in the left-right horizontal direction. The protruding portion B131 has a first protruding portion B131a on the front side and a second protruding portion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is positioned so as to correspond to the opening of the cabinet G when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet G. The distance along the left-right direction of the tips of the first protrusions B131a protruding from the side wall portions B13 and B13 is set to be slightly shorter than the width of the opening of the cabinet G in the left-right direction. On the other hand, the second protruding portion B131b is positioned so as to correspond to the space behind the opening of the cabinet G when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet G. The distance along the left-right direction of the tips of the second protruding portions B131b protruding from the side wall portions B13 and B13 is set to be slightly shorter than the width of the space portion of the cabinet G. That is, the side wall portions B13 and B13 are formed so that the distance along the left-right direction of the tips of the second protrusions B131b is wider than the distance along the left-right direction of the tips of the first protrusion B131a. .. As a result, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space in the cabinet G.

Further, a screw hole B131C penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at the tip of the second protruding portion B131b. When fixing the projector cover B1 to the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 (see FIG. 5), screws are screwed into the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 via the screw holes B131C. Further, by projecting the projecting portion B131 in the horizontal direction from the lower ends of the side wall portions B13 and B13, the projecting portions B131 and the side wall portions B13 are formed on both side ends of the projector cover B1 and the recesses B132 are provided from the front ends thereof. Are continuously formed toward the rear.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the space BS is defined by the recess B132 and the cabinet G. Further, in the shape of the upper wall portion B12 and the side wall portion B13 of the projector cover B1, the distance between the lower end portion of each side wall portion B13 and the tip end portion of the second protruding portion B131b protruding from the lower end portion is the second protruding portion. The front portion of the B131b is configured to be larger than the rear portion (see FIG. 8). As a result, the front space of the space BS becomes a larger space than the rear space. Further, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, at least a part of the opening G41 formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G and the front space of the space BS overlap in top view. This space BS is used as a work space for installing and fixing the game machine 1 on the island facility.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Perforated plate B15)
As shown in FIG. 10, a perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by punching a plate made of metal (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.). The plurality of holes B151 are formed so as to be substantially evenly dispersed on the entire surface of the perforated plate B15. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow over the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and enables air to flow from the lower side to the upper side or from the upper side to the lower side of the projector device B2. The size and number of holes B151 are set so that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be visually recognized from the outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protruding portion B131a and the second protruding portion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower position. The perforated plate B15 has an upper portion B15a on the front side, an inclined portion B15b on the middle side, and a lower portion B15c on the rear side. The upper portion B15a is horizontally arranged. The inclined portion B15b is formed so as to bend diagonally downward and backward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower side portion B15c is formed so as to bend in the horizontal direction from the rear side of the inclined portion B15b.

The upper portion B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side wall portions B13 and B13 of the projector cover B1. As a result, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so that the front portion of the projector cover B1 is covered from the lower side by the upper portion B15a, and the inclined portion B15b and the lower portion B15c cover the front portion of the projector cover B1 from the lower portion to the rear portion. There is. Further, the inclined portion B15b is arranged so as to surround the inclined surface B2a1 on the lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 in the top view. Then, as shown in FIG. 7, the inclination angle of the inclined portion B15b (inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane) is substantially the same as the inclination angle of the inclined surface B2a1. Below the perforated plate B15, the front screen mechanism E1 in the screen device C is arranged.

The front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position arranged on the upper side in a standby posture for prohibiting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light, and a front exposure arranged on a lower side in an exposure posture for allowing the appearance of an image due to irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby posture is rotatable from the position, and is in an inclined posture close to substantially parallel to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space portion appears below the perforated plate B15, and the air existing in this space reaches the perforated plate B15 without flow resistance, and a plurality of spaces are present. By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of air into the screen device C and enhance the cooling effect.

Further, by providing the perforated plate B15 so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, for example, as shown in FIG. 11, the line-of-sight position of the player located on the front side is the center of the screen device C in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. Even if it exists on the horizontal line of the portion and looks up at the irradiation unit B from this line of sight, the perforated plate B15 prevents the inside of the irradiation unit B from being visually observed.

(Display unit A: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 12, the irradiation unit B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screwing. For example, as described above, screws are screwed into the upper surfaces of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen device C through the screw holes B131C formed in the protruding portion B131 of the projector cover B1. As a result, the display unit A can unite the irradiation unit B and the screen device C and handle them integrally.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, as a plurality of screen mechanisms, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided. The projection planes of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 each have different shapes in order to diversify the image expression. Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens whose positions are displaced relative to the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3, respectively, and the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2, respectively. (See FIG. 20). Of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the front screen mechanism E1 is larger and heavier. Therefore, when driving the front screen mechanism E1, a larger driving force is required than when driving the reel screen mechanism F1.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10)
As described above, the screen device C has a box-shaped screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 13, the screen housing C10 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 erected at the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 erected at the left end of the bottom plate C1. It has a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. As a result, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screwing, so that the front side where the player is located and the upper surface side where the irradiation unit B is located are opened. The box-shaped screen housing C10 is formed.

The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are each separately molded into a predetermined shape, and predetermined functional parts such as the fixed screen mechanism D can be positioned and arranged. As a result, even if the unit of the screen device C cannot be standardized, the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 can be standardized for each plate member. Further, since the plate members can be partially replaced, the specifications can be easily changed for each model of the game machine 1.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Bottom plate C1)
The bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape having a rectangular top view. The upper surface of the bottom plate C1 has a central mounting portion C11 arranged in the central portion, and a right mounting portion C12 and a left mounting portion C13 arranged in the left-right direction about the central mounting portion C11. .. These mounting portions C11, C12, and C13 are formed in a concave shape. The central mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D so that it can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the fixed screen mechanism D. The right movable body base C12 is placed so that the right movable body base C5 can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the right movable body base C5. The left movable body base C13 is mounted so that the left movable body base C6 can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the left movable body base C6. A pattern is three-dimensionally formed on the inner side surfaces of the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 in the left-right direction due to unevenness. That is, the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 also function as decorative members. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable body base C5, and the left movable body base C6 are positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1.

Further, the front portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the tip portion thereof is positioned below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front portion C14. When the display unit A is mounted while being mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 5) of the cabinet G, the front portion C14 abuts on the front surface of the intermediate support plate G1 to move the display unit A rearward in the cabinet G. It makes it possible to perform positioning. Then, the display unit A can be screwed to the front surface of the cabinet G through the through hole C141 of the front portion C14, so that the display unit A can be assembled and installed from the front side of the cabinet G. It has become.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Right side plate C2, Left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit A can be carried by hooking a hand on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operating openings C21 and C31 are arranged on the sides of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operating openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape in which the longitudinal directions are aligned in the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operating openings C21 and C31 are set so that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

As a result, when manually moving the front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position after incorporating the display unit A into the cabinet G, first, the display unit A is taken out from the front side of the cabinet G in which the upper door mechanism UD is opened. .. Specifically, an operator located on the front side of the cabinet G releases the screws of the display unit A to the cabinet G and removes the screws. Then, the display unit A is taken out of the cabinet G by reaching into the cabinet G and grasping the operating openings C21 and C31 of the display unit A with both hands. After that, the front screen in the locked state is reached by reaching into the screen device C from one of the operating openings C21 of the removed display unit A and rotating the crank gear E21 that can be seen horizontally from the operating opening C21. The mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. When the locked state is released by moving from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

With the upper door mechanism UD open, reach out from the front of the opening of the cabinet G into the space between the side wall G2 of the cabinet G and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and reach the operation opening C21. By operating the crank gear E21 from the door, the crank gear E21 can be rotated. In this case, the locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 can be released without removing the display unit A from the cabinet G.

Further, a motor accommodating portion C22 is formed on the right side plate C2. The drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 (see FIG. 20) is positioned and arranged by the motor accommodating portion C22. Further, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 each have a first support portion C23 that rotatably supports the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 in the front screen drive mechanism E2, and an intermediate gear E23 in the front screen drive mechanism E2. A second support portion C24 is formed to rotatably support the shaft member E3 which is the gear shaft of the above. As described above, the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are positioned and arranged by the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The right front screen drive mechanism E2B of the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are arranged between the right movable body base C5 and the right plate C2 in the left-right direction. Further, the left front screen drive mechanism E2A is arranged between the left movable body base C6 and the left plate C3 in the left-right direction.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 15, the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and a recess CO for positioning and arranging the relay board CK is formed in the lower portion of the back surface thereof. The relay board CK includes various functional components in the display unit A (for example, projector device B2, front screen drive mechanism E2, reel screen drive mechanism F2, etc.) and various functional components other than the display unit A (sub-control board SS, etc. described later). ) Is a relay board for relaying wiring (not shown). The relay board CK includes a screen drive control board CS (see FIGS. 37 and 42) that exchanges signals and the like with the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2.

An operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is arranged at the lower right side and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is incorporated in the cabinet G, the display unit A is first removed from the cabinet G. After that, by reaching into the screen device C from the operation opening C41 and rotating the intermediate gear E23 that can be seen horizontally from the operation opening C41, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. Can be moved.

Further, the back plate C4 is arranged in front of the rear end of each of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. As a result, when the display unit A is placed on the intermediate support plate G1 of the cabinet G, the space GS is generated by the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the right side plate C2, left side plate C3 and back plate C4 of the screen device C. It will be defined. That is, a gap is secured between the back wall G3 and the back plate C4. As a result, even if the relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4, it is possible to prevent the relay board CK from interfering with the back wall G3 of the cabinet G due to this space GS.

Further, a through hole G11 is formed at a position of the intermediate support plate G1 facing the space GS (see FIG. 5). The through hole G11 is formed so that its opening surrounds the relay board CK in a top view. The relay board CK is arranged so that the connector CK1 to which the wiring from the device (sub-control board SS or the like described later) accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G is connected faces the through hole G11. .. As a result, the electrical connection between the relay board CK of the display unit A and the equipment accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G is a connector by inserting the wiring from the equipment accommodated in the lower space into the through hole G11. This can be done by connecting to CK1.

By arranging the relay board CK outside the screen device C in this way, the wiring work is facilitated, and it is not necessary to secure an installation space for the relay board CK in the screen device C. The degree of freedom of design in the screen device C is expanded. Further, the heat generated from the relay board CK can be easily discharged to the outside of the machine through the ventilation holes G3a (see FIG. 2) formed in the back wall G3 of the cabinet G.

Further, the wiring for connecting the relay board CK arranged in the upper space of the cabinet G and the equipment accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G passes through the through hole G11 formed in the rear portion of the intermediate support plate G1. Therefore, it becomes easy to arrange the wiring behind the various devices in the cabinet G. As a result, the degree of freedom in wiring can be increased.

Since the relay board CK is arranged at the rear portion in the cabinet G, it is difficult for light to reach the relay board CK, and as a result, it is difficult to connect the wiring to the connector CK1 of the relay board CK. It is possible that Therefore, in order to facilitate the connection of the wiring from the equipment accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G to the relay board CK, the connector CK1 of the relay board CK passes through the through hole G11 and is below the intermediate support plate G1. It may be configured to protrude into. Further, the color of the connector CK1 may be a color having a high light reflectance (for example, white).

As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable body base C5, and the left movable body base C6 are positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1. The drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is positioned and arranged on the right side plate C2, and the gear shaft E21a and the shaft member E3 of the front screen drive mechanism E2 are positioned and arranged on the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The relay board CK is positioned and arranged with respect to the back plate C4. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the screen drive mechanism F2, E2, and the relay board CK are positioned and arranged on one of the bottom plate C1, the side plates C2, C3, and the back plate C4, respectively. It is positioned and arranged on different plates. Therefore, even if the display unit A as a whole cannot be standardized among the models of the game machine 1, it can be standardized between the models for each board. As a result, it becomes possible to manufacture the display unit at a lower cost than in the case of manufacturing the display unit for each model.

Further, since the plates C1 to C4 of the screen housing C10 are connected by fastening the screws, the connections between the plates C1 to C4 can be released by loosening the screws. That is, the screen housing C10 is assembled so that the plates C1 to C4 can be exchanged. As a result, the functional parts of the display unit can be replaced on a board-by-board basis, so that the specifications of the display unit A can be changed while reusing the functional parts that are not subject to replacement of the display unit A. ..

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 20, the right movable body base C5 is arranged on the left inner side of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the reel screen drive mechanism F2. Further, the left movable body base C6 is arranged on the right inner side of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A. As a result, the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, which are decorative members, make it difficult for the player to see these drive mechanisms E2 and F2. As a result, the aesthetic appearance of the game machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the bottom plate C1 is formed with recesses for arranging the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, these can be easily positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen positional relationship)
As shown in FIG. 16, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 17, the front screen mechanism E1 is rotatably provided between the front exposed position and the front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set so that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image due to the irradiation light appears only in the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image due to the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position, the front screen mechanism E1 becomes a projection target of the projector device B2. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes a projection target of the projector device B2.

As shown in FIG. 18, the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatably provided between the reel exposed position and the reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposed position and the fixed exposed position is set so that the reel exposed position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposed position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image due to the irradiation light appears only in the reel screen mechanism F1. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image due to the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 becomes a projection target of the projector device B2. On the other hand, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes a projection target of the projector device B2.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the fixing screen mechanism D is fixed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 by screwing. The fixed screen mechanism D has a front reflection portion D1, a right surface reflection portion D2, a left surface reflection portion D3, and a bottom reflection portion D4. The reflecting surfaces of the reflecting units D1 to D4 are projection surfaces on which the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B is projected, and are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B.

The fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflecting portions as long as it has a plurality of reflecting surfaces having different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light. Alternatively, it may be provided with a reflecting portion of a curved or arc-shaped reflecting surface in which the center point of curvature is located on the front side at continuously different angles with respect to the optical axis.

The front reflecting portion D1 has a reflecting surface arranged so as to face the player on the front side, and reflects most of the reflected light from the irradiation unit B arranged in the front upper part of the fixed screen mechanism D forward. Is set to. The right-side reflection portion D2 and the left-side reflection portion D3 are joined to the right-side portion and the left-side portion of the front-side reflection portion D1, and are arranged symmetrically with respect to the front-side reflection portion D1. The right-side reflecting portion D2 and the left-side reflecting portion D3 are arranged so that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width in the left-right direction of the front reflecting portion D1. As a result, the right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 make it easier for the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface to be toward the front reflection portion D1, so that a part of the irradiation light is frontal while displaying an image by the irradiation light. It is designed to reflect in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. Further, as for the bottom surface reflecting portion D4, the direction of reflection of the irradiation light on the reflecting surface tends to be toward the front reflecting portion D1, so that a part of the irradiation light is directed to the front reflecting portion D1 while the image of the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

In the above-mentioned fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the reflecting surface is set lower than the brightness of each reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected by the irradiation light on the reflecting surface is smaller than the amount of light reflected on the reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. As a result, the fixed screen mechanism D prevents blurring due to mixing of light due to diffused reflection of the reflecting portions D1 to D4. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, since the reflection of the irradiation light by the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 to the front reflecting portion D1 can be reduced, it is possible to reduce the white blur while making the image strongly appear in the front reflecting portion D1.

As the brightness, Brightness in the L * a * b * color system (L * a * b * color space) and the L * u * v * color system (L * u * v * color space) is adopted. However, any color can be defined as long as white can be used as a reference and other colors can be represented by relative values.

The brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the brightness of the reflective surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are such that the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D is the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. It is not particularly limited as long as it is lower than the brightness of the surface. For example, the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) lower than the brightness of the reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

In order to make the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the brightness of the reflective surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is changed to the front screen. The color may be blacker than the color of the paint applied to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. For example, a white paint is used as the paint to be applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint to be applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. A paint to which a black pigment is added to the paint to be applied to the base material may be used.

In such a paint, the brightness of the reflective surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 contains only the white pigment among the white pigment and the black pigment, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes Both white and black pigments may be included. Further, the ratio of the black pigment to the white pigment is (for example, 5 to 25% (or, for example)) in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D than in the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. It may be increased by about 10 to 20%). As the paint to be applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, conventionally known screen paints can be appropriately adopted, and can be adjusted according to the screen type (for example, diffusion type or reflection type). ..

The paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D does not contain the black pigment, but the black pigment is dispersed in the resin that is the material of the base material before molding the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored and the brightness of the base material itself may be lowered.

Further, from the viewpoint of preventing diffused reflection of light, the members constituting the screen housing C10 such as the peripheral walls (bottom plate C1, right side plate C2, left side plate C3, and back plate C4) and the inside of the screen housing C10. It is also desirable to reduce the brightness of other members (members other than the screen) arranged in. It is desirable that the brightness of these members is lower than the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, for the surrounding wall, it is not necessary to consider that the image is projected as a screen, so if the brightness is low, The lower the better. That is, the closer the color of the surrounding wall is to black, the more desirable it is.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 19, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface and a front screen support base E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both sides. Have. The front screen member E11 is formed by applying a screen paint to a thin plate-shaped flat panel. As a result, the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 is formed flat.

On the other hand, the front screen support base E12 has a holding recess E121 for holding the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to that of the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding recess E121 is set in two stages of depth, a deep portion and a shallow portion. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral edge portion of the front screen support base E12 and a step portion E121b formed linearly to both ends in the lateral direction passing through the central portion.

As a result, the front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 is brought into contact with and supported by the stepped portion E121a of the peripheral edge portion and the linear stepped portion E121b passing through the central portion, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. It is in a state. As a result, it is prevented that the deformation of the front screen support base E12 in the deep portion deforms the front screen member E11 and causes distortion in the projection surface E11a.

Further, the front screen support base E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a part of a region around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is made visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front exposed position. Further, the front screen support base E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is made visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front standby position. In these first pattern surface E12a and second pattern surface E12b, for example, a pattern related to the production of a game is three-dimensionally formed by unevenness.

The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are integrally formed by being formed separately and then bonded with an adhesive. As a result, even if a sink mark may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when the front screen mechanism E1 forms a pattern or the like on the front screen support base E12, the sink mark is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front screen member E11 from being distorted due to the sinking of the projection surface E11a.

The method of fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 is not limited to the bonding with an adhesive, and any method such as screw fastening can be adopted.

The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As the material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, ABS resin or the like) that may cause sink marks when injection molding is performed may be appropriately adopted. it can.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the front screen drive mechanism E2 has a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 and a right connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. It has a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

As shown in FIG. 17, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged in the front standby position (in the standby posture), the front screen mechanism E1 is configured to be inclined upward from the rear end portion to the front end portion. ing. The inclination of the front screen mechanism E1 is substantially parallel to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15 and the inclined surface B2a1 on the lower surface B2a of the projector device B2.

As described above, the posture of the front screen mechanism E1 when it is placed in the front standby position is set to an inclined posture in which the front screen mechanism E1 is inclined upward from the rear end portion to the front end portion, thereby being parallel to the horizontal plane. Compared with the posture, it is possible to suppress the irradiation light emitted by the irradiation unit B from being obstructed by the front screen mechanism E1. As a result, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when arranged in the front standby position can be brought closer to the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 can be enlarged even in the limited space of the display unit A. In addition, as described above, since the lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 has the inclined surface B2a1, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when arranged in the front standby position is set with respect to the projector device B2. Can be brought closer. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 can be further enlarged.

As shown in FIG. 14, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B includes a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The crank member E22 in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is at a position where its upper end (one end) is on the upper side when the upper end (one end) is arranged at the front exposed position on the back of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1 (in the exposed posture). Is connected to.

The crank member E22 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 (see FIG. 13) at an intermediate position. As a result, the crank member E22 makes the upper end portion and the lower end portion (the other end portion) rotatable around the intermediate position. This intermediate position coincides with the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1.

As described above, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged above the center position of the front screen mechanism E1 arranged at the front exposed position. Further, the crank member E22 is connected to a position where the upper end portion (one end portion) thereof becomes an upper portion when the crank member E22 is arranged at the front exposed position (in the exposed posture) on the back surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. .. With the above configuration, the operating range between the front standby position and the front exposed position in the front screen mechanism E1 can be reduced, so that the front screen mechanism E1 can be enlarged.

A slide groove (not shown) is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove is formed so as to have a U-shape in a side view. A slide member E26 (see FIG. 14) is movably engaged with the slide groove. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the slide groove. The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at an eccentric position of the crank gear E21. As shown in FIG. 13, the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the first support portion C23 of the right plate C2. In the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, the line segment connecting the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position is the intermediate position of the crank member E22 and the center point of the slide member E26. It is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting with.

As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, even if a force acts in the direction of rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the gear shaft E21a is applied in the direction of applying all the components of this force. Exists and acts as a fixed end, so the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-bar link having 0 degrees of freedom with the intermediate position of the crank member E22 and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 as the fixed end and the slide member E26 as the free end. Therefore, the front screen mechanism E1 The front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake even when the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake.

An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. The intermediate gear E23 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the second support portion C24 of the right plate C2. A motor shaft gear E24 is meshed with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. As a result, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is capable of transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

Here, all the components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning locus of the slide member E26. Further, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, a line segment connecting the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position of the slide member E26 connects the intermediate position of the crank member E22 and the center point of the slide member E26. Since it is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment, the tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the slide groove of the crank member E22. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture and a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the crank gear E21 easily starts rotating.

When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position is movable along the slide groove, so that the intermediate position of the crank member E22 and the gear shaft of the crank gear E21 A two-node link with one degree of freedom is formed with E21a as a fixed end and the slide member E26 as a free end that is movable along the slide groove. Then, when the slide member E26 rotates, the slide member E26 slides along the slide groove, so that the crank member E22 rotates with the intermediate position as a fulcrum, and the upper region of the crank member E22 is rotated. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposed position.

In the present embodiment, the drive motor E25 is a stepping motor and is electrically connected to the sub-control board SS via the relay board CK and the sub-relay board SN (see FIG. 34). Drive controlled. The drive motor E25 may be connected to the main control board MS via the relay board CK and may be driven and controlled by the main control board MS.

Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 gradually accelerates from 0 in the stopped state in the standby posture or the exposed posture, reaches the maximum speed in the intermediate posture between the standby posture and the exposed posture, and then gradually decelerates. When the exposed posture or the standby posture is reached, the stopped state becomes 0 again. As a result, the rotation of the crank gear E21 can be started and stopped in a state where the angular acceleration is small (moment of inertia), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the drive mechanism ( It is possible to reduce failures and wear due to overload of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25).

The right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically. The intermediate gear E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the intermediate gear E23 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via a shaft member E3 (see FIG. 13).

In the above configuration, when the drive motor E25 is driven, the motor shaft gear E24 is rotated. With the rotation of the motor shaft gear E24, the intermediate gears E23 and E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B, and the shaft member E3 rotate integrally. Then, in conjunction with the rotation of the intermediate gears E23 and E23, the crank gears E21 and E21 are rotated, so that the front screen mechanism E1 rotates around the rotation center axis, and the front standby position and the front It will move between the exposed position.

As described above, by connecting the intermediate gears E23 and E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B by the shaft member E3, the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 is transferred to the two crank members E22. It becomes possible to transmit evenly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the drive load from being concentrated on one of the two crank members E22 as compared with the case where the intermediate gears E23 and E23 are not connected by the shaft member E3. Further, since the drive motor E25 is provided on the right front screen drive mechanism E2B arranged to the right of the fixed screen mechanism D, the arrangement of the fixed screen mechanism D is not hindered.

In addition, the shaft member E3 is not used as the rotation shaft of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the shaft member E3 is increased, and the shaft member E3 can be arranged so as not to interfere with the arrangement of another accessory such as the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the other accessory while maintaining the rotation range and size of the front screen mechanism E1 to a desired degree.

Further, since the shaft member E3 is arranged behind the fixed screen mechanism D, the light projected on the fixed screen mechanism D is not obstructed by the shaft member E3. Further, since the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged in front of the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D, it is compared with the case where it is arranged behind the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D. Therefore, the length between the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis (the length of the crank member E22) can be shortened. Therefore, even when the space in the cabinet G is limited and the display unit A cannot be enlarged, the size of the front screen mechanism E1 can be maintained to a desired degree.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIG. 18, the reel screen mechanism F1 is made of a curved flat plate. The reel screen mechanism F1 has a side view arc-shaped shape that is curved in a shape that approximates the rotation direction. The surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 has a pattern formed on the peripheral edge portion, and the inner peripheral region of the peripheral edge portion is a projection surface F1a. The projection surface F1a is an arc surface that becomes convex toward the upstream side in the irradiation direction of the light from the projector device B2 when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposure position. Further, a pattern is formed on the back surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 on the rotation center side. The pattern on the back surface is visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel standby position.

The reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatable between the reel standby position and the reel exposed position by the driving force of the reel screen drive mechanism F2. Then, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel exposed position, the projection surface F1a can appear an image by irradiating the irradiation light.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Reel screen drive mechanism F2)
As shown in FIG. 20, the reel screen drive mechanism F2 has two arm members F21 (not shown on the right side), an arcuate gear F22, a motor shaft gear F23, and a drive motor F24. One end of each of the two arm members F21 is connected to the back surface of the right end portion and the back surface of the left end portion of the reel screen mechanism F1. Further, a support shaft F21a (not shown on the left side) that projects outward in the left-right direction is formed on the outer surface of the other end of the two arm members F21. These support shafts F21a are rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively. As a result, the two arm members F21 can rotate around the support shaft F21a. The support shaft F21a coincides with the rotation center shaft of the reel screen mechanism F1.

The arcuate gear F22 is fixed to the tip of the support shaft F21a arranged on the right side. A motor shaft gear F23 is meshed with the arcuate gear F22. The drive shaft of the drive motor F24 is connected to the motor shaft gear F23. In the present embodiment, the drive motor F24 is a stepping motor and is electrically connected to the sub-control board SS via the relay board CK and the sub-relay board SN (see FIG. 34). Drive controlled. The drive motor F24 may be connected to the main control board MS via the relay board CK and may be driven and controlled by the main control board MS.

In the above configuration, when the drive motor F24 is driven under the control of the sub-control board SS, the motor shaft gear F23 rotates. Along with the rotation of the motor shaft gear F23, the arcuate gear F22 rotates. Then, the arm member F21 is rotated in conjunction with the rotation of the arcuate gear F22, so that the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotated around the rotation center axis, and the reel standby position and the reel exposed position are set. Will work between.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Sensor mechanism)
As described above, the operating ranges of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 each partially overlap each other (see FIGS. 17 and 18). Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are driven by different drive mechanisms E2 and F2, respectively. That is, the drives of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are not interlocked (synchronized). Therefore, in order to prevent interference (contact) between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, it is necessary to grasp the positions of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 respectively. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sub-control board SS (see FIG. 34) grasps the position of the front screen mechanism E1 based on the number of steps of the drive motor E25 from the origin position with the front standby position as the origin position. ing. Similarly, with the reel standby position as the origin position, the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 is grasped based on the number of steps of the drive motor F24 from this origin position.

However, if the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is not operating normally, or if the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is manually moved while the power is cut off, the sub-control board SS Cannot grasp the exact positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. If the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are operated in such a situation, they may interfere with each other.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the screen device C includes a sensor mechanism (not shown) for detecting the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Then, the sub-control board SS executes a return operation for returning the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 to the origin position (standby position) based on the detection result from the sensor mechanism.

For example, as described above, the front standby position and the reel standby position are arranged in the overlapping range in the operating range of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, so that when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged in the front exposed position, The reel screen mechanism F1 is not arranged at the reel exposed position. Therefore, when the sensor mechanism detects that the front screen exists at the front exposed position, it indicates that the reel screen mechanism F1 does not exist at the reel exposed position.

(Screen surface processing)
Next, the surface processing of the screen will be described. Screens to be projected such as the front reflection part D1 of the fixed screen mechanism D, the right side reflection part D2, the left side reflection part D3, the bottom reflection part D4, the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11, and the projection surface F1a of the reel screen mechanism F1. Is textured to achieve moderate performance. Wrinkle processing is a process in which wrinkles are formed on the surface. The screen or the like to be projected is molded using a die that has been textured, whereby a wrinkle pattern is formed on the surface of the screen or the like to be projected. Due to such a wrinkle pattern on the surface, reflection of the light source can be effectively prevented, and further, good projection image can be realized.

The grain processing includes a pattern called "pear-skin". In the present embodiment, for example, a pear-skin pattern having an average depth of about 25 μm to 30 μm and a draft of 3% or more (pear-skin No. 5). Is preferable.

Further, as surface processing of a screen or the like, two-layer coating is applied in order to realize appropriate performance. Two-layer coating means that paints having different characteristics are applied one above the other (in two layers). For example, a high-brightness paint having high reflectivity (for example, 2P-600 silver, which is a metallic paint "ultra-bright silver") is used for the undercoat, and a matte paint (for example, "matte") is used for the topcoat. HG-650 white), which is "white", can be used. Further, about 5% of a matting agent (silica) can be added to HG-650 white.

In such coating, the film thickness of the top coat is, for example, 22 to 23 μm, and the film thickness of the undercoat is, for example, about 1 μm. With such coating, the glossiness at a gloss of 60 ° becomes 4 to 5.

In addition, 2P-600 silver uses vapor-deposited aluminum as the aluminum pigment, and the weight concentration (PWC) of the aluminum pigment in the coating film is set to 20 to 30%, which is higher than that of general silver paint, and has a higher gloss. Indicates the value (reflection performance). The composition of HG-650 white is 20 to 30% for resin, 30 to 40% for titanium oxide, 5 to 10% for silica as a matting agent, 0.5 to 2% for additives, and solvent. It is 30-40%.

In addition, as a topcoat paint, a paint in which glass-based or resin-based beads having various average particle sizes as a matting agent are added in a predetermined ratio to HG-650 white, and a paint in which silica is added in addition to the beads are used. It can also be used. Further, it is also possible to use a paint obtained by adding beads having various average particle diameters as a matting agent to HG-650F clear or HG-650F clear in a predetermined ratio. The film thickness can also be adjusted in various ways, for example, up to 16 to 23 μm. The composition of HG-650F clear is 20 to 30% for resin, 2 to 5% for silica as a matting agent, 0.5 to 2% for additives, and 60 to 70% for solvent.

Further, as another undercoat paint, HG-650 white or a paint obtained by adding glass-based or resin-based beads having various average particle sizes as a matting agent to HG-650 white in a predetermined ratio can also be used. Further, the film thickness can be adjusted in various ways, for example, from 1 to 21 μm.

As described above, by forming the screen to be projected by embossing or applying two-layer coating, it is possible to effectively prevent the reflection of the light source and further improve the projection image. It can be realized. In addition, the above-mentioned two-layer coating can be applied to a screen or an accessory that has been textured. The material of the screen or the like to be projected is, for example, a black or white ABS resin or a transparent polycarbonate resin, but is not limited thereto.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Electrical and optical configuration of projector device B2)
As shown in FIG. 21, the projector device B2 includes a projector control board B23, an optical mechanism B24, and a relay board CK as electrical components. A sub-control board SS, which will be described later, is connected to the projector device B2 via a relay board CK. Although not shown in FIG. 21, the relay board CK and the sub-control board SS are connected via a scaler board SK (see FIGS. 37 and 43) described later. The sub-control board SS controls the projector control board B23 according to the effect operation of the screen or the accessory, and projects the irradiation light onto the screen or the accessory via the optical mechanism B24 as a visual effect. Display the image. Further, in the assembly process of the display unit A or the like, the adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is connected to the projector control board B23 (see FIGS. 30 and 37) of the projector device B2. The adjustment PC 1000 is used for adjusting the position of the irradiation light projected by the projector device B2 and performing the initial focus setting (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the adjustment PC 1000 is adopted as the adjustment device of the projector device B2, but the adjustment device of the projector device B2 is a tablet PC or a so-called smartphone in which an adjustment program (application software) is installed. Alternatively, it may be a dedicated terminal device.

The projector control board B23 includes a control LSI 230, an EEPROM (registered trademark) 231 and a DLP (registered trademark) control circuit 232, and an LED driver 233. As shown in FIG. 33, the optical mechanism B24 is an LED light source 240R, 240G, which emits R (red), G (green), and B (blue) color lights as components arranged around the lens unit B21. The 240B, DMD241, and the focus mechanism 242 for adjusting the focus of the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 are provided.

The control LSI 230 controls the DLP control circuit 232 so as to project the irradiation light based on the command of the sub-control board SS. The control LSI 230 controls the focus mechanism 242 and moves the projection lens 210 in the optical axis direction based on the command of the sub-control board SS to adjust the focus when projecting the irradiation light. The EEPROM 231 stores data related to the setting / adjustment of the projector device B2 by the control LSI 230. Although not particularly shown, the control LSI 230 includes a ROM in which a control program and the like are stored, and a DRAM used in a work area related to setting and adjustment of the projector device B2.

The DLP system of the projector device B2 is mainly composed of a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, and LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and DMD241 of the optical mechanism B24.

The DMD 241 is an integrated mirror equivalent to pixels corresponding to the display resolution on the main surface of the semiconductor chip. The DMD 241 is configured such that each mirror is tilted by + 10 ° or −10 ° along a diagonal axis with respect to the main surface due to the static electric field action of the memory element directly under each mirror. With such a configuration, each mirror of the DMD 241 is switched between an ON state (a state of reflecting light in a predetermined direction) and an OFF state (a state of reflecting light outside the predetermined direction). That is, when each mirror of the DMD 241 is in the ON state, the light incident from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B through the dichroic mirror or the like (not shown) is guided to the lens unit B21 again through the dichroic mirror or the like, while being turned off. In this state, the light incident from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B through the dichroic mirror or the like is reflected in a direction other than the lens unit B21.

The DLP control circuit 232 controls the LED driver 233 that drives the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B, and DMD241 in a time-divided manner via a dichroic mirror or the like that does not show RGB light of each color from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B. To be incident on. At this time, the DLP control circuit 232 turns the mirror corresponding to which pixel into the ON state or the OFF state at which timing according to the projected image, that is, which color of the RGB light has which timing. Determines whether to reflect in a predetermined direction, and controls the ON / OFF state of each mirror of the DMD 241.

Under the control of the DLP control circuit 232, the light reflected in the predetermined direction by the DMD 241 travels to the lens unit B21, passes through the projection lens 210, and is incident on the mirror mechanism B3, and finally by the mirror mechanism B3. It is guided to the projection target by reflection. As a result, the irradiation light is projected onto the screen or the accessory to be projected, and an image corresponding to the effect is formed.

In the present embodiment, the projector device B2 is configured as a so-called DLP projector. Further, the projector device B2 increases the projection distance to the projection target by folding back the irradiation light by the mirror mechanism B3, and makes the projection distance of the irradiation light as short as possible by, for example, setting the contrast ratio to 1000: 1. ing. As a result, the display unit A provided with the projector device B2 is constructed to be cheaper and smaller, and can be easily mounted in the limited space in the cabinet G of the game machine 1.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Mechanical configuration of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the projector device B2 has a case B22, a lens unit cover B222, an undercover B223, an upper pedestal B220, and a lower pedestal B221 as exterior components. A lens unit cover B222 is attached to the front opening B22k of the case B22. An undercover B223 is arranged on the lower surface of the case B22 so as to cover it. The undercover B223 is supported by the lower pedestal B221 via the stay B223a, and is also fixed to a suitable portion on the lower surface of the case B22. The projector device B2 is attached to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12 (see FIG. 8) of the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. In the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12, and the lower pedestal B221 is attached to the upper end portion so as to cover the upper surface opening of the case B22, and is attached to the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220. The lower pedestal B221 is connected. The procedure for adjusting the mounting of the projector device B2 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 23, 24, and 33, the projector device B2 includes LED substrates 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba, and DMD241 on which a lens unit B21 and LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B are mounted as internal components. It has a DMD board 241a, a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D, an intake fan 244A (FAN1), 244B (FAN2), an exhaust fan 245 (FAN3), and a projector control board B23. In the case B22, the lens unit B21 is housed while the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 is covered with the lens unit cover B222, and the LED substrates 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba, DMD substrate 241a, and a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B. , 243D, intake fan 244A, 244B, exhaust fan 245 are accommodated. The projector control board B23 is fixed to the lower surface of the case B22. Although not particularly shown in FIG. 33 and the like, the LED substrates 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba and the DMD substrate 241a are equipped with a temperature sensor B25 (see FIGS. 21 and 37) made of, for example, a thermistor. These temperature sensors B25 detect the temperature in the vicinity of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and the vicinity of the lens unit B21, and output the temperature detection signal to the projector control board B23.

The lens unit B21 includes an optical case B21a for accommodating a dichroic mirror, a reflecting plate, etc. (not shown), a lens group 210A including a projection lens 210, a lens holder B21b provided at the front portion of the optical case B21a while holding the lens group 210A, and It has a focus mechanism 242 provided on the front right side of the optical case B21a so that a part of the lens holder B21b can be moved in the optical axis direction (front-back direction). The optical case B21a is provided with an opening for allowing the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and DMD241 to face from the outside to the inside. The rear portion of the lens holder B21b is fixed to the front portion of the optical case B21a, while the front portion of the lens holder B21b is relatively moved in the front-rear direction (optical axis direction) by the focus mechanism 242 with respect to the rear portion. The projection lens 210 is held in the. The lens unit B21 is provided with a so-called lens shift mechanism (not shown), and the horizontal and vertical positions (horizontal image position, vertical direction) of the image projected by using this lens shift mechanism. It is possible to fine-tune the image position).

The focus mechanism 242 is for focusing on the reflecting surfaces of the reflecting units D1 to D4 and the projection surfaces E11a and F1a displaced with respect to the projector device B2 while changing the focal length of the projection lens 210. The focus mechanism 242 is arranged along the optical axis direction of the rack member 242A, which is movable integrally with the front side portion of the lens holder B21b that holds the projection lens 210, and is screwed with the rack member 242A. It has a lead screw 242B that can rotate while doing so, and a focus motor 242C that rotates the lead screw 242B. The focus motor 242C is connected to the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23.

For example, when the focus motor 242C rotates the lead screw 242B in a predetermined direction, the rack member 242A moves to the front side by the feed screw operation, and the projection lens 210 also moves to the front side integrally with the rack member 242A. As the focal length becomes relatively long, the focus (focus position) can be adjusted to a distant place. On the other hand, when the focus motor 242C rotates the lead screw 242B in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the rack member 242A moves to the rear side by the feed screw operation, and the projection lens 210 is also integrated with the rack member 242A to the front side. As a result of moving to, the focal length becomes relatively short, so that the focus (focus position) is adjusted to the closer side.

According to such a focus mechanism 242, the focal length can be dynamically changed in conjunction with the movement of the projection planes E11a and F1a. Further, for example, when the projection target is changed from the projection surface E11a to the projection surface F1a, or vice versa, the optical path lengths from the projection lens 210 to each projection target are different to some extent, so that each optical path is changed. The focus (focus position) can be statically changed so that the focal length is appropriate according to the length.

The front portion of the lens holder B21b and the projection lens 210 are covered with the lens unit cover B222. The lens unit cover B222 is provided with a translucent surface B222a that transmits the irradiation light from the projection lens 210, and the light emitted from the projection lens 210 passes through the translucent surface B222a and proceeds to the mirror mechanism B3. ..

The LED substrate 240Ra is arranged in the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the rear right side of the optical case B21a, and the LED light source 240R faces the inside of the optical case B21a. The LED substrate 240Ga is arranged in the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the rear rear side of the optical case B21a, and the LED light source 240G faces the inside of the optical case B21a. The LED substrate 240Ba is arranged in the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the rear left side of the optical case B21a, and the LED light source 240B faces the inside of the optical case B21a. The DMD substrate 241a is arranged in the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the left side surface of the optical case B21a, and the DMD241 faces the inside of the optical case B21a. Here, in the present embodiment, as the heat generation characteristics of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B, and DMD241, the LED light source 240G and the LED light source 240B tend to be relatively high, while the LED light sources 240R and DMD241 are relatively high. It shows a low tendency.

As shown in FIG. 24A, the focus mechanism 242 is arranged on the right side of the lens holder B21b, and the projection lens 210 is arranged on the front part of the lens holder B21b. The front portion of the lens holder B21b is movable in the optical axis direction of the projection lens 210 by the focus mechanism 242. Although the details of the focus mechanism 242 are omitted, the focus mechanism 242 includes a stepping motor, a lead screw, a carriage, and the like, and is configured to be movable in the optical axis direction at the front portion of the lens holder B21b.

That is, the projection lens 210 is integrated with the front portion of the lens holder B21b and is movable by the focus mechanism 242, and as shown in FIG. 24A, from the rear side to the front side along the optical axis direction. , Or move from the front side to the rear side.

As shown in FIG. 24A, the light from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B reaches the DMD 241 through a collimator, a dichroic mirror, etc. (not shown), is reflected by the DMD 241 and then reflected by the dichroic mirror or the like, and then the lens group 210A. Is finally emitted through the projection lens 210.

As described above, the projection lens 210 is configured to move in the optical axis direction. As a result, the focus is adjusted, and a clear image in focus is projected on the screen or the accessory whose position has been changed by movement.

In such a projector device B2, video data related to an image such as an effect is transmitted from the sub-control board SS, and the sub-control board SS controls the projector device B2 so as to project the image on a screen or an accessory. On the other hand, the sub-control board SS controls the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2 to move the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 according to the content of the effect.

Here, the sub-control board SS controls the projector device B2 in response to the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 by the effect, and is applied to the projection surfaces E11a and F1a of the moved screen mechanisms E1 and F1 and the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. , Adjust the focus so that the image is projected clearly.

The heat sink 243R is arranged on the right side in the case B22 and partially contacts the back surface of the LED substrate 240Ra. The heat sink 243G is arranged on the rear side in the case B22 and partially contacts the back surface of the LED substrate 240Ga. The heat sink 243B is arranged in the center of the case B22 and partially contacts the back surface of the LED substrate 240Ba. The heat sink 243D is arranged on the left side in the case B22 and partially contacts the back surface of the DMD substrate 241a. Here, in the present embodiment, as the fin outer size of the heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, the heat sink 243R and the heat sink 243G are relatively large, while the heat sink 243B and the heat sink 243D are relatively small. These heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D dissipate the heat generated in each of the LED substrates 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba and DMD substrate 241a into the air, so that the temperature of the optical element or the substrate is changed until the optical characteristics are significantly changed. Efficiently dissipates heat so as not to raise. The heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, which are heat radiating members, are made of an aluminum material having high thermal conductivity in order to enhance the heat radiating effect, and have a plurality of heat radiating fins in order to increase the contact area with air.

The intake fan 244A is arranged so as to be close to the back surface of the right front portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243R. The intake fan 244B is arranged so as to be close to the back surface of the left side portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243D. The exhaust fan 245 is arranged so as to be close to the back surface of the rear portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243G.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, an intake port B22A is provided on the right front side of the case B22 in which the intake fan 244A is close, and the heat sink 243R is close to the intake port B22A. An exhaust port B22E is provided at the rear right side of the case B22. An intake port B22B is provided in a part of the left side of the case B22 to which the intake fan 244B is close, and in the other part of the left side of the case B22 along with the intake port B22B, the inside of the case B22 is provided. The intake port B22C is provided so that the air reaches the three heat sinks 243G, 243B, and 243D through the empty space S of the above. An exhaust port B22D is provided at the rear of the case B22 to which the exhaust fan 245 is close.

That is, as shown in FIG. 33, in the case B22 of the projector device B2, after being forcibly taken in from the intake port B22A by the intake fan 244A, it is exhausted from the exhaust port B22E while taking heat from the heat sink 243R. An air flow path P1 is formed as an air flow. Further, in the case B22, after being forcibly sucked from the intake port B22B by the intake fan 244B, the heat sink 243D, the heat sink 243B, and the heat sink 243G are forcibly taken from the exhaust port B22D by the exhaust fan 45. The air flow path P2 is formed as a flow of air exhausted to. Further, in the case B22, after being sucked from the intake port B22C, the air flow path is a flow of air that is forcibly exhausted from the exhaust port B22D by the exhaust fan 45 while mainly taking heat from the heat sink 243G and the heat sink 243B. P3 is formed.

The projector control board B23 is attached to the lower surface of the case B22 while being covered with the undercover B223. The projector control board B23 includes a control LSI 230, an EEPROM 231 and a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, and the like. The projector control board B23 is electrically connected to the LED boards 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba and DMD board 241a arranged in the case B22, and further to the focus mechanism 242.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Position / orientation adjustment of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the upper pedestal B220 is a sheet metal member fixed to the upper wall portion B12 (see FIGS. 6 and 8) of the projector cover B1, and is a rectangular main body portion 2200 and main body portion 2200. It is formed by bending both the left and right sides downward and outward, and has a step with the main body 2200 and extends to both the left and right sides. The left end 2201a and the right end 2201b, and the main body 2200 are partially rearward to rearward. It has a rear end 2202 extending to. The main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202 are provided with three connecting holes 2200A for connecting the lower pedestal B221. These three connecting holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (horizontal plane) along the main body 2200. Each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b is provided with a plurality of square holes 2201c for fixing to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12 by screwing. In the present embodiment, three square holes 2201c are arranged in each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b, and are provided at equal intervals in the front-rear direction. The vertical and horizontal inner diameters of the square hole 2201c are larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T (see FIG. 28) that is inserted into and fastened to the square hole 2201c.

The lower pedestal B221 is a sheet metal member that roughly corresponds to the main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202 of the upper pedestal B220. The lower pedestal B221 is integrally formed with three connecting screw portions 2210 so as to project upward corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A. These three connecting screw portions 2210 are also arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in the plane (horizontal plane) along the lower pedestal B221. The lower pedestal B221 inserts the tip of the connecting screw portion 2210 into the connecting hole 2200A while fitting the coil spring 2211 to each of the connecting screw portions 2210, and sandwiches the coil spring 2211 between the main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202. By fastening the nut 2213 from the upper surface side of the upper pedestal B220 to the tip of the connecting screw portion 2210 via the washer 2212, the nut 2213 is suspended from the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220. Further, as shown in FIG. 23, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 and a plurality of screw holes 2215 for screwing the stay B223a. The lower pedestal B221 is connected to the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220 while supporting the undercover B223 via the case B22 and the stay B223a.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 23 and 25 to 27, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected to each other in an adjustable distance at each of the three connecting portions R1, R2, and R3. Each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 is composed of a connecting hole 2200A of the upper pedestal B220, a connecting screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221, a coil spring 2211, a washer 2212, and a nut 2213.

By using such an upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221, the projector device B2 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 so that the position and the optical axis can be adjusted.

FIG. 28 shows the mounting form of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. The lower part of FIG. 28A is a view showing a state in which the mounting screw T is inserted and fastened to the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220, and the upper part of FIG. 28A is a view of FIG. 28A. It is sectional drawing which follows the BB'line shown in the figure below. Note that FIG. 28 shows the periphery of the square hole 2201c formed in the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220, but the same applies to the periphery of the remaining square hole 2201c in the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b.

As shown in FIG. 28A, the mounting screw T is inserted into the square hole 2201c from below, and the mounting screw T is arranged substantially in the center of the square hole 2201c. The mounting screw T is screwed to the nut N located on the upper surface side of the upper wall portion B12 via a washer W arranged along the upper surface of the upper wall portion B12 and the lower surface of the left end portion 2201a. As a result, the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 by screwing. The right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 is also attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 by the same screwing.

Here, the shaded portion indicated by reference numeral A in FIG. 28A is a gap formed between the screw shaft of the mounting screw T and the square hole 2201c. In FIG. 28A, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is arranged and fixed substantially in the center of the square hole 2201c. At this time, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T can be moved within the range (adjustment range) of the shaded portion of the reference numeral A. That is, by finely adjusting the position of the mounting screw T with respect to the square hole 2201c within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. be able to. Similarly, the right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 can also be positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1.

FIG. 28B shows a state in which the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is shifted in the direction of the arrow E with respect to FIG. 28A. The upper view of FIG. 28 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD'shown in the lower figure of FIG. 28 (b). In the state shown in FIG. 28 (b), the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is displaced relatively to the left within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, and is within the range (adjustment range) of the shaded portion indicated by reference numeral C. It is possible to move with.

In this way, the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 while being positioned and adjusted within a predetermined adjustment range that is the opening range of the square hole 2201c. That is, in the projector device B2, the mounting position with respect to the upper wall portion B12 is adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction by the plurality of square holes 2201c provided in the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220. As a result, the direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is easily adjusted as the reference direction so as to be perpendicular to the left-right direction and coincide with the front-back direction.

FIG. 29 shows the connection structure of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the lower pedestal B221 is connected to the upper pedestal B220 by the connecting hole 2200A, the connecting screw portion 2210, the coil spring 2211, the washer 2212, and the nut 2213 in the connecting portion R2. Note that FIG. 29 shows one connecting portion R2, but the same applies to the remaining connecting portions R1 and R3.

The connecting screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221 is inserted into the connecting hole 2200A from the lower surface side of the main body portion 2200 of the upper pedestal B220, and is screwed to the nut 2213 via the washer 2212 arranged on the upper surface side of the main body portion 2200. To. A coil spring 2211 is fitted onto the connecting screw portion 2210, and the coil spring 2211 is sandwiched between the lower surface of the main body portion 2200 and the upper surface of the lower pedestal B221 at the peripheral edge of the connecting hole 2200A. By such a coil spring 2211, the portion of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is urged in a direction away from each other (vertical direction), so that the connecting screw portion 2210 and the nut 2213 are screwed together. Loosening is prevented at the joint.

In such a connecting portion R2, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be changed while being urged by the coil spring 2211 by appropriately turning the nut 2213 in the tightening direction or the loosening direction. Specifically, when the nut 2213 is turned in the tightening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connection R2 is narrowed. At this time, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the upper wall portion B12 (not shown in FIG. 29). Therefore, the portion of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is displaced in the direction closer to the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately tightening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted higher. On the other hand, when the nut 2213 is turned in the loosening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connection R2 is increased. That is, the portion of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is displaced in the direction away from the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately loosening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted to a lower position.

In the other connecting portions R1 and R3, the height position of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portions R1 and R3 can be easily adjusted by appropriately adjusting the tightening amount of the nut 2213 in the same manner as described above. Specifically, the lines connecting the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 form a triangle so that they are not located on the same straight line in the plane (in the horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. It is arranged like this. That is, since the height position of the lower pedestal B221 can be finely adjusted by the tightening amount of the nut 2213 at each of the three connecting portions R1, R2, R3, the posture of the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted in the front-rear direction. The degree of inclination in the three-dimensional space can be adjusted in either the left-right direction or the up-down direction.

Such posture adjustment of the lower pedestal B221 is performed while irradiating the screen or the like with light from the projector device B2 supported by the lower pedestal B221. At that time, an image is projected on the screen or the like by the irradiation light, and the posture of the lower pedestal B221 is adjusted while checking the image. As a result, the optical axis direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is adjusted so that the image is projected on the surface of the screen or the like in an appropriate display mode. That is, the optical axis direction can be adjusted in advance by adjusting the posture of the lower pedestal B221 so that so-called trapezoidal distortion or the like does not occur as an image display mode.

As shown in FIG. 30, adjustment in the optical axis direction and the like are performed using the adjustment PC 1000 connected to the projector device B2 via the sub-control board SS and the like. The projector device B2 attached to the upper wall portion B12 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 adjusts the optical axis direction and checks the displayed image on the screen or the like at the time of inspection at a factory. , Various adjustments necessary for projecting and displaying the image are carried out. The adjustment PC 1000 is temporarily connected to the projector control board B23 of the projector device B2 during the adjustment work (see FIG. 37). When the adjustment PC 1000 is operated, the optical parameters related to the projection position of the irradiation light and the focus adjustment in the projector device B2 are changed by a predetermined command transmitted from the adjustment PC 1000. The projection position and optical parameters appropriately adjusted in this way are the adjustment value data of the horizontal and vertical directions and the focus position (horizontal position (horizontal image position) A to E adjustment values, vertical position (vertical direction). Image positions) A to E adjustment values, focus positions A to E adjustment values) are stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 (see FIG. 106). The horizontal and vertical direction and focus position adjustment value data stored in the EEPROM 231 are not supplied to the projector device B2 for transportation after shipment from the factory, and the game machine 1 is installed in the game hall. But you can use it as it is. Such horizontal position adjustment and vertical adjustment data are acquired to control the lens shift mechanism of the lens unit B21, and focus position adjustment value data is acquired to control the focus mechanism 242. .. The horizontal position A to E adjustment value, the vertical position A to E adjustment value, the focus position A to E adjustment value, the horizontal position (horizontal image position) A to E offset described later, and the vertical position ( Vertical image position) A to E offset, focus position A to E offset, focus drift correction values A to E, for example, "A" is the projection plane of the fixed screen mechanism D, and "B" is The projection surfaces E11a and "C" of the front screen member E11 correspond to the adjustment value data corresponding to the projection surface F1a of the reel screen mechanism F1, and "D" and "E" correspond to future expandability (projection surface is It is a reserve in consideration of (when it increases).

As is clear from the above with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30, the projector device B2 is mainly positioned in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction according to the mounting position of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the upper wall portion B12, and is located below. The optical axis direction is adjusted according to the posture of the side pedestal B221 in the three-dimensional space.

In the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are provided at three connecting portions for connecting to each other, but if the condition that at least three locations are not on the same straight line is satisfied, four locations are provided. The connecting portion may be provided above. Further, in the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 is provided with the connecting hole 2200A and the lower pedestal B221 is provided with the connecting screw portion 2210, but these connecting holes and the connecting screw portion may be provided upside down. The connecting screw portion is not limited to the one formed integrally with the pedestal as in the present embodiment, and may be any one that can be fixed to one pedestal. For example, the connecting screw portion may be a bolt that penetrates and is fixed to the lower pedestal.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Intake / exhaust structure of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the case B22 of the projector device B2 is provided with three intake ports B22A, B22B, B22C and two exhaust ports B22D, B22E. Of the three intake ports B22A, B22B, and B22C, two intake ports B22A and B22B are provided with intake fans 244A and 244B, while one intake port B22C is not provided with an intake fan. Further, of the two exhaust ports B22D and B22E, one exhaust port B22D is provided with an exhaust fan 245, while the other exhaust port B22E is not provided with an exhaust fan.

At the intake port B22A, air is forcibly taken into the case B22 by the intake fan 244A, and the air flow passes through the heat sink 243R as the air flow path P1 to take heat from the heat sink 243R. After that, the air flow path P1 flows linearly from the heat sink 243R to the exhaust port B22E, and is naturally discharged (exhaust heat) from the exhaust port B22E to the outside of the case B22.

Also at the intake port B22B, air is forcibly taken into the case B22 by the intake fan 244B. This air flow takes heat from the plurality of heat sinks 243D, 243B, 243G by passing through the plurality of heat sinks 243D, 243B, 243G while passing through a part of the empty space S as the air flow path P2. After that, the air flow path P2 is drawn into the exhaust fan 245 and flows so as to bend toward the exhaust port B22D, and is forcibly discharged (exhaust heat) from the exhaust port B22D to the outside of the case B22.

At the intake port B22C, air is semi-forcedly taken into the case B22 mainly by the pulling force of the exhaust fan 245. This air flow takes heat from the plurality of heat sinks 243B and 243G by passing through a considerable part of the empty space S as an air flow path P3 and mainly passing through the heat sinks 243B and 243G. After that, the air flow path P3 is also drawn into the exhaust fan 245 and flows so as to bend toward the exhaust port B22D, and is forcibly discharged from the exhaust port B22D to the outside of the case B22 while merging with the air flow path P2. (Exhaust heat). The intake fans 244A and 244B and the exhaust fan 245 function as a cooling device for the projector device B2.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the LED light sources 240G and 240B exhibit relatively high heat generation characteristics, while the LED light sources 240R and DMD241 exhibit relatively low heat generation characteristics. The LED substrates 240Ga and 240Ba on which the LED light sources 240G and 240B having high heat generation characteristics are mounted are in thermal contact with the heat sinks 243G and 243B through which the plurality of air flow paths P2 and P3 pass.

Here, the plurality of air flow paths P2 and P3 flow in from the separate intake ports B22B and B22C, but merge at one exhaust port B22D, and flow out from the exhaust port B22D with the exhaust port B22D as a common vent. It has become. As a result, the plurality of air flow paths P2 and P3 are forcibly discharged while merging, resulting in a smooth flow, and heat can be efficiently taken from and cooled by the plurality of heat sinks 243G and 243B. ..

Further, since the plurality of air flow paths P2 and P3 are efficiently and forcibly discharged by the exhaust fan 245, heat accumulation by a plurality of optical elements such as LED light sources 240G and 240B and DMD241 in the projector device B2 is effective. It is possible to prevent overheating of optical parts such as lenses.

Further, since the two air flow paths P2 and P3 leading to one exhaust port B22D cool the three heat sinks 243D, 243B and 243G, which are more than the two air flow paths P2 and P3, they are provided corresponding to these heat sinks 243D, 243B and 243G. A plurality of optical elements such as the DMD 241 and the LED light sources 240B and 240G can be cooled more efficiently.

In the present embodiment, the two air flow paths P2 and P3 are merged at one exhaust port 245. For example, three or more air flow paths P1 are also merged at the exhaust port 245. The air flow paths of the above may be collectively exhausted from one exhaust port.

(Cabinet G)
As shown in FIG. 34, a display unit A is provided in the upper space of the cabinet G. Further, a power supply device DE and a hopper mechanism HP are provided at the bottom of the lower space of the cabinet G, and a sub-control board SS is provided on the back side of the power supply device DE and the hopper mechanism HP (the back wall G3 side of the cabinet G). Is provided. That is, the hopper mechanism HP is arranged on the front side of the sub-control board SS. A sheet metal BK is installed between the hopper mechanism HP and the sub-control board SS. Further, a sub-relay board SN is provided between the sub-control board SS and the intermediate support board G1. Above the hopper mechanism HP, a medal supply mechanism MH (corresponding to a supply port) for supplying metal medals from the outside is provided, and medals are dropped from the medal supply mechanism MH to the hopper mechanism HP. Further, above the medal supply mechanism MH, a scaler board SK for connecting the projector device B2, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and the touch panel DD19T to the sub control board SS is provided.

In the present embodiment, the sheet metal BK is not in contact with the sub-control board SS. The sheet metal BK may be directly attached to the bottom of the sub-control board SS. Further, the thin plate-shaped sub-relay board SN detachably attached to the lower surface of the intermediate support plate G1 and the thin plate-shaped sub-control board SS detachably attached to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G are viewed from the side. It is arranged in a state where the L-shape is turned upside down.

According to the above configuration, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control board SS and the hopper mechanism HP, even if a medal is dropped on the hopper mechanism HP and jumps out to the sub-control board SS side, the sheet metal BK It is possible to prevent the medal from physically contacting the sub-control board SS. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control board SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to the contact between the metal medals in the hopper mechanism HP can also be prevented by the sheet metal BK. Further, since the sub-control board SS is provided on the inner side of the lower space of the cabinet G and is sandwiched between the back wall G3 and the sheet metal BK, the sub-control board SS is removed from the cabinet G unless the sheet metal BK is removed. Can't. As a result, the security of the sub-control board SS is enhanced.

(Lower door mechanism DD: Lower door lock mechanism G51)
As shown in FIG. 35, the lower door lock mechanism G51 includes a locked portion G511 fixed to the right end portion of the back wall of the lower door mechanism DD, a locking portion G512 fixed to the right end portion of the cabinet G, and the like. It has a cylinder lock G513.

The locked portion G511 has two rod-shaped locked rods G511a and G511b formed at both ends of the concave frame G511c at the upper portion and the lower portion.

The locking portion G512 has a long cylinder G5122 and a long locking plate G5121 slidably arranged in the cylinder G5122 in the vertical direction.

The locking plate G5121 has claw-shaped claw portions G5121a and G5121b that are locked to the locked rods G511a and G511b. The claw portions G5121a and G5121b slide in the cylinder G5122 in the vertical direction as the locking plate G5121 slides, so that the locked rods inserted into the openings G5122a and G5122b provided in the cylinder G5122. It locks or is released from G511a and G511b. Further, the locking plate G5121 has a spring that is urged upward.

The claws G5121a and G5121b are locked to the locked rods G511a and G511b when the locking plate G5121 is at a height position to lock the lower door mechanism DD, while the locking plate G5121 is locked to the lower door mechanism DD. The lock on the locked rods G511a and G511b is released when the vehicle is lowered from the height position at which the lock is locked to the height position at which the lock is released. Further, the tip surfaces of the claw portions G5121a and G5121b are inclined obliquely downward, and are pushed down by contact with the locked rods G511a and G511b.

Although not shown, the locking portion G512 has a pull-down portion in the middle portion. The pull-down portion makes it possible to pull down the locking plate G5121 as the key is inserted into the cylinder lock G513 and rotated. As a result, the locking rods G511a and G511b can be unlocked from the locked rods G511a and G511b by descending according to the pulling down of the locking plate G5121. The lower door mechanism DD is provided with a door relay board DS for connecting electronic components on the door side and the cabinet G side.

(Upper door mechanism DU: Upper door lock mechanism G52)
As shown in FIG. 35, the upper door lock mechanism G52 has a locked portion G521 fixed to the right end portion of the back wall of the upper door mechanism DU and a locking portion G522 fixed to the right end portion of the cabinet G. Have.

The locked portion G521 has two rod-shaped locked rods G521a and G521b formed at both ends of the concave frame G521c at the upper portion and the lower portion.

The locking portion G522 has a long cylinder G5222 and a long locking plate G5221 slidably arranged in the cylinder G5222 in the vertical direction.

The locking plate G5221 has claw-shaped claw portions G5221a and G5221b that are locked to the locked rods G521a and G521b. The claw portions G5221a and G5221b slide in the cylinder G5222 in the vertical direction as the locking plate G5221 slides, so that the locked rods inserted into the openings G5222a and G5222b provided in the cylinder G5222 are locked. It locks or is released from G521a and G521b.

The claw portions G5221a and G5221b are locked to the locked rods G521a and G521b when the locking plate G5221 is at a height position to lock the upper door mechanism DU, while the locking plate G5221 is locked to the upper door mechanism DU. It is set so that the locked rods G521a and G521b are unlocked when the vehicle is lowered from the height position at which the lock is locked to the height position at which the lock is released. Further, the tip surfaces of the claw portions G5221a and G5221b are inclined obliquely downward, and are pushed down by contact with the locked rods G521a and G521b.

An opening (not shown) is formed below the upper door mechanism DU in the cylinder G5222 of the locking portion G522, and a protrusion (not shown) provided on the locking plate G5221 is provided through the opening. It protrudes toward the inside of the cabinet G. By pulling down the protrusion, the locking plate G5221 is lowered, and the locking between the claw portions G5221a and G5221b and the locked rods G521a and G521b can be released accordingly.

Here, the protrusion is slid upward and is arranged so as to abut on the upper portion of the lower door mechanism DD when the locking plate G5221 is in a height position for locking the upper door mechanism DU.

According to the above configuration, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the upper part of the lower door mechanism DD physically interferes with the protrusion to prevent the locking plate G5221 from sliding, and the claw portion G5221a. , G5221b and the locked rods G521a and G521b can be prevented from being unlocked, and the upper door mechanism DU can be locked so as not to be opened.

On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is open, the physical interference with the protrusion on the upper part of the lower door mechanism DD is released, so that the locking plate G5221 can slide in the cylinder G5222, and the claw portion G5221a , G5221b is released from the locked rods G521a and G521b, and the upper door mechanism DU can be unlocked from the cabinet G.

As a result, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is necessary to first unlock the lower door mechanism DD by the lower door lock mechanism G51. That is, in order to open the upper door mechanism DU, it is necessary to perform an unlocking operation on the lower door locking mechanism G51, open the lower door mechanism DD, and then perform an unlocking operation on the upper door locking mechanism G52. The security for the upper space of the cabinet G can be enhanced. Further, the upper space of the cabinet G can be more secure than the lower space of the cabinet G, and the lower space of the cabinet G can be accessed more smoothly than the upper space of the cabinet G. Can be a place.

Further, in order to unlock the lower door mechanism DD, it is necessary to unlock the cylinder lock G513 with a key. For the administrator of the game machine 1, the key has an advantage that it is easy to manage because it is compact and suitable for carrying.

Further, due to the sliding of the locking plate G5221, the claw portions G5221a and G5221b are caught by the locked rods G521a and G521b, and the hooking is released. As a result, it is possible to lock the upper space of the cabinet G of the upper door mechanism DU linked to the sliding of the locking plate G5221.

Further, since the upper door lock mechanism G52 is provided at the end opposite to the shaft-supported end and is arranged on the side where the upper door mechanism DU is opened / closed, the upper door lock mechanism G52 is unlocked. Therefore, it is not necessary to open the lower door mechanism DD widely. As a result, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is not necessary to unnecessarily expose the lower space of the cabinet G to the outside, and security can be improved.

In the present embodiment, a one-way hinge in which a predetermined torque is applied in the direction in which the lower door mechanism DD is closed is adopted between the lower door mechanism DD and the cabinet G. As a result, when closing the lower door mechanism DD, torque is applied, and the lower door mechanism DD can be quietly closed with respect to the cabinet G without applying a sudden load. As a result, it is possible to prevent a sudden load from being applied to the protruding portion B131 that is physically interfered with by the lower door mechanism DD.

(Relationship between lower door DD1, reel unit RU, and main control board MS)
As shown in FIG. 36, the lower door mechanism DD of the game machine 1 includes a lower door DD1, a reel unit RU, and a main control board MS.

The lower door DD1 is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the cabinet G (corresponding to the housing). As shown in FIG. 36, the reel unit RU is detachably provided on the back side of the lower door DD1 (inside the cabinet G (lower space side)). In addition to the reels RL, RC, and RR, the reel unit RU is provided with a reel drive board RD that controls a reel motor. The main control board MS is detachably provided on the back side of the reel unit RU (inside the cabinet G (lower space side)).

The main control board MS rotates the reels RL, RC, and RR of the reel unit RU based on the command signals output by the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc. (see FIG. 3). By stopping, the symbols arranged on the reels RL, RC, and RR are stopped and displayed.

By integrating the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS according to the positional relationship between the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS as described above, the game machine 1 You can easily perform the work of assembling, replacing parts, and disassembling.

Further, the main control board MS is an important configuration for controlling the game, and it is necessary to take measures to prevent unauthorized removal. However, since the main control board MS is integrated with the reel unit RU, its removal is required. Can be difficult.

Further, the main control board MS is provided on the back surface of the reel unit RU provided on the inner side of the lower door DD1. As a result, the main control board MS can be arranged on the back side of the cabinet G far from the lower door DD1 by the thickness of the lower door DD1 and the reel unit RU. Therefore, a physical distance can be secured between the lower door DD1 and the main control board MS, and even if an unauthorized intrusion is made through the gap of the lower door DD1, the main control board MS is reached. Is difficult, and security can be improved.

Further, since the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrated, when changing the specifications of the game machine 1, the exterior of the lower door DD1 is changed and the reel design of the reel unit RU is changed. And changes in the game content can be done collectively.

(System configuration of game machine 1)
As shown in FIG. 37, the game machine 1 includes a main control board MS, a sub control board SS, a reel drive board RD, a door relay board DS, a sub relay board SN, and a scaler board SK as main boards included in the system. It includes a projector control board B23, a sub liquid crystal I / F board SL, and a screen drive control board CS. Power is supplied to the main control board MS, the sub control board SS, and the like when the power switch DE2 is turned on from the power board DE1 of the power supply device DE. In addition to the above-mentioned ones included in the system, the game machine 1 has a 7-segment display 30 for digital display, an external centralized terminal board 31 for connecting an external display, a graphic board 40, and other known components. Sub RAM board 41, sub ROM board 42, selector 50 for medal identification, door open / close monitoring switch 51, BET switch 52, settlement switch 53, start switch 54, stop switch board 55, setting key type switch 56, LED board 60 , LED group 61 for production and decoration, speaker group 62 for production, 24h door monitoring unit 63, and door monitoring switch 64. Description of these known components will be omitted.

A general harness and an optical fiber cable are used to connect the boards and the like. For example, the main control board MS is connected to each of the reel drive board RD and the 7-segment display 30 via a harness H so as to output a control signal in one direction. The reel drive board RD is connected to the door relay board DS via the first optical fiber cable FC1 so as to optically transmit various signals to the door relay board DS in one direction. The door relay board DS is connected to the main control board MS via the second optical fiber cable FC2 so as to optically transmit various signals in one direction to the main control board MS. As a result, the main control board MS, the reel drive board RD, and the door relay board DS are loop-connected through the harness H and the optical fiber cables FC1 and FC2 so as to simply transmit commands and the like in one direction. The sub-relay board SN is connected to the security IC 306 described later in the main control board MS via an optical fiber cable (not shown), and the external centralized terminal board 31 is connected to the security IC 307 described later in the main control board MS via an optical fiber cable (not shown). ) Is connected. The security ICs 306 and 307 of the main control board MS conceal the communication data by, for example, encrypting the plaintext transmission command by the AES method.

The main control board MS is a board for controlling the main game operation of the game machine 1. As shown in FIG. 38, the main control board MS includes a main CPU 300, a main RAM 301, a main ROM 302, a clock pulse generation circuit 303, a frequency divider 304, an I / O communication LSI 305 as a master, and security ICs 306 and 307. For example, the main CPU 300 transmits a command for controlling the reel rotation operation and the medal payout operation to the reel drive board RD through the I / O communication LSI 305. Further, the main CPU 300 optically receives signals from various switches (50 to 56) connected to the door relay board DS through the I / O communication LSI 305, and performs predetermined processing based on these signals. .. Specific processing of such a main control board MS (main CPU 300) will be described later.

The sub-control board SS is a board mainly for controlling the effect associated with the game of the game machine 1. The sub-control board SS is connected to the sub-relay board SN via a connector (BtoB: for board-to-board), and the sub-relay board SN and the scaler board SK are connected to each other via a harness H. Various signals are exchanged in both directions with these.

As shown in FIG. 39, the sub-control board SS has a sub CPU 400, an SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) 401 having a backup function, and a real-time clock (RTC: Real Time Lock) 402 which is a date and time timing circuit, and is replaced. As a possible expansion card, a graphic board 40, a sub RAM board 41, and a sub ROM board 42 are mounted by bus connection. The graphic board 40 has a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit) 440 and a VRAM (video memory) 441. For example, the sub CPU 400 transmits signals for displacing the projection surfaces E11a and F1a to the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 through the sub relay board SN and the screen drive control board CS (see FIG. 42). .. Further, the sub CPU 400 transmits a video signal for displaying an image on the projector device B2, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, or the like to the projector control board B23 or the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL through the scaler board SK (FIG. 43). reference). Specific processing of such a sub control board SS (sub CPU 400) will be described later.

The reel drive board RD is a board for controlling the rotation operation of the reels RL, RC, and RR in the reel unit RU and the medal payout operation by the hopper mechanism HP. As shown in FIG. 40, the reel drive board RD has an I / O communication LSI 310, a reel motor driver 311, and a hopper motor driver 312 that are slaves to the I / O communication LSI 305 that is the master of the main control board MS. For example, the I / O communication LSI 305 includes a payout signal from the hopper mechanism HP, a detection signal from the medal supply mechanism switch MHS for detecting the dropping of a medal on the hopper mechanism HP, a signal from the reel unit RU indicating the rotation state of the reel, and the like. Is converted into optical signals according to a predetermined optical communication method, and these optical signals are transmitted to the main control board MS via the first optical fiber cable FC1 and the door relay board DS. Further, the I / O communication LSI 305 inputs control signals from the main control board MS instructing reel rotation start and rotation stop, medal payout, etc. via the harness H, and inputs control signals corresponding to these control signals. , It is output to the reel unit RU and the hopper mechanism HP through the reel motor driver 311 and the hopper motor driver 312. In this way, the control signal by the electric signal is output from the main control board MS, and the input to the main control board MS is performed by communication via the optical fiber cables FC1 and FC2, which are the reel unit RU and This is because there is a problem of responsiveness with the hopper mechanism HP (problem of transmission time due to command transmission). In short, the main control board M and the reel drive board RD are not connected via an optical fiber cable in order to prevent a large deviation in the stop position of the symbol due to a delay when the reel is stopped from pressing the stop button, for example. It has become like.

The door relay board DS relays various signals in one direction from the reel drive board RD, various switches (50 to 56) provided on the door side, and the like to the main control board MS provided on the cabinet G side. It is a board of. As shown in FIG. 41, the door relay board DS has an I / O communication LSI 500 and an external input driver 501 that are slaves to the I / O communication LSI 305 that is the master of the main control board MS. For example, the I / O communication LSI 500 receives signals from various switches (50 to 56) through the external input driver 501 and converts them into optical signals according to a predetermined optical communication method, and converts these optical signals into optical signals. The light is transmitted to the main control board MS via the second optical fiber cable FC2. In addition, the I / O communication LSI 500 also receives a signal from the reel driver board RD, converts it into an optical signal according to a predetermined optical communication method, and converts this optical signal into a main control board via a second optical fiber cable FC2. Send to MS.

The sub-relay board SN is a board for mainly relaying commands from the main control board MS to the sub-control board SS and relaying various signals between the effect mechanism and the like and the sub-control board SS. .. As shown in FIG. 42, the sub-relay board SN includes a security IC 600, a sound IC 601, a digital amplifier 602, and an I2C controller 603. For example, the sub-relay board SN transmits the video signal from the sub-control board SS as a bypass signal to the scaler board SK, and the screen drive signal from the sub-control board SS is transmitted to the screen drive control board CS via the I2C controller 603. The detection signal of the door monitoring switch 64 and the like are exchanged with the door monitoring unit 63 for 24 hours. The security IC 600 receives security commands (various commands from the encrypted main control board MS, etc.) from the main control board MS, converts the security commands into plain text (decrypts the encrypted commands), and then It is transmitted to the sub-control board SS. The sound IC 601 receives a sound signal for production from the sub-control board SS, and transmits a signal corresponding to this sound signal to the speaker group 62 through the digital amplifier 602. The I2C controller 603 receives a lighting signal for production from the sub-control board SS, transmits a signal corresponding to the lighting signal to the LED board 60, and between the sub-control board SS and the screen drive control board CS. Exchange control signals and sensor signals.

The scaler board SK mainly receives a video signal for production from the sub-control board SS, divides the video signal to generate a video signal corresponding to a plurality of video displays, and generates these video signals in the projector device B2. It is a substrate for transmitting to the sub-liquid crystal display device DD19. As shown in FIG. 43, the scaler substrate SK includes an MCU (Micro Control Unit) (control LSI) 700, a multi-output scaler LSI (also referred to as a resolution conversion LSI) 710, and a V-by-one (registered trademark) HS transmitter 711. And SDRAM (DDR SDRAM / DDR2 SDRAM / DDR3 SDRAM, etc.) 712. In the MCU 700, the sub-relay board SN and the multi-output scaler LSI 710 are connected, and the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL and the projector control board B23 are connected. In the multi-output scaler LSI710, the sub-control board SS is connected as an input source, and the MCU700, the V-by-one HS transmitter 711, the SDRAM 712, and the projector control board B23 are connected. A sub liquid crystal I / F board SL is connected to the V-by-one HS transmitter 711 as an output destination.

As shown in FIG. 44, the multi-output scaler LSI 710 constitutes an MCU interface (for example, PCI Express) 800 connected to the MCU 700 and the SDRAM 712 (not shown), an SDRAM interface (for example, PCI Express) 820, and a resolution conversion output block. , Multiple Select Areas A to D801 to 804, LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) as a differential interface (1), (2) 811, 812, LVTTL (Low Voltage Transistor Transistor) as an input / output interface. It has (1), (2) 815,814, and DSF (Double Scaling Filter) (α) 821 and DSF (β) 822 that constitute a video division block.

The multi-output scaler LSI 710 divides and converts the resolution of an LVDS signal as a video signal, for example, and outputs the signal. Specifically, the multi-output scaler LSI710 divides a pair of LVDS signals (LDVS Dual: InPutA, InPutB) by differential transmission from the sub-control board SS into two by DSF (α) 821 and DSF (β) 822. Further, conversion is performed to a predetermined resolution by each of the four select areas A to D801 to 804. After that, the multi-output scaler LSI710 mainly outputs LVDS signals (single signals of LVDS1 and LVDS2) for projector display through LVDS (1) and (2) 811 and 812, and LVTTL (1) and (2) 813. , 814 is used to output LVTTL signals (RGB signals of LVTTL1 and LVTTL2) for sub-liquid crystal display. The LVDS signal output from the multi-output scaler LSI710 is transmitted directly to the projector control board B23 through the MCU700, and the LVTTL signal is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711 or the MCU700. Will be done. Specific processing of such a scaler substrate SK (MCU700, multi-output scaler LSI710) will be described later.

The sub liquid crystal I / F board SL mainly relays the video signal (LVTTL signal) from the scaler board SK to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and also between the sub control board SS and the touch panel DD19T via the scaler board SK. It is a board for relaying various signals. As shown in FIG. 45, the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL has an MCU 900, a V-by-one HS receiver 901, a liquid crystal driver IC 902, and an LED driver IC 903. For example, the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL receives the video signal from the scaler board SK with the V-by-one HS receiver 901 and the MCU 900, and the liquid crystal driver IC 902 receives a control signal for driving the liquid crystal based on the video signal. Along with transmitting to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, the LED driver IC903 transmits a control signal for driving the liquid crystal display backlight to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. As a result, in the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, an image is displayed at a predetermined resolution based on the image signal. Further, the MCU 900 receives the operation signal from the touch panel DD19T and transmits the signal corresponding to the operation signal to the sub-control board SS via the suspension board SK. As a result, the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS recognizes the input operation according to the operation signal from the touch panel DD19T. Although not shown in particular, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 incorporates a temperature sensor such as a thermistor, and the temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL to transmit the sub liquid crystal. The MCU900 of the I / F board SL can recognize the operating temperature. Specific processing of such a sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL (MCU900) will be described later. Specific processing of the projector control board B23 (control LSI 230) shown in FIG. 21 will also be described later.

(Split display pattern of video)
In the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image for production or when the projector device B2 is optically adjusted, the sub control board SS or the sub control board SS forms a divided display pattern as shown in FIG. An image is displayed when the scaler board SK performs signal processing. That is, as shown in FIG. 46, the sub-control board SS has video data for projector display (data block indicated by “α” with a resolution of 1280 × 800) and video data for sub-liquid crystal display (resolution of 480 × 800). By synthesizing with the data block indicated by "β"), an LVDS dual-in signal composed of one synthesized signal is transmitted to the scaler board SK.

The scaler board SK generates two video data α and β from the LVDS dual-in signal by the DSF (α) and (β) 821 and 822 of the multi-output scaler LSI710, and buffers these video data α and β to the SDRAM 712. Temporarily memorize in. The video data α and β are expanded in the memory space of the SDRAM 712 with an array image as shown on the left side of FIG. 46.

After that, the MCU700 of the scaler board SK converts the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 into an LVDS1 signal (video signal indicated by “A” having a resolution of 1280 × 800) for projector display through the select area A801 and LVDS (1) 811. Then, this LVDS1 signal A is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 also converts the video data β read from the SDRAM 712 into the LVTTL1 signal for sub-liquid crystal display (video signal indicated by “C” with a resolution of 480 × 800) through the select area C803 and LVTTL (1) 813. This LVTTL1 signal C is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. In this case, the LVDS1 signal A and the LVTTL1 signal C are transmitted at the resolution specified by the sub-control board SS without converting the resolution. As a result, the projector device B2 can project an image at a resolution equivalent to 1280 × 800 pixels, and the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 can display an image on the screen at a resolution equivalent to 480 × 800 pixels.

As the divided display pattern, a modified example as shown in FIGS. 47 to 52 can be realized according to a change in the display mode such as a change in the number of screens (number of display devices) for displaying an image or a change in the enlargement ratio related to the resolution. ing.

(Modification example 1)
For example, as shown in FIG. 47, the sub-control board SS has video data for projector display (data block indicated by “α” with a resolution of 1280 × 800) and video data for sub-liquid crystal display (resolution 1024 × 768). By synthesizing with the data block indicated by "β"), an LVDS dual-in signal composed of one synthesized signal is transmitted to the scaler board SK.

At this time, the scaler board SK inputs two video data α, β divided by DSF (α), (β) 821,822 based on the received LVDS dual-in signal as shown on the left side of FIG. 47. The array image of the pattern 1 or the input pattern 2 is expanded in the memory space of the SDRAM 712.

Then, if the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is not set, the MCU700 of the scaler board SK selects the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 in the select areas A, B801, 802 and LVDS as shown in the upper right of FIG. 47. Through (1) and (2) 811 and 812, it is converted into an LVDS1 + 2 signal for projector display (a video signal indicated by “A + B” having a resolution of 1280 × 800), and this LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B is transmitted to the projector control board. At the same time, the MCU 700 also transmits the video data β read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D803,804 and LVTTL (1), (2) 813,814 to display the LVTTL1 + 2 signal (resolution 1024 × 768 “C + D”). ”, And this LVTTL1 + 2 signal C + D is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. In this case, the LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B and the LVTTL1 signal C + D are transmitted at the resolution specified by the sub-control board SS without converting the resolution. As a result, the projector device (for example, WXGA: an abbreviation for Wide-XGA) projects an image at a resolution equivalent to 1280 × 800 pixels, and the sub display device DD20 is used as a sub liquid crystal display device (for example, XGA: eXtended Graphics Array). When provided as (abbreviation), it is possible to display an image on the screen with a resolution equivalent to 1024 × 768 pixels.

On the other hand, when the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is set, the MCU700 of the scaler board SK selects the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 in the select areas A, B801 and 802 and as shown in the lower right of FIG. 47. Through LVDS (1) and (2) 811 and 812, it is converted into LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B having a resolution of 1920 × 1080, for example, according to the setting value of the enlargement ratio change, and this LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 also transmits the video data β read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D803,804 and the LVTTL (1), (2) 815,814 according to the set value of the enlargement ratio change, for example, the resolution 1280 × 800. It is converted into the LVTTL1 + 2 signal C + D of the above, and this LVTTL1 + 2 signal C + D is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. In this case, the LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B and the LVTTL1 signal C + D are transmitted at a resolution different from that specified by the sub-control board SS, and in the projector device and the sub liquid crystal display device, a resolution suitable for the display characteristics unique to each device is appropriate. The image can be displayed on.

(Modification 2)
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 48, the sub-control board SS has video data for projector display (data block indicated by “α” with a resolution of 1280 × 800) and two video data (resolution) for sub-liquid crystal display. By synthesizing the data block indicated by "β-1" of 800 x 480 and the data block indicated by "β-2" of resolution 800 x 480), the LVDS dual-in signal consisting of one synthesized signal is generated by the scaler board SK. Send to.

At this time, the scaler board SK displays three video data α, β-1, β-2 divided by DSF (α), (β) 821 and 822 based on the received LVDS dual-in signal in FIG. 48. An array image of any of the input patterns 1 to 3 as shown on the left side is expanded in the memory space of the SDRAM 712.

Then, if the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is not set, the MCU700 of the scaler board SK selects the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 in the select areas A, B801, 802 and LVDS as shown in the upper right of FIG. Through (1) and (2) 811 and 812, it is converted into an LVDS1 + 2 signal for projector display (a video signal indicated by “A + B” having a resolution of 1280 × 800), and this LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 also transmits the two video data β-1 and β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D803,804 and LVTTL (1), (2) 815,814 to display the LVTTL1 signal for sub liquid crystal display. And LVTTL2 signals (video signals indicated by "C" and "D" with a resolution of 800 x 480), and these LVTTL1 signal C and LVTTL2 signal D are converted to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. Send to. In this case, the LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at the resolution specified by the sub-control board SS without converting the resolution. As a result, the projector device (for example, FHD: an abbreviation for Full-HD) projects an image at a resolution equivalent to 1280 × 800 pixels, and as a sub liquid crystal display device, it is different from the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. When a sub-liquid crystal display device (for example, WXGA) is provided, an image can be displayed on each screen with a resolution equivalent to 800 × 480 pixels.

On the other hand, when the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is set, the MCU700 of the scaler board SK selects the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 in the select areas A, B801 and 802 and as shown in the lower right of FIG. Through LVDS (1) and (2) 811 and 812, it is converted into LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B having a resolution of 1920 × 1080, for example, according to the setting value of the enlargement ratio change, and this LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 also transmits the two video data β-1, β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D803,804 and LVTTL (1), (2) 815,814 to set the enlargement ratio change. For example, it is converted into LVTTL1 signal C and LVTTL2 signal D having a resolution of 1280 × 800, and these LVTTL1 signal C and LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. .. In this case, the LVDS1 signal A + B and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at a resolution different from that specified by the sub-control board SS, and the projector device (for example, FHD) and the two sub-liquid crystal display devices (for example, WXGA) are transmitted. ), The image can be appropriately displayed at a resolution suitable for the display characteristics peculiar to each device.

(Modification 3)
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 49, the sub-control board SS includes two video data for projector display (data blocks indicated by “α-1” and “α-2” having a resolution of 800 × 480) and a sub. By synthesizing two video data for liquid crystal display (data blocks indicated by "β-1" and "β-2" with a resolution of 800 x 480), an LVDS dual-in signal consisting of one synthesized signal can be obtained on a scaler substrate. Send to SK.

At this time, the scaler board SK has four video data α-1, α-2, β-1, β-divided by DSF (α), (β) 821,822 based on the received LVDS dual-in signal. 2 is expanded in the memory space of the SDRAM 712 with an array image of any of the input patterns 1 to 3 as shown on the left side of FIG. 49.

Then, the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK selects the two video data α-1 and α-2 read from the SDRAM 712 as shown in the upper right of FIG. 49 unless the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is set. Converted to LVDS1 signal and LVDS2 signal (video signals indicated by "A" and "B" with a resolution of 800 x 480) for projector display through areas A, B801, 802 and LVDS (1), (2) 811 and 812. These LVDS1 signal A and LVDS2 signal B are transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 also transmits the two video data β-1 and β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D803,804 and LVTTL (1), (2) 815,814 to display the LVTTL1 signal for sub liquid crystal display. And LVTTL2 signals (video signals indicated by "C" and "D" with a resolution of 800 x 480), and these LVTTL1 signal C and LVTTL2 signal D are converted to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. Send to. In this case, the LVDS1 signal A and the LVDS2 signal B, and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at the resolution specified by the sub-control board SS without converting the resolution. As a result, the projector device projects an image at a resolution equivalent to 800 × 480 pixels, and when the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and two other display devices are provided as the sub liquid crystal device, 800 × An image can be displayed on each screen with a resolution equivalent to 480 pixels.

On the other hand, when the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is set, the MCU700 of the scaler board SK displays two video data α-1 and α-2 read from the SDRAM 712 as shown in the lower right of FIG. Through the select areas A, B801,802 and LVDS (1), (2) 811,812, the LVDS1 signal A and the LVDS2 signal B having a resolution of, for example, 1280 × 720 are converted according to the setting value of the enlargement ratio change, and these LVDS1 The signal A and the LVDS2 signal B are transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 also transmits the two video data β-1, β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D803,804 and LVTTL (1), (2) 815,814 to set the enlargement ratio change. For example, it is converted into LVTTL1 signal C and LVTTL2 signal D having a resolution of 1024 × 768, and these LVTTL1 signal C and LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. .. In this case, the LVDS1 signal A and the LVDS2 signal B, and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at a resolution different from that specified by the sub-control board SS, and in the projector device and the three sub-liquid crystal display devices, respectively. The image can be appropriately displayed at a resolution suitable for the display characteristics peculiar to the device.

(Modifications 4 to 6)
Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the sub-control board SS is composed of video data for projector display (data block indicated by “α” or the like) and video data for sub liquid crystal display (“β” or the like). By sequentially outputting the data blocks shown), a plurality of LVDS single-in signals corresponding to each may be continuously transmitted to the scaler board SK. Even in such a case, the LVDS signal and the LVTTL signal indicating a predetermined resolution can be output separately by the same signal processing as the above-mentioned divided display pattern, and the projector device and the sub liquid crystal display device are unique to each device. It is possible to appropriately display an image with a resolution suitable for the display characteristics of. In the present embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 6, three types of resolutions of FHD, WXGA, and XGA are illustrated, but the resolution is not limited to these, and for example, VGA (Video Graphics) may be used depending on the specifications and performance of the display device. By using a display device that supports resolutions such as Array), 2K, and 4K, a higher-definition image may be displayed.

The scaler board may be capable of outputting a plurality of video signals to one display means. For example, the scaler board may generate and output a video signal for displaying a part of the screen and a video signal for displaying the remaining part of the screen from one video data. Further, the scaler board may generate and output a left-eye video signal and a right-eye video signal for 3D display from one video data. According to this, it is possible to display an image by a 3D display method using parallax based on the image signal for the left eye and the image signal for the right eye from the scaler board, and in the projector device, it is stereoscopic not only by projection mapping but also by parallax. It is possible to display a feeling and powerful image.

(Communication specifications of game machine 1)
As shown in FIG. 53, the communication specifications of the sub-control board SS-scaler board SK, the scaler board SK-projector control board B23, and the scaler board SK-sub liquid crystal I / F board SL include communication formats and communications. The speed (baud rate), data length, stop bit, presence / absence of parity, protocol, and communication format are specified as shown in the figure. The ID is shown separately for easy viewing of the source ID and the destination ID, but it is actually a single byte of data. For example, when the sub-control board SS transmits data to the scaler board SK, the ID is 21H as the data indicating the ID by combining the source ID: 01H and the transmission destination ID: 20H. In the following description, the communication line between the sub-control board SS and the scaler board SK is referred to as a first serial line, and the communication line between the scaler board SK and the projector control board B23 is referred to as a second serial line. The communication line between the SK-sub liquid crystal I / F board SL may be referred to as a third serial line.

(List of commands between each board)
As shown in FIG. 54, the commands exchanged between the scaler board SK and the sub-control board SS are, for example, "startup parameter request", "parameter request", "status", and "status" as commands transmitted from the scaler board SK. "Reception confirmation" and "error notification" are specified, and as commands sent from the sub-control board SS, for example, "start parameter request confirmation", "setting completed", "status request", "status request completed", "Number of output screen division settings", "Output screen resolution setting", "Number of input screen division settings", and "Input screen resolution setting" are specified. The contents and parameters of each command (including the data positions (D1 to n) in the communication format) are as shown in FIG. 54.

As shown in FIG. 55, the commands exchanged between the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL and the sub control board SS are, for example, "startup parameter request" and "parameter" as commands transmitted from the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL. "Request", "Status", "Reception confirmation", and "Error notification" are specified, and as commands sent from the sub-control board SS, for example, "Startup parameter request confirmation", "Setting complete", "Status request" , "Status request completed", "Sub LCD screen resolution setting", and "Sub LCD brightness setting" are specified. The contents and parameters of each command (including the data positions (D1 to Dn) in the communication format) are as shown in FIG. 55.

As shown in FIG. 56, the commands exchanged between the projector control board B23 and the sub-control board SS are, for example, "startup parameter request", "parameter request", and "reception confirmation" as commands transmitted from the projector control board B23. , "Error notification", "LED temperature", "FAN (fan) rotation speed", "LED brightness", "horizontal adjustment value", "vertical adjustment value", "focus adjustment value", "drift correction temperature" Is specified, and as commands transmitted from the sub-control board SS, for example, "start parameter request confirmation", "setting completed", "status request", "status request completed", "LED brightness setting", " Trapezoidal distortion correction value "," white color temperature setting "," horizontal position offset "," horizontal position adjustment value "," vertical position offset "," vertical position adjustment value "," brightness setting "," contrast setting "," "Gamma setting", "focus offset", "focus adjustment value", "focus drift correction value", and "test pattern" are specified. The contents and parameters of each command (including the data positions (D1 to n) in the communication format) are as shown in FIG. 56.

As shown in FIG. 57, the error information transmitted from the scaler board SK by the error notification transmission command includes "self-diagnosis (RAM check) abnormality", "scaler output setting abnormality", "scaler input setting abnormality", and "WDT". (Watchdog timer) -Scaler ", and for each error, parameters (including data position" D1 "in communication format), error occurrence conditions, and error status are specified. In addition, the error information transmitted from the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL by the error notification transmission command includes "self-diagnosis (RAM check) abnormality", "touch panel input abnormality", "sub liquid crystal screen setting abnormality", and "sub liquid crystal". There are "temperature abnormality" and "WDT-sub liquid crystal", and for each error, parameters (including data position "D1" in the communication format), error occurrence conditions, and error states are specified. The error information transmitted from the projector control board B23 by the error notification transmission command includes "LED (R) temperature abnormality", "LED (G) temperature abnormality", "LED (B) temperature abnormality", and "FAN1 rotation". There are "abnormal", "FAN2 rotation abnormality", "FAN3 rotation abnormality", "voltage abnormality", "self-diagnosis (RAM check) abnormality", "WDT-DLP", and parameters (data in communication format) for each error. The position (including "D1" or "D2"), the condition for occurrence of the error, and the state of the error are specified. The error management area of the scaler board SK, the projector control board B23, and the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL (SDRAM memory map shown in FIG. 96, DRAM memory map shown in FIG. 106, and DRAM memory shown in FIG. 116), which will be described later. The error information and error detection conditions set in (see map) are applied as they are.

(Memory map of PC1000 for adjustment)
As shown in FIG. 58, in the memory (DRAM) of the adjustment PC 1000, a reception storage area, a transmission storage area, and a status storage area are stored as work areas of predetermined application software when optical adjustment is performed on the projector device B2. The area is provided. The storage medium (HDD) of the adjustment PC 1000 has horizontal positions A to E adjustment values, vertical positions A to E adjustment values, focus positions A to E adjustment values, LED brightness settings, and trapezoidal distortion as matters related to optical adjustment. Correction values, white color temperature settings, luminance settings, contrast settings, gamma settings, test patterns, horizontal positions A to E offsets, vertical positions A to E offsets, focus position offsets A to E, and the like are provided. The specific processing of the adjustment PC 1000 will be described later.

(Processing of main control board MS)
[Processing when the power is turned on by the main CPU 300]
FIG. 59 shows a process when the power is turned on by the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS. As shown in the figure, when the power is turned on to the game machine 1, the main CPU 300 performs the power-on processing (S101). In this process, the main CPU 300 determines, for example, whether the backup is normal, whether the setting has been changed appropriately, and the like, and performs initialization according to the determination result.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (unit game) (S102). In this process, the main CPU 300 initializes, for example, by designating a storage area for initialization at the end of one game. As a result, the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area and the display combination storage area of the main RAM 301 are cleared.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S103). In this process, the main CPU 300 sets the effective line based on the number of inserted sheets and determines whether or not the start operation is possible.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a random number value acquisition process (S104). In this process, the main CPU 300 extracts and acquires a random number value and stores it in the random number value storage area. The random number value is used in the next internal lottery process.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs an internal lottery process (S105). In this process, the main CPU 300 determines the internal winning combination.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs the reel stop initial setting process (S106). In this process, the main CPU 300 initializes an area related to control for stopping the rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a start command generation / storage process (S107). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a start command and stores the generated start command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The start command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted to the sub-control board SS by the command transmission process. The start command includes various information (internal winning combination, game status, etc.) necessary for the production, such as the internal winning combination. As a result, the sub-control board SS can produce an effect according to the start operation.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs wait processing (S108). In this process, the main CPU 300 waits so as not to accept the start operation or the like until a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the previous game.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a reel rotation start process (S109). In this process, the main CPU 300 requests the start of rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a reel rotation start command generation / storage process (S110). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a reel rotation start command and stores the generated reel rotation start command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The reel rotation start command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted to the sub-control board SS in the command transmission process. As a result, the sub-control board SS can recognize the start of rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR, and can determine the timing and the like for executing various effects.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S111). In this process, the main CPU 300 determines the attraction priority of the winning combination that can be displayed, and stores the attraction priority data in a predetermined storage area.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a reel stop control process (S112). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of stopping the rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR based on the timing of the stop operation by the player, the internal winning combination, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a winning search process (S113). In this process, the main CPU 300 collates the symbol combination displayed along the effective line after the reels RL, RC, and RR are stopped with the symbol combination table, determines the display combination, and determines the number of medals to be paid out. Do.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a winning operation command generation / storage process (S114). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a winning operation command and stores the generated winning operation command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The winning operation command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted from the main control board MS to the sub control board SS in the command transmission process. As a result, the sub-control board SS can determine the production content and the like according to the winning.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a medal payout process (S115). In this process, the main CPU 300 pays out medals based on the number of medals to be paid out determined in the process of S113.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a medal payout end command generation / storage process (S116). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a medal payout end command and stores the generated medal payout end command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The medal payout end command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted from the main control board MS to the sub control board SS in the command transmission process. As a result, the sub-control board SS can recognize the end of the medal payout.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a bonus end check process (S117). In this process, the main CPU 300 ends the operation of the bonus game when the condition for ending the bonus game is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a bonus operation check process (S118). In this process, the main CPU 300 starts the operation of the bonus game when the condition for starting the bonus game is satisfied. The main CPU 300 operates the re-game when the conditions for the re-game are satisfied. After the execution of S118, the main CPU 300 shifts to the process of S102 again.

[Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU (1.1172 ms)]
FIG. 60 shows an interrupt process by the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 300 periodically saves registers at a predetermined cycle (1.1172 ms) (S121).

Next, the main CPU 300 performs an input port check process (S122). In this process, the main CPU 300 confirms the presence / absence of an input signal from the door relay board DS. For example, the main CPU 300 stores signals from the start switch 54, the stop switch board 55, and the like for each interrupt process. Further, the main CPU 300 stores input state commands corresponding to input signals from various switches and the like in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The stored input state command is transmitted to the sub-control board SS in the data transmission process described later. As a result, it is possible to execute various effects according to the start operation of the unit game and the stop operation of the reels RL, RC, and RR.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a timer update process (S123). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of updating the value of the timer set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 301.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs the effect timer update process (S124). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of updating the value of the effect timer set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 301.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a reel control process (S125). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of controlling the rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR. Specifically, the main CPU 300 starts the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR in response to the request to start the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR, that is, the start operation, and at a constant speed. Control is performed so that the reels RL, RC, and RR rotate. Further, in response to the stop operation, control is performed so that the rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR corresponding to the stop operation is stopped.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs the 7SEG drive process (S126). In this process, the main CPU 300 causes the 7-segment display 30 to display the number of credited medals, the number of payouts, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs data transmission processing (S127). In this process, the main CPU 300 transmits the command stored in the transmission data storage area to the sub-control board SS via the security IC 306.

Next, the main CPU 300 restores the register (S128). After that, the main CPU 300 ends the interrupt process.

(Memory map of sub-control board SS)
As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the sub RAM board 41, SRAM 401, and sub ROM board 42 of the sub control board SS are provided with various areas for performing optical adjustment with respect to the projector device B2.

As shown in FIG. 61, the sub RAM board 41 has a part of a work area (for example, an area used in the task system and an LED control task described later) for the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS to perform various controls. Areas used in each task such as (not shown) include sub-device reception storage area, sub-device transmission storage area, scaler control reception storage area, sub LCD control reception storage area, projector control reception storage area, and flags. Storage area, scaler setting value storage area, scaler setting confirmation storage area, sub LCD setting value storage area, sub LCD setting confirmation storage area, touch panel input storage area, projector setting value storage area, projector status storage area, drift correction storage area It is provided. For example, in the flag storage area, the EXT reception flag, reception completion flag, scaler setting completion flag, sub liquid crystal setting completion flag, projector setting completion flag, scaler setting changing flag, sub liquid crystal setting changing flag, and projector setting changing flag , The flag for setting when the scaler is started, the flag for setting when the sub LCD is started, and the flag for setting when the projector is started are stored. The input type, the input X coordinate, and the input Y coordinate are stored in the touch panel input storage area. A drift correction monitoring counter and a focus correction value storage area are provided in the drift correction storage area. The sub device means a front screen drive mechanism E2 and a reel screen drive mechanism F2 in addition to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, the touch panel DD19T, and the projector device B2 controlled by the sub control board SS. These stored information will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 62, the SRAM 401 has a scaler setting value storage area and a sub liquid crystal as a part of data that can be backed up (for example, data in an area where the game state, RT state, etc. are backed up is not shown). A setting value storage area and a projector setting value storage area are provided. In the scaler setting value storage area, as the scaler setting values, the number of output screen division settings, the number of input screen division settings, the output screens 1 to 4 horizontal resolution, the output screens 1 to 4 vertical resolution, the input screens 1 and 2 horizontal resolution, and the input Screens 1 and 2 vertical resolutions are stored. The sub liquid crystal setting value storage area stores the sub liquid crystal horizontal resolution, the sub liquid crystal vertical resolution, and the sub liquid crystal brightness as the sub liquid crystal setting values. In the projector setting value storage area, as projector setting values, horizontal position A to E offset, horizontal position A to E adjustment value, vertical position A to E offset, vertical position A to E adjustment value, focus position offset A to E, focus drift correction values A to E, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, contrast setting, gamma setting, and test pattern are stored. These set values will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 62, the sub ROM board 42 has a part of fixed data (control program of the sub control board SS, various lottery values required for the game, video data, sound data, LED data, and accessories (screen). ) Operation data and the like are not shown), and a scaler initial value area, a sub-liquid crystal initial value area, and a projector initial value area are provided. In the scaler initial value area, the number of output screen division settings, the number of input screen division settings, baud rate, data length, parity, stop, output screens 1 to 4 horizontal resolution, output screens 1 to 4 vertical resolution, input screens 1 and 2 horizontal The resolution, input screens 1 and 2, and the vertical resolution are stored. The sub liquid crystal horizontal resolution, the sub liquid crystal vertical resolution, and the sub liquid crystal brightness are stored in the sub liquid crystal initial value region. In the projector initial value area, horizontal positions A to E offset, vertical positions A to E offset, focus position offsets A to E, focus drift correction values A to E, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, contrast setting, Gamma settings, white color temperature settings, brightness settings, and test patterns are stored. These stored information will be described later.

(Processing of sub-control board SS)
[Processing when the power is turned on by the sub CPU 400]
FIG. 63 shows a process when the power is turned on by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, when the power is turned on to the game machine 1, the sub CPU 400 performs an initialization process of the sub control board SS (S131). In this process, the sub CPU 400 initializes the task system, such as error checking of the SRAM 401 and initialization of the sub RAM board 41 (RAM clear, backup data set of the SRAM 401, etc.). The task system includes an LED control task, a sound control task, a screen accessory control task, a main task, a main board communication task, an animation task, and a subdevice task, which will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the LED control task (S132). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of the LED control task described later (see FIG. 64).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the sound control task (S133). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of the sound control task described later (see FIG. 65).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the screen accessory control task (S134). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of the screen accessory control task described later (see FIG. 66).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the main task (S135). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of the main task described later (see FIG. 69).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the main board communication task (S136). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of the main board communication task described later (see FIG. 70).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the animation task (S137). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of the animation task described later (see FIG. 72).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the sub device task (S138). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of the sub device task described later (see FIG. 73).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a power failure recovery process (S139). In this process, the sub CPU 400 performs a process of restoring the backup data at the time of power failure. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of turning on the power.

[LED control task]
FIG. 64 shows an LED control task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs LED-related data initialization processing (S141).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs LED data analysis processing (S142).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the LED effect execution process (S143).

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a cycle of, for example, 4 msec (S144). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S142.

[Sound control task]
FIG. 65 shows a sound control task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs an initialization process of sound-related data (S151).
Next, the sub CPU 400 performs sound data analysis processing (S152).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sound effect execution process (S153). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S152.

[Screen accessory control task]
FIG. 66 shows a screen accessory control task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory test process in order to confirm whether or not the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 when the power is turned on normally operate (S161). For example, as a test, the reel screen mechanism E1 is first moved to the display position and then to the storage position, and then the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the display position and then to the storage position. Then, when an abnormality is detected during the test operation of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, the projector device B2 displays a notification of the abnormality and requests that a message notifying the occurrence of the abnormality be output from the above-mentioned sound control task.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is the registered screen accessory data (S162). In this process, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the screen accessory data requesting the operation of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 exists in a predetermined area of the sub RAM board 41. When the screen accessory data exists (S162: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S163. When the screen accessory data does not exist (S162: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S164.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory operation construction process (S163). In this process, the sub CPU 400 constructs an operation pattern of the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2 based on the screen accessory data. As the operation pattern of the screen drive mechanisms E1 and F1, for example, when the image is projected on the front screen mechanism E1 and the accessory data for projecting the image is registered on the reel screen mechanism F1 (front screen mechanism). The sub CPU 400 that executes the screen accessory operation construction process sets the storage operation pattern of the front screen mechanism E1 and sets the storage operation pattern of the front screen mechanism E1 when the accessory data instructing the storage operation to E1 is not registered). After the mechanism E1 is housed in the upper part, the operation pattern is constructed in the order of moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to the display surface.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory control process (S164). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 67.

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a cycle of, for example, 2 msec (S165). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S162.

[Screen accessory control process]
FIG. 67 shows the screen accessory control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 corresponds to the operation start step from the operation patterns of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 constructed by the screen accessory operation construction process described above, and the screen (projection target) is changed. It is determined whether or not it is (S171). When the screen change occurs in the operation start step (S171: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S172. If it is not the operation start step or does not correspond to the occurrence of screen change (S171: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S173.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs focus change request processing (S172). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a front screen control process (S173). In this process, the sub CPU 400 controls the operation of the front screen drive mechanism E2 in order to move the front screen mechanism E1.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a reel screen control process (S174). In this process, the sub CPU 400 controls the operation of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 in order to move the reel screen mechanism F1.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the focus standby counter is -1 (S175). The focus standby counter is a subtraction counter for generating a predetermined waiting time when changing the focus position with respect to the projector device B2. When the value of the focus standby counter is -1 (S175: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the screen accessory control process. If the value of the focus standby counter is not -1 (S175: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S176.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the focus standby counter is 0 (S176). When the value of the focus standby counter is 0 (S176: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S178. When the value of the focus standby counter is not 0 (S176: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S177.

Next, the sub CPU 400 subtracts 1 from the value of the focus standby counter (S177). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the screen accessory control process.

In S178, the sub CPU 400 requests the projector device B2 to change the setting at the changed focus position. In this process, the sub CPU 400 stores the focus position setting change request data in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits this data to the projector device B2. The focus position setting change request data includes the current focus position before the change and the focus position after the change. As a result, for example, when the projection target of the image is switched from the front screen mechanism E1 to the reel screen mechanism F1 or vice versa, when the projection target is switched from the reel screen mechanism F1 to the front screen mechanism E1, the projector device B2 changes the focus position setting. The focus mechanism 242 can be controlled based on the required data, and the projection lens 210 can be focused on the focus position corresponding to each of the screen mechanisms E1 and F2.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus standby counter to -1 (S179). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the screen accessory control process.

[Focus change request processing]
FIG. 68 shows focus change request processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 acquires the current focus position (focus positions A to E offset) from the current operating states of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 (S181).

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the changed focus position (focus positions A to E offset) from the operation patterns of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 constructed from the registered accessory data (S182).

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the number of focus change pulses (S183). The number of focus change pulses is the number of pulses of the motor drive signal supplied to the focus motor 242C when the focus position is changed, and is the required number of pulses corresponding to the amount obtained by subtracting the changed focus position from the current focus position. Calculated as an absolute value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the focus adjustment time (S184). The focus adjustment time is the actual working time of the focus mechanism 242 that changes the focus position. For example, if the motor drive signal for the focus motor 242C is a pulse square wave with a duty ratio of 0.5, the pulse width is doubled (pulse). It is calculated by multiplying the period) by the number of focus change pulses obtained in S183.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates a transmission time (setting change transmission time) for changing the focus position setting by communicating with the projector control board B23 (S185). The setting change transmission time is the transmission time 1 of the data exchanged between the sub-control board SS and the scaler board SK due to the change of the focus position setting, and the transmission of the data exchanged between the scaler board SK and the projector control board B23. It is calculated as the time including the time 2. The transmission time 1 is obtained by multiplying the number of transmission bits, which is the number of data × (data length + parity + start + stop), by 1 / baud rate 1. Similarly, the transmission time 2 is obtained by multiplying the number of transmission bits by 1 / baud rate 2. In the present embodiment, the baud rate 1 is 38400 bps, the baud rate 2 is 19200 bps, the data length is 8 bits, there is no parity, the start and stop bits are 1 bit, and the transmission time 1 and the transmission time 2 obtained by using these numerical values are used. Is calculated.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the focus change time (S186). The focus change time is calculated as a total time of the setting change transmission time obtained in S185 and the focus adjustment time obtained in S184.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the front screen mechanism E1 is changed (S187). When changing to the front screen mechanism E1 (S187: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S188. If the change is not to the front screen mechanism E1 (S187: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S189.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the movement time 1 when moving the front screen mechanism E1 to a predetermined position (S188). This movement time 1 is the actual working time of the front screen drive mechanism E2. For example, if the motor drive signal for the drive motor E25 of the front screen drive mechanism E2 is a pulse square wave having a duty ratio of 0.5, the pulse width is doubled. It is calculated by multiplying the required time by the required number of motor pulses. After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S190.

In S189, the sub CPU 400 calculates the movement time 2 when moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to a predetermined position. This movement time 2 is the actual working time of the reel screen drive mechanism F2. For example, if the motor drive signal for the drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is a pulse square wave having a duty ratio of 0.5, the pulse width is doubled. It is calculated by multiplying the required time by the required number of motor pulses.

Next, the sub CPU 400 divides the difference between the movement times 1 and 2 obtained in S188 or S189 and the focus change time obtained in S186 by 2 corresponding to 2 msec of the processing cycle of the screen accessory control task, and calculates the difference. A value corresponding to time is set in the focus standby counter (S190). As a result, with respect to the operation of moving the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 to a predetermined position and the operation of changing the focus position, the values that are exactly the required time differences are not set in the focus standby counter. The focus position can be changed to a predetermined position at the timing when the movement operation of F1 is completed. That is, it is possible to project an image of good image quality that is in focus by changing the focus position even on the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 immediately after the movement.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is focus interlocking at the time of video display (for example, "1" when there is a focus interlocking flag (not shown) and "0" when there is no focus interlocking flag (not shown)) (S191). .. Focus interlocking means that the focus position is continuously changed in conjunction with the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1. When there is no focus interlocking (S191: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S192. When there is focus interlocking (S191: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the focus change request process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets 0 in the focus standby counter (S192). That is, when the focus interlocking is not performed, the focus position is immediately changed at the beginning of the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, and when the focus interlocking is performed, the focus position is at the timing when the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 ends. The change of is completed. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the focus change request process.

[Main task]
FIG. 69 shows the main task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization: vertical synchronization signal) interrupt initialization process (S201).

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a VSYNC interrupt that occurs at a cycle of 33 msec (S202).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs drawing processing (S203).

Next, the sub CPU 400 resets the watchdog timer (WDT) (S204). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S202.

[Main board communication task]
FIG. 70 shows a main board communication task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 initializes the communication message queue (S211).

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires a reception command from the main control board MS from the communication message queue (S212).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a receive command (S213). When there is a receive command (S213: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S214. If there is no receive command (S213: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S218.

Next, the sub CPU 400 checks the reception command (S214).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the received command is a valid command (S215). When the receive command is a valid command (S215: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S216. If the receive command is not a valid command (S215: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S218. The reception command is valid, for example, when the value of the command is in the range of 01H to 10H.

Next, the sub CPU 400 creates game information from the reception command and stores the game information in a predetermined area (not shown) of the sub RAM board 41 (S216). This game information includes, for example, an internal winning combination, a game state, a set value, the number of bonus games, and the like.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a command analysis process (S217). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a cycle of, for example, 10 msec (S218). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S212.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 71 shows a command analysis process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a command consistency determination process (S221).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the effect content determination process (S222).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs animation data determination processing (S223).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the LED data determination process (S224).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs sound data determination processing (S225).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory data determination process (S226).

Next, the sub CPU 400 registers each of the determined data in a predetermined area of the sub RAM board 41 (S227). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the command analysis process.

[Anime task]
FIG. 72 shows an animation task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 checks for changes from the previous game information (S231).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the main object control process (S232).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the main animation task management process (S233).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the sub object control process (S234).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub animation task management process (S235).

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a cycle of, for example, 33 msec (S236). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S231.

[Subdevice task]
FIG. 73 shows a sub-device task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub device initialization process (S241). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 75.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a scaler control process (S242). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 76.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal control process (S243). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 82.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector control process (S244). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88.

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a cycle of, for example, 10 msec (S245). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S242.

[Sub-device reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 74 shows a sub-device reception interrupt process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. The sub-device reception interrupt process is a reception interrupt process for capturing communication data transmitted by the scaler board SK in response to an external request of the sub device (sub liquid crystal display device DD19, touch panel DD19T, projector device B2, etc.). As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the received data from the sub device is'STX' indicating the beginning of the data (S251). When the received data is'STX (Start of Text: 02H)'(S251: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S252. If the received data is not'STX'(S251: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S253.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the ETX reception flag and the reception completion flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘OFF’, and clears the sub device reception storage area (S252). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

In S253, the sub CPU 400 stores the received data in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the data received from the sub device is'ETX'indicating the end of the data (S254). When the received data is'ETX (End of TeXt: 03H)'(S254: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S255. If the received data is not'ETX'(S254: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S256.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the ETX reception flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘ON’ (S255). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

In S256, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the ETX reception flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 is ‘ON’. When the ETX reception flag is ‘ON’ (S256: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S257. If the ETX reception flag is not ‘ON’ (S256: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub device reception data sum check process (S257).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S257 is normal (S258). When the sum value is normal (S258: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S260. If the sum value is not normal (S258: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S259. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when determining whether or not the sum value is normal, the received data up to'ETX'excluding'STX'of the received data is added and received after'ETX'. The consistency of the sum value is judged by collating with the received data. The method of calculating the sum value is not limited to the addition formula, and a subtraction formula or an exclusive OR (also referred to as BCC) may be used.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (clears the sub device reception storage area) (S259). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

In S260, the sub CPU 400 sets the reception completion flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘ON’. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

[Sub-device initialization process]
FIG. 75 shows a sub-device initialization process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub-control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 initializes the first serial line serving as the communication line with the scaler board SK (S271).

Next, the sub CPU 400 copies the value of the scaler set value storage area of the SRAM 401 to the scaler set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S272). As shown in FIG. 62, the scaler setting values include the number of output screen division settings, the number of input screen division settings, output screens 1 to 4 horizontal resolution, output screens 1 to 4 vertical resolution, input screens 1 and 2 horizontal resolution, and input. It corresponds to a device profile showing the control characteristics of the scaler board SK such as screens 1 and 2 vertical resolution.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a check process for the range of the scaler set value stored in the scaler set value storage area (S273).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not all the scaler set values in the scaler set value storage area are within the effective range (S274). As shown in FIG. 54, the effective range of the scaler set value is defined in advance as a transmission command from the sub-control board SS. When all the scaler set values are within the effective range (S274: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S276. When at least one scaler set value is not within the effective range (S274: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S275.

Next, the sub CPU 400 initializes the scaler set value storage area of the SRAM 401 and the scaler set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 as initial values (S275). As shown in FIG. 62, the initial value of the scaler set value is written in advance in the scaler initial value area of the sub ROM board 42.

Next, the sub CPU 400 copies the value of the sub liquid crystal set value storage area of the SRAM 401 to the sub liquid crystal set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S276). As shown in FIG. 62, the sub liquid crystal set value corresponds to a device profile showing display characteristics of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 such as sub liquid crystal horizontal resolution, sub liquid crystal vertical resolution, and sub liquid crystal brightness.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a check process for the range of the sub liquid crystal set value stored in the sub liquid crystal set value storage area (S277).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not all the sub liquid crystal set values in the sub liquid crystal set value storage area are within the effective range (S278). When all the sub liquid crystal set values are within the effective range (S278: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S280. When at least one sub liquid crystal set value is not within the effective range (S278: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S279.

Next, the sub CPU 400 initializes the sub liquid crystal set value storage area of the SRAM 401 and the sub liquid crystal set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 as initial values (S279). As shown in FIG. 62, the initial value of the sub liquid crystal set value is written in advance in the sub liquid crystal initial value area of the sub ROM board 42.

Next, the sub CPU 400 copies the value of the projector set value storage area of the SRAM 401 to the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S280). As shown in FIG. 62, the projector set values include horizontal position A to E adjustment value, horizontal position A to E offset, vertical position A to E adjustment value, vertical position A to E offset, and focus position offset. It corresponds to a device profile showing display characteristics of the projector device B2 such as A to E, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, contrast setting, gamma setting, and focus drift correction value A to E.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a check process for the range of the projector set value stored in the projector set value storage area (S281).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not all the projector set values in the projector set value storage area are within the effective range (S282). When all the projector set values are within the effective range (S282: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S284. When at least one projector setting value is not within the effective range (S282: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S283.

Next, the sub CPU 400 initializes the projector setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 and the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 as initial values (S283). As shown in FIG. 62, the initial value of the projector set value is written in advance in the projector initial value area of the sub ROM board 42.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scaler setting completion flag, the sub liquid crystal setting completion flag, and the projector setting completion flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘OFF’ (S284). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device initialization process.

[Scaler control process]
FIG. 76 shows the scaler control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, in the sub CPU 400, whether or not the source ID of the received data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 indicates'scaler (see ID: 02H shown in FIG. 53)'. (S291). When the source ID indicates'scaler'(S291: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S292. If the source ID does not indicate'scaler'(S291: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a received data consistency check process for controlling the scaler board SK (S292). In this process, the sub CPU 400 checks whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the values of '01H'to '05H' indicating the transmission command from the scaler board SK shown in FIG. 54. Then, the check result is returned as a return value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines from the return value of the check result whether or not there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S293). When there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S293: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S294. When there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S293: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S295.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards (clears) the data in the sub device reception storage area because the consistency of the received data is abnormal (invalid received data) (S294). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control process.

In S295, the sub CPU 400 performs the scaler control reception time processing. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control process.

[Processing when receiving scaler control]
FIG. 77 shows the process at the time of receiving the scaler control by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 copies received data from the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to the scaler control reception storage area (S301).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is a'start parameter request'(S302). When the reception command is'start parameter request (see CMD: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'(S302: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S303. If the receive command is not'start parameter request'(S302: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S304.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a process when receiving a scaler activation parameter request (S303). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 78. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler control.

In S304, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is a'parameter request (see CMD: 02H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'. When the reception command is'parameter request'(S304: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S305. When the reception command is not'parameter request'(S304: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S311.

Next, the sub CPU 400 receives a request to change the scaler set value (see CMD: 02H, D1: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 54) based on the parameter value (see FIG. 54) included in the parameter request reception command. It is determined whether or not there is (S305). When there is a request to change the scaler set value (S305: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S306. When there is no request to change the scaler set value (S305: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S309.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scaler setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘ON’ (S306).

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (scaler setting value to be changed) from the scaler setting value storage area (see FIG. 62) (S307).

Next, the sub CPU 400 uses the acquired setting change content as an argument (a general name of the parameter on the software, which means that the caller passes the parameter to the subroutine function (process) of the call destination), and performs the scaler setting change process. (S308). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 79. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler control.

In S309, the sub CPU 400 receives a status request (see CMD: 02H, D1: 02H shown in the left column of FIG. 54) from the scaler board SK based on the parameter value (see FIG. 54) included in the parameter request reception command. Determine if it exists. When there is a status request (S309: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S310. If there is no status request (S309: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler control.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request command transmission process (S310). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the scaler board SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler control.

In S311 the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'status (see CMD: 03H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'. When the receive command is'status'(S311: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S312. If the receive command is not'status'(S311: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S313.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a process when receiving a scaler status command (S312). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 80. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler control.

In S313, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is'reception confirmation (see CMD: 04H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'. When the reception command is'reception confirmation'(S313: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S314. If the reception command is not'reception confirmation'(S313: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S315.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a scaler reception confirmation reception time process (S314). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81.

In S315, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is an "error notification (see CMD: 05H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)". When the reception command is'error notification'(S315: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S316. If the reception command is not'error notification'(S315: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control reception processing.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs processing when a scaler error occurs (S316).

Next, the sub CPU 400 outputs a sound scaler error generation output to the speaker group 62 in order to notify the error of the scaler board SK by sound, and simultaneously notifies the LED group 61 of the error by the light emitting mode. LED scaler error occurrence A lighting request is made (S317). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler control.

[Processing when a scaler activation parameter request is received]
FIG. 78 shows the process when the scaler activation parameter request is received by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a start parameter request confirmation command transmission process (S321). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command of'start parameter request confirmation (see CMD: 01H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)' to the scaler board SK.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scaler startup setting flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘ON’ (S322). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process when the scaler activation parameter request is received.

[Scaler setting change process]
FIG. 79 shows a scaler setting change process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 takes out the setting change contents of the scaler setting value received as an argument (S331).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the number of output screen division settings (S332). When the setting change content is the number of output screen division settings (S332: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S333. When the setting change content is not the number of output screen division settings (S332: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S334.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an output screen division set number command transmission process (S333). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the number of output screen division settings in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and specifies the output patterns 0 to 3 as the number of output screen division settings 1 to 4. The command of the number of division settings (see CMD: 05H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'is transmitted to the scaler board SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change process.

In S334, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the output screen resolution setting. When the setting change content is the output screen resolution setting (S334: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S335. When the setting change content is not the output screen resolution setting (S334: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S336.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an output screen resolution setting command transmission process (S335). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the output screen resolution in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sets the output screen resolution as the output screen number (1 to 4), horizontal resolution (480 to 4060), and vertical. The command of'output screen resolution setting (see CMD: 06H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'to specify the resolution (240 to 1600) is transmitted to the scaler board SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change process. Specifically, as an example, when the number of output screen division settings is "2", the output screen resolution setting command is transmitted to the scaler board SK twice (two cycles (400 msec)). The first output screen number: 1 and the output screen number: 1 correspond to the horizontal resolution and vertical resolution, and the second output screen number: 2 and the output screen number: 2 correspond to the horizontal resolution and vertical resolution. Will be sent. Similarly, in the case of the input screen resolution setting command described later, the input screen resolution setting command is transmitted to the scaler board SK a number of times according to the number of input screen division settings.

In S336, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the number of input screen division settings. When the setting change content is the number of input screen division settings (S336: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S337. When the setting change content is not the number of input screen division settings (S336: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S338.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an input screen division set number command transmission process (S337). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the number of input screen division settings in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and specifies 1 or 2 as the number of input screen division settings (FIG. 54). The command of'CMD: 07H shown in the right column)'is transmitted to the scaler board SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change process.

In S338, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the input screen resolution setting. When the setting change content is the input screen resolution setting (S338: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S339. When the setting change content is not the input screen resolution setting (S338: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an input screen resolution setting command transmission process (S339). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the input screen resolution in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sets the input screen resolution as the input pattern (0, 1) corresponding to the input screen numbers (1, 2). , Send the command of'input screen resolution setting (see CMD: 08H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'to specify the horizontal resolution (480 to 4060) and the vertical resolution (240 to 1600) to the scaler board SK. .. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change process. Such a scaler setting change process is executed when a worker of a game machine manufacturing factory performs a menu operation using the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T.

[Processing when receiving scaler status command]
FIG. 80 shows the process when the scaler status command is received by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 extracts a value from "D1" of the received data indicating the status, and determines whether or not the status type is the output setting based on the value (S341). When the status type is output setting (S341: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S342. When the status type is not the output setting (S341: No), that is, when the status type is the input setting, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S343.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the output screen resolution data saved after “D2” of the status reception data in the scaler setting confirmation storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S342). As shown in FIG. 54, the output screen resolution data includes the number of output divisions (1 to 4), the output first to fourth screen horizontal resolution (0 to 4060), and the output first to fourth screen vertical resolution (0 to 1600). Is included. After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S344.

In S343, the sub CPU 400 saves the input screen resolution data saved after "D2" of the status reception data in the scaler setting confirmation storage area of the sub RAM board 41. As shown in FIG. 54, the input screen resolution data includes the number of input divisions (1 or 2), the input first and second screen horizontal resolutions (0 to 4060), and the input first and second screen vertical resolutions (0 to 1600). Is done.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request completion command transmission process (S344). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating the completion of the status request to the scaler board SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process when the scaler status command is received.

[Processer reception confirmation reception processing]
FIG. 81 shows the process at the time of receiving the scaler reception confirmation by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the flag for changing the scaler setting in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 is'ON'(S351). When the scaler setting changing flag is'ON'(S351: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S352. If the scaler setting changing flag is not'ON'(S351: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler reception confirmation.

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (scaler set value before the change) from the scaler set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S352).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the scaler set value storage area is an end block (-1 or 0FFFFH is stored) (S353). When the scaler set value storage area is an end block (S353: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S356. When the scaler set value storage area is not an end block (S353: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S354.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a scaler setting change process (S354). This process is as shown in FIG. 79.

Next, the sub CPU 400 updates the data acquisition position (block number) of the scaler set value storage area (S355). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler reception confirmation.

In S356, the sub CPU 400 performs the setting completion command transmission process. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating “setting completed (see CMD: 02H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)” of the scaler set value to the scaler board SK.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scaler setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘OFF’ (S357). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler reception confirmation.

[Sub LCD control processing]
FIG. 82 shows a sub liquid crystal control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, does the sub CPU 400 indicate that the source ID of the received data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 indicates'sub liquid crystal (see ID: 04H shown in FIG. 53)'? Whether or not it is determined (S361). When the source ID indicates'sub liquid crystal'(S361: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S362. When the source ID does not indicate'sub liquid crystal'(S361: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal control reception data consistency check process for controlling the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T (S362). In this process, whether or not the sub CPU 400 matches the value of the command ID included in the received data with the values of '41H' to '45H' indicating the transmission command from the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL shown in FIG. Is checked and the check result is returned as a return value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines from the return value of the check result whether or not there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S363). When there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S363: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S364. When there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S363: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S365.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (S364). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control process.

In S365, the sub CPU 400 performs the sub liquid crystal control reception processing. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control process.

[Processing when receiving sub LCD control]
FIG. 83 shows the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal control by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 copies received data from the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to the sub liquid crystal control reception storage area (S371).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is a "startup parameter request (see CMD: 41H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)" (S372). When the reception command is'start parameter request'(S372: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S373. If the received command is not'start parameter request'(S372: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S374.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a process at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal activation parameter request (S373). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal control.

In S374, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is a'parameter request (see CMD: 42H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'. When the reception command is'parameter request'(S374: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S375. When the reception command is not'parameter request'(S374: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S381.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a request to change the sub liquid crystal set value based on the parameter value included in the parameter request reception command (see D1: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 55). S375). When there is a request to change the sub liquid crystal set value (S375: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S376. When there is no request to change the sub liquid crystal set value (S375: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S379.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘ON’ (S376).

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (sub liquid crystal setting value to be changed) from the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area (see FIG. 62) (S377).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the sub liquid crystal setting change process with the acquired setting change content as an argument (S378). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal control.

In S379, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a status request from the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL based on the parameter value (see D1: 02H shown in the left column of FIG. 55) included in the parameter request reception command. Determine. When there is a status request (S379: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S380. If there is no status request (S379: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception processing.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request command transmission process (S380). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal control.

In S381, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'status (see CMD: 43H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'. When the reception command is'status'(S381: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S382. If the receive command is not'status'(S381: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S383.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a process at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal status command (S382). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal control.

In S383, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is'reception confirmation (see CMD: 44H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'. When the reception command is'reception confirmation'(S383: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S384. If the reception command is not'reception confirmation'(S383: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S385.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception processing (S384). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

In S385, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is an "error notification (see CMD: 45H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)". When the reception command is'error notification'(S385: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S386. If the reception command is not'error notification'(S385: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception processing.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a process when a sub liquid crystal error occurs (S386).

Next, the sub CPU 400 outputs a sound sub liquid crystal error generation to the speaker group 62 in order to notify the error of the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL (sub liquid crystal display device DD19 or touch panel DD19T) by sound, and at the same time, outputs the sound sub liquid crystal error generation. In order to notify the error according to the light emitting mode, the LED sub liquid crystal error occurrence lighting request is made to the LED group 61 (S387). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal control.

[Processing when sub LCD activation parameter request is received]
FIG. 84 shows the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal start parameter request by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a start parameter request confirmation command transmission process (S391). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a'start parameter request confirmation'command to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the sub liquid crystal startup setting flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘ON’ (S392). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal start parameter request.

[Sub LCD setting change process]
FIG. 85 shows a sub liquid crystal setting change process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 takes out the setting change contents of the sub liquid crystal setting value received as an argument (S401).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting (S402). When the setting change content is the sub LCD screen resolution setting (S402: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S403. When the setting change content is not the sub LCD screen resolution setting (S402: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S404.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting command transmission process (S403). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the sub liquid crystal screen resolution in the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and sets the sub liquid crystal screen resolution (see CMD: 45H shown in the right column of FIG. 55). Is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal setting change process.

In S404, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the sub liquid crystal brightness setting. When the setting change content is the sub liquid crystal luminance setting (S404: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S405. When the setting change content is not the sub liquid crystal brightness setting (S404: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal setting change process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal brightness setting command transmission process (S405). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the sub liquid crystal brightness in the sub liquid crystal set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and subsends a command (see CMD: 46H shown in the right column of FIG. 55) for setting the sub liquid crystal brightness. It transmits to the liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal setting change process.

[Processing when receiving sub LCD status command]
FIG. 86 shows the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal status command by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 extracts a value from "D1" of the received data indicating the status, and determines whether or not the status type is touch input based on the value (S411). When the status type is touch input (S411: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S412. When the status type is not touch input (S411: No), that is, when the liquid crystal setting is set, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S413.

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the touch input data included in the status reception command in the touch panel input storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S412). As shown in FIG. 55, the touch input data includes an input type and input X and Y coordinates related to the touch panel DD19T. After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S414.

In S413, the sub CPU 400 stores the liquid crystal setting data included in the status reception command in the sub liquid crystal setting confirmation storage area of the sub RAM board 41. As shown in FIG. 55, the liquid crystal setting data includes horizontal resolution (200 to 800) and vertical resolution (200 to 800).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request completion command transmission process (S414). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating the completion of the status request (see CMD: 44H shown in the right column of FIG. 55) to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal status command.

[Sub-LCD reception confirmation reception processing]
FIG. 87 shows the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 is'ON'(S421). When the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag is'ON'(S421: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S422. If the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag is not'ON'(S421: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception processing.

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (sub liquid crystal setting value to be changed) from the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area (see FIG. 62) of the sub RAM board 41 (S422).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the sub liquid crystal set value storage area is an end block (S423). When the sub liquid crystal set value storage area is the end block (S423: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S426. When the sub liquid crystal set value storage area is not an end block (S423: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S424.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the sub liquid crystal setting change process with the acquired setting change content as an argument (S424). This process is as shown in FIG. 85.

Next, the sub CPU 400 updates the data acquisition position (block number) of the sub liquid crystal set value storage area (S425). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception processing.

In S426, the sub CPU 400 performs the setting completion command transmission process. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating the completion of setting the sub liquid crystal set value (see CMD: 42H shown in the right column of FIG. 55) to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘OFF’ (S427). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception processing.

[Projector control processing]
FIG. 88 shows the projector control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, in the sub CPU 400, whether or not the source ID of the received data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 indicates a'projector (see ID: 03H shown in FIG. 53)'. (S431). When the source ID indicates'projector'(S4311: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S432. When the source ID does not indicate'projector'(S4311: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector control reception data consistency check process for controlling the projector device B2 (S432). In this process, the sub CPU 400 checks whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the values of '81H' to '8BH' indicating the transmission command from the projector control board B23 shown in FIG. Then, the check result is returned as a return value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines from the return value of the check result whether or not there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S433). When there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S433: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S434. If there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S433: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S435.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (S434). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

In S435, the sub CPU 400 performs projector-controlled reception processing. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the projector drift correction process (S436). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

[Processing when receiving projector control]
FIG. 89 shows the projector-controlled reception processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 copies received data from the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to the projector control reception storage area (S441).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is a'startup parameter request (see CMD: 81H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' (S442). When the reception command is'start parameter request'(S442: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S443. When the received command is not'start parameter request'(S442: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S444.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a process at the time of receiving the projector start parameter request (S443). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 90. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector-controlled reception processing.

In S444, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is a'parameter request (see CMD: 82H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the reception command is'parameter request'(S444: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S445. When the reception command is not'parameter request'(S444: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S451.

Next, the sub CPU 400 receives a request to change the projector set value (see CMD: 82H, D1: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 56) based on the parameter value (see FIG. 56) included in the parameter request reception command. It is determined whether or not there is (S445). When there is a request to change the projector set value (S445: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S446. When there is no request to change the projector set value (S445: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S449.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the projector setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘ON’ (S446).

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (projector setting value to be changed) from the projector setting value storage area (S447).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the projector setting change process with the acquired setting change content as an argument (S448). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector-controlled reception processing.

In S449, the sub CPU 400 requests a status from the projector control board B23 (see CMD: 82H, D1: 02H shown in the left column of FIG. 56) based on the parameter value (see FIG. 56) included in the parameter request reception command. Determine if there is. When there is a status request (S449: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S450. If there is no status request (S449: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception processing.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request command transmission process (S450). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector-controlled reception processing.

In S451, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is'reception confirmation (see CMD: 83H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the reception command is'reception confirmation'(S451: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S452. If the reception command is not'reception confirmation'(S451: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S453.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the projector reception confirmation reception processing (S452). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92.

In S453, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is an "error notification (see CMD: 84H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)". When the reception command is'error notification'(S453: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S454. If the received command is not'error notification'(S453: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S455.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the projector error notification reception processing (S454). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector-controlled reception processing.

In S455, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is a status-related command (see CMD: 85H to 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56). When the reception command is a status-related command (S455: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S456. If the reception command is not a status-related command (S455: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector-controlled reception processing.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the projector status reception processing (S456). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector-controlled reception processing.

[Processing when projector startup parameter request is received]
FIG. 90 shows the processing at the time of receiving the projector start parameter request by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a start parameter request confirmation command transmission process (S461). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command of'confirm start parameter request'to the projector control board B23.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the projector start-up setting flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘ON’ (S462). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process when the projector start parameter request is received.

[Projector setting change process]
FIG. 91 shows a projector setting change process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 extracts the setting change contents of the projector setting value received as an argument (S471).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a horizontal position offset (horizontal position positions A to E offset) (S472). When the setting change content is a horizontal position offset (S472: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S473. When the setting change content is not the horizontal position offset (S472: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S474.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a horizontal position offset command transmission process (S473). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the horizontal position offset (horizontal position A to E offset) in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sets the horizontal position offset (in the right column of FIG. 56). CMD: 88H shown) is transmitted to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S474, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a vertical position offset (vertical position A to E offset). When the setting change content is a vertical position offset (S474: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S475. When the setting change content is not the vertical position offset (S474: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S476.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a vertical position offset command transmission process (S475). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the vertical position offset (vertical position A to E offset) in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and sets the vertical position offset (in the right column of FIG. 56). CMD: 8AH shown) is transmitted to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S476, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a focus offset (focus position offsets A to E). When the setting change content is the focus offset (S476: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S477. When the setting change content is not the focus offset (S476: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S478.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus position offset command transmission process (S477). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the focus position offsets A to E in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and commands for setting the focus position offsets A to E (CMD: shown in the right column of FIG. 56: 8FH) is transmitted to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S478, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is focus drift correction (focus drift correction values A to E). When the setting change content is focus drift correction (S478: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S479. If the setting change content is not focus drift correction (S478: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S480.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus drift correction value command transmission process (S479). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the focus drift correction values A to E in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and commands for setting the focus drift correction values A to E (shown in the right column of FIG. 56). CMD: 91H) is transmitted to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S480, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the LED brightness setting. When the setting change content is the LED brightness setting (S480: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S481. When the setting change content is not the LED brightness setting (S480: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S482.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an LED brightness setting command transmission process (S481). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the LED brightness setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and issues a command for setting the LED brightness (see CMD: 85H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) on the projector control board. It is transmitted to B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S482, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a trapezoidal distortion correction value. When the setting change content is the trapezoidal distortion correction value (S482: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S483. When the setting change content is not the trapezoidal distortion correction value (S482: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S484.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs trapezoidal distortion correction value command transmission processing (S483). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the trapezoidal distortion correction value in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and issues a command (see CMD: 86H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the trapezoidal distortion correction value. It transmits to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S484, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a contrast setting. When the setting change content is the contrast setting (S484: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S485. When the setting change content is not the contrast setting (S484: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S486.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a contrast setting command transmission process (S485). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the contrast setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and issues a command (see CMD: 8CH shown in the right column of FIG. 56) to the projector control board B23 to set the contrast. Send to. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S486, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a gamma setting. When the setting change content is a gamma setting (S486: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S487. When the setting change content is not a gamma setting (S486: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S488.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a gamma setting command transmission process (S487). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the gamma setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and issues a command (see CMD: 8EH shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the gamma value to the projector control board B23. Send to. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S488, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the white color temperature. When the setting change content is the white color temperature (S488: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S489. When the setting change content is not the white color temperature (S488: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S490.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a white color temperature command transmission process (S489). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the white color temperature in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and controls the projector with a command (see CMD: 87H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the white color temperature. It is transmitted to the substrate B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S490, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is brightness. When the setting change content is brightness (S490: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S491. When the setting change content is not brightness (S490: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S492.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a brightness command transmission process (S491). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the brightness in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and issues a command (see CMD: 8CH shown in the right column of FIG. 56) to the projector control board B23 to set the brightness. And send. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S492, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a test pattern. When the setting change content is a test pattern (S492: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S493. If the setting change content is not a test pattern (S492: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a test pattern command transmission process (S493). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the test pattern in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and issues a command (see CMD: 92H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the test pattern to the projector control board B23. Send to. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process. Such a projector setting change process is executed when a maintenance worker in the amusement park or an inspection worker makes various optical adjustments to the projector device B2 before shipping from the factory.

[Projector reception confirmation reception processing]
FIG. 92 shows the projector reception confirmation reception processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the projector setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 is'ON'(S501). When the projector setting changing flag is'ON'(S501: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S502. If the projector setting changing flag is not'ON'(S501: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector reception confirmation reception processing.

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (projector setting value to be changed) from the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S502).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the projector set value storage area is an end block (S503). When the projector set value storage area is an end block (S503: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S506. When the projector set value storage area is not an end block (S503: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S504.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the projector setting change process with the acquired setting change content as an argument (S504). This process is as shown in FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 updates the data acquisition position (block number) of the projector set value storage area (S505). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector reception confirmation reception processing.

In S506, the sub CPU 400 performs the setting completion command transmission process. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating the completion of setting the projector set value (see CMD: 82H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) to the projector control board B23.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the projector setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘OFF’ (S507). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector reception confirmation reception processing.

[Processing when receiving projector error notification]
FIG. 93 shows the processing at the time of receiving the projector error notification by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector error occurrence process in response to an error notification from the projector control board B23 (S511).

Next, the sub CPU 400 outputs a projector error occurrence display request to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL in order to display the error of the projector control board B23 (projector device B2) on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 (S512). ).

Next, the sub CPU 400 makes a sound projector error generation output request to the speaker group 62 in order to notify the error of the projector control board B23 (projector device B2) by sound (S513). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the projector error notification.

[Processing when receiving projector status]
FIG. 94 shows the projector status reception processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is'LED temperature (see CMD: 85H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' (S521). .. When the command type is'LED temperature'(S521: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S522. When the command type is not'LED temperature'(S5211: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S523.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the LED temperature data included as the status (parameter value, see CMD: 85H, D1 to D3 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the acquired command in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S522). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S535.

In S523, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is'FAN rotation speed (see CMD: 86H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the command type is'FAN rotation speed'(S523: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S524. If the command type is not "FAN rotation speed" (S523: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S525.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the FAN rotation speed data included as the status (parameter value, see CMD: 86H, D1 to D3 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the acquired command in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S524). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S535.

In S525, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is'LED brightness (see CMD: 87H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the command type is'LED brightness'(S525: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S526. When the command type is not "LED brightness" (S525: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S527.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the LED luminance data included as the status (parameter value, see CMD: 87H, D1 to D3 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the acquired command in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S526). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S535.

In S527, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is'horizontal adjustment value (see CMD: 88H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the command type is'horizontal adjustment value'(S527: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S528. If the command type is not'horizontal adjustment value'(S527: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S529.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the horizontal adjustment value included as the status (parameter value, see CMD: 88H, D1 to D10 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the acquired command in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S528). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S535.

In S529, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is'vertical adjustment value (see CMD: 89H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the command type is'vertical adjustment value'(S529: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S530. When the command type is not "vertical adjustment value" (S529: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S531.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the vertical adjustment value included as the status (parameter value, see CMD: 89H, D1 to D5 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the acquired command in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S530). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S535.

In S531, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is'focus adjustment value (see CMD: 8AH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the command type is'focus adjustment value'(S531: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S532. If the command type is not'focus adjustment value'(S531: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S533.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the focus adjustment value included as the status (parameter value, see CMD: 8AH, D1 to D10 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the acquired command in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S532). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S535.

In S533, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is'drift correction temperature (see CMD: 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the command type is'drift correction temperature'(S533: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S534. When the command type is not'drift correction temperature'(S533: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S535.

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the drift temperature included as the status (parameter value, see CMD: 8BH, D1 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the acquired command in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S534). ..

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request completion command transmission process (S535). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating the completion of the status request (see CMD: 84H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector status reception processing.

[Projector drift correction processing]
FIG. 95 shows the projector drift correction process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 adds 1 to the value of the drift correction monitoring counter of the sub RAM board 41 (S541). The drift correction monitoring counter is an addition counter for measuring the timing of periodically correcting and monitoring the temperature drift related to the optical characteristics of the projector device B2.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is, for example, 120 (corresponding to approximately 1 minute) or more as a predetermined value (S542). When the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S542: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S543. When the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is less than a predetermined value (S542: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S545.

Next, the sub CPU 400 clears the value of the drift correction monitoring counter (S543).

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets a status request command (see CMD: 83H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) with the projector control board B23 as the transmission destination in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S544). At this time, the drift correction temperature (see CMD: 83H, D1, * 1 shown in the right column of FIG. 56) is specified as a parameter in the status request command. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. The command set in the process of S544 is transmitted to the projector control board B23 by the process of S450 in FIG. 89.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'drift correction temperature (see CMD: 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'(S545). When the reception command is'drift correction temperature'(S545: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S546. If the reception command is not the'drift correction temperature'(S545: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the drift correction temperature from the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and also acquires the position coefficient of the focus position (S546). The position coefficient of the focus position is a constant factor for obtaining the optimum correction position (focus correction value) according to the temperature characteristics for each of the focus positions A to E. Such a position coefficient may be transmitted as a status from the projector control board B23, may be stored in advance in the sub ROM board 42 or the like, or may be stored in advance on the adjustment screen at the time of optical adjustment in FIG. 124, which will be described later. A menu for inputting the position coefficient of is provided so that it can be set.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the focus drift correction value by multiplying the acquired drift correction temperature and the position coefficient (S547). The focus drift correction value means a value obtained by correcting the focus position according to the ambient temperature around the lens.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the latest focus drift correction value calculated in S547 is equal to the existing correction value in the focus correction value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S548). When the latest focus drift correction value is equal to the existing correction value (S548: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. When the latest focus drift correction value is different from the existing correction value (S548: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S549.

Next, the sub CPU 400 overwrites and saves the focus drift correction value in the focus correction value storage area (S549).

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for requesting a setting change of the focus drift correction value to the projector control board B23 (S550).

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the focus position and the focus drift correction value in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S551). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process.

(Memory map of scaler board SK)
As shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, various information is stored in the ROM included in the SDRAM 712 and the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK. The various storage areas shown in FIGS. 96 and 97 do not show all the information used in the scaler substrate SK. For example, the control program and the like and the work area used by the MCU 700 executed by the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK are not shown in FIGS. 96 and 97.

As shown in FIG. 96, the SDRAM 712 has a first unit for receiving each command in order to exchange commands with the sub-control board SS, the projector control board B23, and the sub-liquid crystal I / F board SL. ~ 3rd reception storage area, 1st to 3rd transmission storage areas for transmitting commands to each, scaler LSI setting storage area for multi-output scaler LSI710, status storage area, flag and other storage areas, multi-output scaler LSI710 And the scaler LSI use area of the MCU (control LSI) 700 is provided. For example, the output 1st to 4th screen horizontal resolution, the output 1st to 4th screen vertical resolution, the input 1st and 2nd screen horizontal resolution, and the output 1st and 2nd screen vertical resolution are stored in the scaler LSI setting storage area. To. The flags and other storage areas store the first to third reception completion flags, the first to third EXT reception flags, the scaler LSI setting flag, the reset request flag, the transmission cycle counter, the error management area, and the self-diagnosis storage area. These stored information will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 97, the ROM of the MCU 700 has the number of output divisions, the number of input divisions, the horizontal resolutions of the first to fourth screens of the output, and the vertical resolutions of the first to fourth screens of the outputs as the initial setting values of the scaler LSI. , Input 1st and 2nd screen horizontal resolution, input 1st and 2nd screen vertical resolution are stored, and as serial line setting values, 1st to 3rd line baud rate, 1st to 3rd line data length, 1st ~ 3rd line parity and 1st to 3rd line stops are stored, and a diagnostic value (55AAH) is stored as a value for self-diagnosis. These stored information will be described later.

(Processing of scaler board SK)
[Scaler board main processing by MCU700]
FIG. 98 shows the scaler substrate main processing by the MCU700 of the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, when the power is turned on, the MCU 700 performs an initialization process of the scaler board SK (S561). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 100.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the first reception completion flag in the storage area are ‘ON’ (S562). When the first reception completion flag is ‘ON’ (S562: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S563. When the first reception completion flag is not ‘ON’ (S562: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S568.

Next, the MCU 700 acquires the received data (command) from the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S563).

Next, the MCU 700 sets the flag and other first reception completion flags in the storage area to ‘OFF’ (S564).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired received data indicates'scaler (see ID: 30H shown in FIG. 53)'(S565). When the destination ID indicates'scaler'(S565: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S567. If the destination ID does not indicate'scaler'(S565: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next process of S566.

Next, the MCU 700 performs a sub-device bypass transmission process (S566). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101.

Next, the MCU 700 performs a processing at the time of reception between the sub-control and the scaler (S567). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102.

Next, the MCU 700 performs a scaler self-diagnosis process (S568). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

Next, the MCU 700 performs a sub-control-scaler transmission time process (S569). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 104.

Next, the MCU 700 performs the sub-control bypass transmission process (S570). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 105.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the reset request flag in the storage area are ‘ON’ (S571). When the reset request flag is ‘ON’ (S571: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S572. If the reset request flag is not ‘ON’ (S571: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S573.

Next, the MCU 700 waits for the watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset (S572). The watchdog timer reset wait is a process of performing an infinite loop process without clearing (or setting a predetermined value) the watchdog timer and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the MCU700. When the timer outputs a reset signal to the MCU 700, the MCU 700 is reset, so that the process is restarted from the first step (S561) in the scaler board main process (also referred to as “reboot”). The same applies to the projector control main process S700 and the sub liquid crystal control main process S871, which will be described later.

In S573, the MCU 700 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

Next, the MCU 700 waits for a cycle of, for example, 2 msec (S574). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S562.

[1st serial line reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 99 shows the first serial line reception interrupt processing by the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK. The first serial line reception interrupt process is a communication interrupt process that captures received data in response to an external request from the sub-control board BB via the first serial line while executing the scaler board main process described above. The MCU 700 is configured to execute the second serial line reception interrupt process and the third serial line reception interrupt process in the same manner as the first serial line reception interrupt process. The second serial line reception interrupt process is a communication interrupt process for capturing received data in response to an external request from the projector control board B23 via the second serial line, and the third serial line reception interrupt process is a third serial line reception interrupt process. 3 This is a communication interrupt process for capturing received data in response to an external request from the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL via the serial line. Since the second and third serial line reception interrupt processing are substantially the same as the first serial line reception interrupt processing except that the lines are different, the illustration thereof is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 99, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the received data from the first serial line (sub-control board SS) is'STX (02H)' indicating the start of the data (S581). When the received data is'STX'(S581: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S582. If the received data is not'STX'(S581: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S583.

Next, the MCU 700 sets the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the first ETX reception flag and the first reception completion flag in the storage area to ‘OFF’, and clears the first reception storage area (S582). After that, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

In S583, the MCU 700 stores the received data from the first serial line (sub-control board SS) in the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the received data is'ETX (03H)'indicating the end of the data (S584). When the received data is'ETX'(S584: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S585. If the received data is not'ETX'(S584: No), the MCU700 shifts to the process of S586.

Next, the MCU 700 sets the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the first ETX reception flag in the storage area to ‘ON’ (S585). After that, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

In S586, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the first ETX reception flag in the storage area are ‘ON’. When the first ETX reception flag is ‘ON’ (S586: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S587. If the first ETX reception flag is not ‘ON’ (S586: No), the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

Next, the MCU 700 performs a received data sum check process (S587).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S587 is normal (S588). When the sum value is normal (S588: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S590. If the sum value is not normal (S588: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the next process of S589. The method of calculating the sum value is the same as that described in the above-mentioned sub-device reception interrupt process (S258 in FIG. 74).

Next, the MCU 700 discards the data in the first serial line reception storage area (S589). After that, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

In S590, the MCU 700 sets the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the first reception completion flag in the storage area to ‘ON’. After that, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

[Scaler initialization process]
FIG. 100 shows a scaler initialization process by the MCU700 of the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 initializes the internal function (S601).

Next, the MCU 700 initializes the first to third serial lines (S602).

Next, the MCU 700 acquires various initial setting values related to the input / output of the multi-output scaler LSI710 from the ROM (S603).

Next, the MCU 700 performs initial settings related to the input / output of the multi-output scaler LSI710 (S604). In this process, the MCU 700 performs initial settings for DSF (α) 821 and DSF (β) 822 and select areas A to D801 to 804 of the multi-output scaler LSI710 based on the initial setting values acquired from the ROM.

Next, the MCU 700 sets the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the scaler LSI setting flag and the reset request flag in the storage area to ‘OFF’ (S605). After that, the MCU 700 ends the scaler initialization process.

[Sub-device bypass transmission process]
FIG. 101 shows the sub-device bypass transmission process by the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the received data indicates'projector (30H)'(S611). When the destination ID indicates'projector'(S611: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next process of S612. When the destination ID does not indicate'projector'(S611: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S614.

Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once captured in the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the second transmission storage area (S612).

Next, the MCU 700 performs a second serial line transmission process (S613). In this process, the MCU 700 outputs the data transmitted from the sub-control board SS to the projector control board B23 to the second serial line. After that, the MCU 700 ends the sub-device bypass transmission process.

In S614, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the received data indicates'sub liquid crystal (ID: 40H shown in FIG. 53)'. When the destination ID indicates'sub liquid crystal'(S614: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next process of S615. When the destination ID does not indicate'sub liquid crystal'(S614: No), the MCU 700 ends the sub device bypass transmission process.

Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once captured in the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the third transmission storage area (S615).

Next, the MCU 700 performs a third serial line transmission process (S616). In this process, the MCU 700 outputs the data transmitted from the sub control board SS to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL to the third serial line. After that, the MCU 700 ends the sub-device bypass transmission process.

[Processing when receiving between sub-control and scaler]
FIG. 102 shows the sub-control-inter-scaler reception processing by the MCU700 of the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, in the MCU 700, the command (CMD) of the received data (hereinafter referred to as “acquired received data” in this process) acquired from the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 by S563 from the sub-control board SS is ‘ It is determined whether or not the status request (see CMD: 03H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'(S621). When the command of the acquired received data is'status request'(S621: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S622. If the command of the acquired received data is not'status request'(S621: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S624.

Next, the MCU 700 registers the transmission request of the command indicating the'status' according to the output setting (D1: 01H) and the input setting (D1: 02H) of the'status request' to the sub-control board SS (S622). ).

Next, the MCU 700 stores various parameter values (D1) included in the acquired received data in the status storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S623). After that, the MCU 700 ends the processing at the time of reception between the sub-control and the scaler.

In S624, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'setting completed (see CMD: 02H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'. When the command of the acquired received data is'setting completed'(S624: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S625. If the command of the acquired received data is not "setting completed" (S624: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S626.

Next, the MCU 700 changes the setting of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 with the set value in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S625). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

In S626, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'start parameter request confirmation (see CMD: 01H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'. When the command of the acquired received data is ‘start parameter request confirmation’ (S626: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next process of S627. If the command of the acquired received data is not'confirm activation parameter request'(S626: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S628.

Next, the MCU 700 sets the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the flag scaler LSI setting flag in the storage area to ‘ON’ (S627). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

In S628, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is "the number of output screen division settings (see CMD: 05H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)". When the command of the acquired received data is "number of output screen division settings" (S628: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next process of S629. When the command of the acquired received data is not "the number of output screen division settings" (S628: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S630.

Next, the MCU 700 stores the number of output screen division settings included in the acquired received data in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S629). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

In S630, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'output screen resolution setting (see CMD: 06H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'. When the command of the acquired received data is'output screen resolution setting'(S630: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S631. If the command of the acquired received data is not "output screen resolution setting" (S630: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S632.

Next, the MCU 700 saves the output screen resolution included in the acquired received data in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S631). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

In S632, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is "the number of input screen division settings (see CMD: 07H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)". When the command of the acquired received data is "number of input screen division settings" (S632: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S633. When the command of the acquired received data is not "the number of input screen division settings" (S632: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S634.

Next, the MCU 700 stores the number of input screen division settings included in the acquired received data in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S633). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

In S634, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'input screen resolution setting (see CMD: 08H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'. When the command of the acquired received data is'input screen resolution setting'(S634: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S635. When the command of the acquired received data is not'input screen resolution setting'(S634: No), the command of the acquired received data is'status request completed (see CMD: 04H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'in the MCU700. Therefore, the process proceeds to S636.

Next, the MCU 700 saves the input screen resolution included in the acquired received data in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S635).

Next, the MCU 700 registers a transmission request for a command indicating'reception confirmation (see CMD: 04H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'to the sub-control board SS (S636). After that, the MCU 700 ends the processing at the time of reception between the sub-control and the scaler.

[Scaler self-diagnosis process]
FIG. 103 shows the scaler self-diagnosis process by the MCU700 of the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 writes, for example, '55AAH' as a diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the SDRAM 712 by the verify check (S641).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area correctly matches the diagnosis value (S642). When the load value matches the diagnostic value (S642: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S644. If the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S642: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next process of S643.

Next, the MCU 700 sets'self-diagnosis abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S643).

Next, the MCU 700 reads the status of the multi-output scaler LSI710 (S644).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the status of the multi-output scaler LSI710 is normal (S645). When the status of the multi-output scaler LSI710 is normal (S645: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S647. If the status of the multi-output scaler LSI710 is not normal (S645: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the next process of S646.

Next, the MCU 700 sets'WDT (watchdog timer) -scaler abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S646).

Next, the MCU 700 reads the output setting of the multi-output scaler LSI710 (S647).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the data related to the output setting stored in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 and the output setting of the implementation of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 have the same set value (S648). When the output setting data of the SDRAM 712 and the actual output setting have the same set value (S648: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S650. When the output setting data of the SDRAM 712 and the actual output setting are different setting values (S648: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S649.

Next, the MCU 700 sets'scaler output setting error'as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S649).

Next, the MCU 700 reads the input settings of the multi-output scaler LSI710 (S650).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the data related to the input settings stored in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 and the input settings for the implementation of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 have the same set values (S651). When the input setting data of the SDRAM 712 and the actual input setting have the same set value (S651: Yes), the MCU 700 ends the scaler self-diagnosis process. When the input setting data of the SDRAM 712 and the actual input setting are different setting values (S651: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S652.

Next, the MCU 700 sets'scaler input setting error'as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S652). After that, the MCU 700 ends the scaler self-diagnosis process.

[Processing during transmission between sub-control and scaler]
FIG. 104 shows the sub-control-inter-scaler transmission time processing by the MCU700 of the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 adds 1 to the transmission cycle counter (S661). This transmission cycle counter is an addition counter for measuring the cycle of transmitting commands from the scaler board SK.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the value of the transmission cycle counter is, for example, 100 or more as a predetermined value (S662). When the value of the transmission cycle counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S662: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S663. When the value of the transmission cycle counter is less than a predetermined value (S662: No), the MCU 700 ends the processing at the time of transmission between the sub-control and the scaler. In the present embodiment, since the above-mentioned scaler substrate main processing is configured to be performed at a cycle of 2 msec, a value of the transmission cycle counter of 100 or more is 2 msec × 100 = 200 msec or more. As a result, data is transmitted to the sub-control board SS at a cycle of approximately 200 msec, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined value of the transmission cycle counter is an arbitrary value (for example, transmission cycle counter: 50 × 2 msec). = 100 msec cycle).

Next, the MCU 700 clears the value of the transmission cycle counter (S663).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the scaler LSI setting flag in the storage area are “OFF” (S664). When the scaler LSI setting flag is ‘OFF’ (S664: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S665. When the scaler LSI setting flag is not ‘OFF’ (S664: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S666.

Next, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating'startup parameter request (see CMD: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'as transmission data for the sub-control board SS (S665). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the first serial line transmission process of S676 described later. After the processing of S665, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

In S666, the MCU 700 determines whether or not error data exists in the error management area of the SDRAM 712. When the error data exists in the error management area (S666: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S667. If there is no error data in the error management area (S666: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S669.

Next, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating'error notification (see CMD: 05H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'as transmission data to the sub-control board SS (S667). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the first serial line transmission process of S676 described later.

Next, the MCU 700 sets the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the reset request flag in the storage area to ‘ON’ (S668). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

In S669, the MCU 700 determines whether or not there is a transmission request for a command indicating'reception confirmation (see CMD: 04H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'to the sub-control board SS. When there is a transmission request of a command indicating'reception confirmation'(S669: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S670. When there is no transmission request of the command indicating'reception confirmation'(S669: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S671.

Next, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating'reception confirmation'to the sub-control board SS as transmission data (S670). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the first serial line transmission process of S676 described later. After the processing of S670, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

In S671, the MCU 700 determines whether or not there is a transmission request for a command indicating'status (see CMD: 03H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'to the sub-control board SS. When there is a transmission request of a command indicating'status'(S671: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S672. When there is no transmission request of the command indicating'status'(S671: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S675.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the data in the status storage area of the SDRAM 712 is the data related to the output setting (S672). When the data in the status storage area is the data related to the output setting (D1: 01H) (S672: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next process of S673. When the data in the status storage area is not the data related to the output setting, that is, the data related to the input setting (D1: 02H) (S672: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S674.

Next, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating "status" related to the output setting to the sub-control board SS as transmission data (S673). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the first serial line transmission process of S676 described later. After the processing of S673, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

In S674, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating "status" related to the input setting to the sub-control board SS as transmission data. This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the first serial line transmission process of S676 described later. After the processing of S674, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

In S675, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating'parameter request'to the sub-control board SS as transmission data. This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the next first serial line transmission process of S676.

Next, the MCU 700 performs the first serial line transmission process (S676). By this transmission process, various commands are transmitted from the scaler board SK to the sub-control board SS. After that, the MCU 700 ends the processing at the time of transmission between the sub-control and the scaler.

[Sub-control bypass transmission processing]
FIG. 105 shows the sub-control bypass transmission process by the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the second reception completion flag in the storage area are'ON'(S681). When the second reception completion flag is'ON'(S681: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S682. When the second reception completion flag is not'ON'(S681: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S684.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the data stored in the second reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 indicates'sub-control'(S682). When the destination ID indicates'sub-control'(S682: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next process of S683. When the destination ID does not indicate'sub-control'(S682: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S684.

Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once captured in the second reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the first transmission storage area (S683). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S687.

In S684, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the third reception completion flag in the storage area are ‘ON’ (S684). When the third reception completion flag is ‘ON’ (S684: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S685. When the third reception completion flag is not “ON” (S684: No), the MCU 700 ends the sub-control bypass transmission process.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the data stored in the third reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 indicates'sub-control'(S685). When the destination ID indicates'sub-control'(S685: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S686. If the destination ID does not indicate'sub-control'(S685: No), the MCU 700 ends the sub-control bypass transmission process.

Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once captured in the third reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the first transmission storage area (S686).

Next, the MCU 700 performs the first serial line transmission process (S687). By this transmission process, various data are transmitted from the sub device (projector control board B23, sub liquid crystal I / F board SL) to the sub control board SS via the scaler board SK. After that, the MCU 700 ends the sub-control bypass transmission process.

(Memory map of projector control board B23)
As shown in FIG. 106, various information is stored in the DRAM, the EEPROM 231 and the ROM included in the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23.

As shown in FIG. 106, the DRAM of the control LSI 230 is provided with a reception storage area, a transmission storage area, various flags & work areas, a general setting value storage area, a setting data storage area, and various work areas (not shown). .. For example, various flags & work areas include reception completion flag, EXT reception flag, start setting flag, horizontal position setting flag, vertical position setting flag, focus position setting flag, error management area, transmission cycle counter, status storage area, and reset. The request flag and self-diagnosis storage area are stored. In the general setting value storage area, horizontal positions A to E offset, vertical positions A to E offset, focus position offsets A to E, focus drift correction values A to E, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, and white color Stores temperature settings, brightness settings, gamma settings, and contrast settings. The setting data storage area stores horizontal position adjustment value, vertical position adjustment value, focus position adjustment value, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, gamma setting, and contrast setting. .. These stored information will be described later.

Further, the EEPROM 231 is provided with a basic setting value storage area. The horizontal position A to E adjustment value, the vertical position A to E adjustment value, and the focus position A to E adjustment value are stored in the basic setting value storage area. The ROM of the control LSI 230 stores an LED temperature table, a control program of the projector control board B23 (not shown), and various constant values. These stored information will be described later.

(Processing of projector control board B23)
[Projector control main processing by control LSI 230]
FIG. 107 shows the projector control main process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, when the power is turned on, the control LSI 230 performs a projector initialization process (S691). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 109.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM and the reception completion flag in the work area are ‘ON’ (S692). When the reception completion flag is ‘ON’ (S692: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S693. When the reception completion flag is not ‘ON’ (S692: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S697.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires reception data from the reception storage area of the DRAM (S693).

Next, the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM and the reception completion flag in the work area to ‘OFF’ (S694).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired received data indicates a'projector (see ID: 30H shown in FIG. 53)'(S695). When the destination ID indicates'projector'(S695: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S696. When the destination ID does not indicate'projector'(S695: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S697.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a sub-control-projector reception processing (S696). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 110.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector self-diagnosis process (S697). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 113.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs an inter-projector transmission process (S698). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 114.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM and the reset request flag in the work area are ‘ON’ (S699). When the reset request flag is ‘ON’ (S699: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S700. When the reset request flag is not ‘ON’ (S699: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S701.

Next, the control LSI 230 waits for the watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset (S700). The watchdog timer reset wait is a process of performing an infinite loop process without clearing (or setting a predetermined value) the watchdog timer and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the control LSI 230. When the timer outputs a reset signal to the control LSI 230, the control LSI 230 is reset, so that the process is restarted from the first step (S691) in the projector control main process (also referred to as “reboot”).

In S701, the control LSI 230 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

Next, the control LSI 230 waits for a cycle of, for example, 4 msec (S702). After that, the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S692.

[Projector serial line reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 108 shows the projector serial line reception interrupt processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. This process is a communication interrupt process that captures received data in response to an external request via the second serial line while executing the above-mentioned projector control main process.

As shown in FIG. 108, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the data received from the second serial line is'STX (02H)'indicating the start of the data (S711). When the received data is'STX'(S711: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S712. When the received data is not ‘STX’ (S711: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S713.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets the ETX reception flag and the reception completion flag in the various flags & work areas of the DRAM to ‘OFF’ and clears the reception storage area (S712). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

In S713, the control LSI 230 stores the received data from the second serial line in the reception storage area of the DRAM.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the received data is'ETX'indicating the end of the data (S714). When the received data is'ETX'(S714: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S715. When the received data is not'ETX'(S714: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S716.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM and the ETX reception flag in the work area to ‘ON’ (S715). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

In S716, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM and the ETX reception flag in the work area are ‘ON’. When the ETX reception flag is ‘ON’ (S716: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S717. If the ETX reception flag is not ‘ON’ (S716: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a received data sum check process (S717).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S717 is normal (S718). When the sum value is normal (S718: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S720. If the sum value is not normal (S718: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S719. The method of calculating the sum value is the same as that described in the above-mentioned sub-device reception interrupt process (S258 in FIG. 74).

Next, the control LSI 230 clears the reception storage area of the DRAM (S719). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

In S720, the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM and the reception completion flag in the work area to ‘ON’. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

[Projector initialization process]
FIG. 109 shows the projector initialization process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 initializes the internal function (S721).

Next, the control LSI 230 initializes the second serial line (S722).

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the horizontal position A adjustment value, the vertical position A adjustment value, and other common settings from the EEPROM 231 (S723).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs the setting control process of the DLP control circuit 232 based on the data acquired in S723 (S724).

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the focus adjustment value A (focus on the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D) from the EEPROM 231 (S725).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs the electric focus control process of the focus mechanism 242 based on the data acquired in S725 (S726). Specifically, according to the electric focus control process, a motor drive signal (excitation signal) for the focus motor 242C is output to adjust the focus to the focus position. The same applies to the process of S755 described later.

Next, the control LSI 230 initializes various flags and work areas of the DRAM (S727). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector initialization process.

[Sub-control-Processing when receiving between projectors]
FIG. 110 shows the sub-control-projector reception processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command (CMD) of the received data acquired from the second serial line is a'status request'(S731). When the command of the received data acquired from the reception storage area of the DRAM in S693 (hereinafter referred to as "acquired received data" in this process) is "status request" (S731: Yes), the control LSI 230 is next. The process proceeds to S732. If the command of the acquired received data is not'status request'(S731: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S734.

Next, the control LSI 230 registers a command transmission request corresponding to the status (see CMD: 85H to 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56) according to the'status request'of the sub-control board SS (S732).

Next, the control LSI 230 stores various parameter values (see CMD: 83H, D1, * 1 shown in the right column of FIG. 56) included in the acquired received data in the status storage area of the DRAM (S733). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the sub-control-projector reception processing.

In S734, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'setting completed (see CMD: 82H shown in the right column of FIG. 56)'. When the command of the acquired received data is'setting completed'(S734: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S735. If the command of the acquired received data is not "setting completed" (S734: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S736.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector internal setting change process (S735). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 111. After that, the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S742.

In S736, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'startup parameter request confirmation (see CMD: 81H shown in the right column of FIG. 56)'. When the command of the acquired received data is'start parameter request confirmation'(S736: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S737. If the command of the acquired received data is not'confirm start parameter request'(S736: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S738.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets the DRAM flag and other activation setting flags in the storage area to ‘ON’ (S737). After that, the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S742.

In S738, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired received data command is a setting-related command (see CMD: 85H to 91H shown in the right column of FIG. 56). When the command of the acquired received data is a command related to setting (S738: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S739. If the command of the acquired received data is not a setting-related command (S738: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S740.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector set value storage process (S739). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 112. After that, the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S742.

In S740, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'the CMD: 92H shown in the right column of FIG. 56 of the test pattern)'. When the command of the acquired received data is'test pattern'(S740: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S741. When the command of the acquired received data is not a'test pattern'(S740: No), the control LSI 230 is because the command of the acquired received data is'status request completed (see CMD: 84H shown in the right column of FIG. 56)'. , S742.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a test pattern display process (S741). According to this process, a test pattern for the operator to confirm the adjustment condition when performing the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 is displayed as a projected image by the projector device B2. When displaying the test pattern, the simple test pattern is displayed on the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 as a virtual image by simulation. The display mode of this simple test pattern will be described later with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124.

Next, the control LSI 230 registers a transmission request for a command indicating'reception confirmation'(S742). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the sub-control-projector reception processing.

[Projector internal setting change process]
FIG. 111 shows a projector internal setting change process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM and the start setting flag in the work area are'ON'(S751). When the start setting flag is'ON'(S751: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S752. When the start setting flag is not'ON'(S751: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S757.

Next, the control LSI 230 is subjected to the horizontal position A adjustment value, the vertical position A adjustment value, the LED brightness setting value, the trapezoidal distortion correction value, and the white from the basic setting value storage area of the EEPROM 231 and the general setting value storage area of the DRAM. The value of the color temperature setting, the value of the brightness setting, the value of the gamma setting, and the value of the contrast setting are acquired (S752).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs the setting change control process of the DLP control circuit 232 based on the data acquired in S752 (S753).

Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a value that is the focus position A adjustment value + the focus position offset A as the control data value of the focus position (S754).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs the electric focus control process of the focus mechanism 242 based on the control data value acquired in S754 (S755).

Next, the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM and all the setting flags in the work area to ‘OFF’ (S756). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change process.

In S757, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the position types (A to E) are set in the various flags of the DRAM and the horizontal position setting flags in the work area. When the position type is set in the horizontal position setting flag (S757: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S758. When the position type is not set in the horizontal position setting flag (S757: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S760.

Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a value that is a horizontal position (change) adjustment value + a horizontal position (change) offset as a control data value indicating the horizontal position of the image projection (S758). Note that (change) corresponds to the changed positions of the horizontal position adjustment values A to E and the horizontal position offsets A to E. For example, if the change is (B), the horizontal position control data value is the horizontal position B adjustment value + the horizontal position B offset.

Next, the control LSI 230 clears the various flags of the DRAM and the horizontal position setting flags in the work area (S759). After that, the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S763.

In S760, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the position types (A to E) are set in the various flags of the DRAM and the vertical position setting flags in the work area. When the position type is set in the vertical position setting flag (S760: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S761. When the position type is not set in the vertical position setting flag (S760: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S7640.

Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a value that is a vertical position (change) adjustment value + a vertical position (change) offset as a control data value indicating the vertical position of the image projection (S761). Note that (change) corresponds to the changed positions of the vertical position adjustment values A to E and the vertical position offsets A to E.

Next, the control LSI 230 clears the various flags of the DRAM and the vertical position setting flags in the work area (S762).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs the setting change control process of the DLP control circuit 232 based on the control data value acquired in S758 or S761 (S763). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change process.

In S764, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the position type (A to E) is set in the various flags of the DRAM and the focus position setting flag in the work area. When the position type is set in the focus position setting flag (S764: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S765. When the position type is not set in the focus position setting flag (S764: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change process.

Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a value that is a focus position (change) adjustment value + a focus position offset (change) + a focus drift correction (change) as the control data value of the focus position (S765). Note that (change) corresponds to the changed positions of the focus adjustment values A to E and the focus position offsets A to E.

Next, the control LSI 230 clears the various flags of the DRAM and the focus position setting flags in the work area (S766).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs the electric focus control process of the focus mechanism 242 based on the control data value acquired in S765 (S767), as in S755. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change process.

[Projector setting value storage process]
FIG. 112 shows the projector set value storage process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 performs the setting range determination process based on the set value data of the received data acquired from the reception storage area in S693 (S771). In this setting range determination process, it is determined whether or not the value is in the range described in the parameter column of CMD: 85H to 8AH shown in the left column of FIG. 56, and the determination result is returned as a return value.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired set value data is valid data from the return value of the determination result (S772). When the acquired set value data is valid data (S772: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S773. If the acquired set value data is not valid data (S772: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector set value storage process.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired set value is of a type to be stored in the EEPROM 231 (see the basic set value, CMD: 89H, 8B, 90H shown in the right column of FIG. 56, and EEPROM shown in FIG. 106). (S773). When the acquired set value is a type to be saved in the EEPROM 231 (S773: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S774. The acquired setting value is not the type to be saved in the EEPROM 231. That is, the general setting value to be saved in the DRAM (CMD: 85H to 88H, 8AH, 8CH to 8FH, 91H shown in the right column of FIG. 56 and the DRAM shown in FIG. 106). ) Etc. (S773: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S776.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the source ID of the acquired data is a'adjustment PC (ID: 05H shown in FIG. 53)'(S774). When the source ID is'adjustment PC'(S774: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S775. If the source ID is not the'adjustment PC'(S774: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector set value storage process.

Next, the control LSI 230 stores the acquired set value in a designated position in the basic set value storage area (see EEPROM shown in FIG. 106) of the EEPROM 231 (S775). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector set value storage process. As a result, the basic setting items related to the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 can be changed on the EEPROM 231 according to the operation of the adjustment PC 1000.

In S776, the control LSI 230 stores the acquired set value at a designated position in the general set value storage area (see DRAM shown in FIG. 106) of the DRAM. As a result, the general setting items related to the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 can be changed on the DRAM not only by the operation of the adjustment PC1000 but also by the operation using the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the type of installation value is a horizontal position offset (S777). When the type of the installation value is horizontal position offset (S777: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S778. When the type of the installation value is not the horizontal position offset (S777: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S779.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets the position types (A to E) in the various flags of the DRAM and the horizontal position setting flags in the work area (S778). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector set value storage process.

In S779, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the type of set value is a vertical position offset. When the type of the installation value is vertical position offset (S779: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S780. When the type of the installation value is not the vertical position offset (S779: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S781.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets the position types (A to E) in the various flags of the DRAM and the vertical position setting flags in the work area (S780). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector set value storage process.

In S781, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the type of the set value is the focus position offset. When the type of the set value is the focus position offset (S781: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S782. When the type of the installation value is not the focus position offset (S781: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector set value storage process.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets the position types (A to E) in the various flags of the DRAM and the focus position setting flags in the work area (S782). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector set value storage process.

[Projector self-diagnosis processing]
FIG. 113 shows the projector self-diagnosis process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 writes, for example, '55AAH' as a diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the DRAM by the verification check (S791).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area correctly matches the diagnosis value (S792). When the load value matches the diagnostic value (S792: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S794. If the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S792: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S793.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'self-diagnosis abnormality (see projector control board error information shown in FIG. 57)'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S793).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs LED temperature diagnosis processing (S794). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the LED temperature based on the temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor B25.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired LED temperature is normal (S795). When the acquired LED temperature is normal (S795: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S797. When the acquired LED temperature is not normal (S795: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S796.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'LED temperature abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S796). Specifically, the temperature sensor B25 detects the temperature near the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and the lens unit B21. The control LSI 230 measures each temperature through the temperature sensor B25, and when the condition in the LED temperature abnormality condition column of the projector control board error information shown in FIG. 57 is satisfied, the value in the status column is the error management of the DRAM. Set in the area. For example, as the LED (G) temperature abnormality related to the LED light source 240G, when the temperature near the LED light source 240G detected by the temperature sensor B25 is 105 ° C. or higher and lower than 110 ° C., a warning (01B (B means Bit)). )) Is set, and if the temperature is 110 ° C. or higher, the shutdown (11B) is set.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a FAN rotation diagnosis process (S797). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the FAN rotation speed based on the fan rotation speed signals from the fans 244A, 244B, and 245.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S798). When the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S798: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S800. When the acquired FAN rotation speed is not normal (S798: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S799.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'FAN rotation abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S799). Specifically, similarly to the above-mentioned LED temperature abnormality, the FAN rotation abnormality is set according to the conditions of the FAN1 to 4 rotation abnormality of the projector control board error information shown in FIG. 57.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector power supply diagnosis process (S800). In this process, the control LSI 230 detects the operating voltage supplied to the projector device B2.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S801). When the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S801: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S803. When the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is less than the specified voltage (S801: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S802.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'voltage abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S802). Specifically, as in the case of the LED temperature abnormality described above, the voltage abnormality is set according to the voltage abnormality condition of the projector control board error information shown in FIG. 57.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs DLP operation diagnosis processing (S803). In this process, the control LSI 230 checks the operation of the DLP control circuit 232.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is normal (S804). When the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is normal (S804: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S806. When the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is not normal (S804: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S805.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'DLP abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S805). Specifically, similarly to the LED temperature abnormality described above, the DLP abnormality is set according to the WDT-DLP condition of the projector control board error information shown in FIG. 57.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not data indicating'LED temperature abnormality'(forced shutdown),' FAN rotation abnormality', or'voltage abnormality'is set in the error management area (S806). .. When data indicating any of the above abnormalities is set in the error management area (S806: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S307. When none of the data indicating the above abnormality is set in the error management area (S806: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector self-diagnosis process.

Next, the control LSI 230 issues a rotation stop command to the FAN 1 to 3 (fans 244A, 244B, 245), or a DLP control circuit 232 or the LED (R, G, B) (LED substrate 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba). To issue a drive stop command (S807). As a result, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector self-diagnosis process. In the present embodiment, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped when the data indicating'LED temperature abnormality',' FAN rotation abnormality', or'voltage abnormality'is set in the error management area. The power must be turned off for recovery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the projector device B2 may be restarted when the abnormality being generated is recovered while the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped.

[Sub-control-Processing during transmission between projectors]
FIG. 114 shows the sub-control-projector-to-projector transmission processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 adds 1 to the transmission cycle counter (S811). This transmission cycle counter is an addition counter for measuring the cycle of transmitting commands from the projector control board B23.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the value of the transmission cycle counter is, for example, 125 (4 msec × 125 = 500 msec) or more as a predetermined value (S812). When the value of the transmission cycle counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (500 msec or more has elapsed since the previous transmission) (S812: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S813. When the value of the transmission cycle counter is less than a predetermined value (S812: No), the control LSI 230 ends the processing at the time of transmission between the sub-control and the projector.

Next, the control LSI 230 clears the value of the transmission cycle counter (S813).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM and the projector setting flag in the work area are “OFF” (S814). When the projector setting flag is ‘OFF’ (S814: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S815. When the projector setting flag is not ‘OFF’ (S814: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S816.

Next, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating'startup parameter request'to the sub-control board SS as transmission data (S815). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the second serial line transmission process of S825 described later. After the processing of S815, the control LSI 230 shifts to the processing of S825.

In S816, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not error data exists in the error management area of the DRAM. When the error data exists in the error management area (S816: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S817. When there is no error data in the error management area (S816: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S820.

Next, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating'error notification (CMD: 84H shown in the left column of FIG. 56 and FIG. 57)'to the sub-control board SS as transmission data (S817). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the second serial line transmission process of S825 described later.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the error data in the error management area is data indicating a self-diagnosis abnormality or a DLP abnormality (S818). When the error data is data indicating a self-diagnosis abnormality or a DLP abnormality (S818: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S819. When the error data is neither the self-diagnosis abnormality nor the data indicating the DLP abnormality (S818: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the processing of S825.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets the various flags of the DRAM and the reset request flag in the work area to ‘ON’ (S819). After that, the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S825.

In S820, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not there is a transmission request for a command indicating'reception confirmation (see CMD: 83H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'to the sub-control board SS. When there is a transmission request for a command indicating'reception confirmation'(S6820: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S821. When there is no transmission request for the command indicating'reception confirmation'(S820: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S822.

Next, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating'reception confirmation'to the sub-control board SS as transmission data (S821). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the second serial line transmission process of S825 described later. After the processing of S821, the control LSI 230 shifts to the processing of S825.

In S822, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not there is a command transmission request corresponding to the status (see left column CMD: 85H to 8BH in FIG. 56) to the sub-control board SS. When there is a command transmission request corresponding to the status (S822: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S823. When there is no transmission request for the command corresponding to the status (S823: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S824.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a status transmission data creation process (S823). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 115. After that, the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S825.

In S824, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating'parameter request (see CMD: 82H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'as transmission data for the sub-control board SS. This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the next second serial line transmission process of S825.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs the second serial line transmission process (S825). By this transmission process, various commands are transmitted from the projector control board B23 to the sub-control board SS via the scaler board SK. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the processing at the time of transmission between the sub-control and the projector.

[Status transmission data creation process]
FIG. 115 shows the status transmission data creation process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter of the DRAM status storage area is the LED temperature (S831). When the parameter of the status storage area is the LED temperature (S831: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S832. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the LED temperature (S831: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S834.

Next, the control LSI 230 inputs data from the temperature sensors B25 of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B to generate temperature data (S832).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the temperature data (CMD: 85H, D1 to D3 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) as a parameter in the'LED temperature (CMD: 85H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'command ( S833). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In S834, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter of the status storage area is the FAN rotation speed. When the parameter of the status storage area is the FAN rotation speed (S834: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S835. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the FAN rotation speed (S834: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S837.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the number of rotation pulses of FAN1 (intake fan 244A), FAN2 (intake fan 244B), and FAN3 (exhaust fan 245) as rotation pulse data (S835).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the FAN rotation pulse number as a parameter in the'FAN rotation speed (CMD: 86H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'command (S836). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In S837, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter of the status storage area is the LED brightness. When the parameter of the status storage area is the LED brightness (S837: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S838. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the LED brightness (S837: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S840.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the luminance data of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B from the DLP control circuit 232 (S838).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the LED luminance data acquired from the'LED luminance number (see CMD: 87H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'command including the LED luminance setting in the status as a parameter (S839). .. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In S840, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter of the status storage area is a horizontal adjustment value. When the parameter of the status storage area is the horizontal adjustment value (S840: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S841. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the horizontal adjustment value (S840: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S843.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the horizontal position A to E adjustment values from the EEPROM 231 (S841).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the values of the horizontal position A to E adjustment values as parameters in the'horizontal adjustment value (see CMD: 88H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'command (S842). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In S843, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter of the status storage area is a vertical adjustment value. When the parameter of the status storage area is the vertical adjustment value (S843: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S844. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the vertical adjustment value (S843: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S846.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the vertical position A to E adjustment values from the EEPROM 231 (S844).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the values of the vertical position A to E adjustment values as parameters in the'vertical direction adjustment value (see CMD: 89H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'command (S845). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In S846, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter of the status storage area is the focus adjustment value. When the parameter of the status storage area is the focus adjustment value (S846: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S847. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the focus adjustment value (S846: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S849.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the focus position A to E adjustment values from the EEPROM 231 (S847).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the values of the focus position A to E adjustment values as parameters in the'focus adjustment value (see CMD: 8AH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'command (S848). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In S849, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter of the status storage area is the drift correction temperature. When the parameter of the status storage area is the drift correction temperature (S849: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S850. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the drift correction temperature (S849: No), the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

Next, the control LSI 230 inputs data from the temperature sensor B25 related to the drift correction temperature and generates drift correction temperature sensor data (S850).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates a'drift correction temperature (see CMD: 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'command including the drift correction temperature sensor data in the status as transmission data (S851). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

(Memory map of sub liquid crystal I / F board SL)
As shown in FIG. 116, various information is stored in the DRAM and ROM included in the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL.

As shown in FIG. 116, the DRAM of the MCU 900 is provided with a reception storage area, a transmission storage area, a flag area, various storage areas, and a sub liquid crystal setting storage area. For example, the reception completion flag, the EXT reception flag, and the sub liquid crystal setting flag are stored in the flag area. The transmission cycle counter, status storage area, reset request flag, error management area, and self-diagnosis storage area are stored in the various storage areas. Horizontal resolution, vertical resolution, and brightness are stored in the sub liquid crystal setting storage area. These stored information will be described later.

Further, the ROM of the MCU900 stores the horizontal resolution, the vertical resolution, and the brightness as the data values of the liquid crystal initial setting area, and the baud rate (third serial line), the data length, and the parity as the serial line setting values. The stop is stored, and the diagnostic value (55AAH) is stored as a value for self-diagnosis. These stored information will be described later. Although not shown in FIG. 116, the DRAM stores various other work areas used by the MCU 900, and the ROM stores the control program and constant data executed by the MCU 900.

(Processing of sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL)
[Sub LCD control main processing by MCU900]
FIG. 117 shows the sub liquid crystal control main process by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, when the power is turned on, the MCU 900 performs a sub liquid crystal initialization process (S861). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 119.

Next, the MCU 900 performs a touch panel input process (S862). In this process, the MCU 900 performs a predetermined operation based on the operation signals (signals corresponding to the touch operation, the flick operation, and the pinch operation) from the touch panel DD19T.

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the reception completion flag in the flag area of the DRAM is ‘ON’ (S863). When the reception completion flag is ‘ON’ (S863: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S864. If the reception completion flag is not ‘ON’ (S863: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S868.

Next, the MCU 900 acquires the received data from the reception storage area of the DRAM (S864).

Next, the MCU 900 sets the reception completion flag in the flag area of the DRAM to ‘OFF’ (S865).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired received data indicates'sub liquid crystal (ID: 40H shown in FIG. 53)'(S866). When the destination ID indicates'sub liquid crystal'(S866: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the next process of S867. When the destination ID does not indicate'sub liquid crystal'(S866: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the process of S868.

Next, the MCU 900 performs a sub-control-sub-liquid crystal reception processing (S867). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 120.

Next, the MCU 900 performs a sub liquid crystal self-diagnosis process (S868). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 121.

Next, the MCU 900 performs a sub-control-sub-liquid crystal transmission time process (S869). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 122.

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the reset request flag in various storage areas of the DRAM is ‘ON’ (S870). When the reset request flag is ‘ON’ (S870: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S871. If the reset request flag is not ‘ON’ (S870: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S872.

Next, the MCU 900 waits for the watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset (S871). The watchdog timer reset wait is a process of performing an infinite loop process without clearing (or setting a predetermined value) the watchdog timer and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the MCU900. The watchdog timer When the reset signal is output to the MCU 900, the MCU 900 is reset, so that the process is restarted from the first step (S861) of the sub liquid crystal control main process (also referred to as "reboot").

In S872, the MCU 900 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

Next, the MCU 900 waits for a cycle of, for example, 4 msec (S873). After that, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S862.

[Sub LCD serial line reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 118 shows the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt processing by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. This process is a communication interrupt process that captures received data in response to an external request via the third serial line while executing the above-mentioned sub liquid crystal control main process.

As shown in FIG. 118, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the received data from the third serial line is'STX (02H)' indicating the beginning of the data (S881). When the received data is'STX'(S881: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the next processing of S882. If the received data is not'STX'(S881: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S883.

Next, the MCU 900 sets the ETX reception flag and the reception completion flag in the DRAM flag area to ‘OFF’ and clears the reception storage area (S882). After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

In S883, the MCU 900 stores the received data from the third serial line in the reception storage area of the DRAM.

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the received data is'ETX (03H)'indicating the end of the data (S884). When the received data is'ETX'(S884: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S885. If the received data is not'ETX'(S884: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S886.

Next, the MCU 900 sets the ETX reception flag in the flag area of the DRAM to ‘ON’ (S885). After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

In S886, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the ETX reception flag in the flag area of the DRAM is ‘ON’. When the ETX reception flag is ‘ON’ (S886: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S887. When the ETX reception flag is not ‘ON’ (S886: No), the MCU900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

Next, the MCU 900 performs a received data sum check process (S887).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S887 is normal (S888). When the sum value is normal (S888: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S890. If the sum value is not normal (S888: No), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S889. The method of calculating the sum value is the same as that described in the above-mentioned sub-device reception interrupt process (S258 in FIG. 74).

Next, the MCU 900 clears the reception storage area of the DRAM (S889). After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interruption process.

In S890, the MCU 900 sets the reception completion flag in the flag area of the DRAM to ‘ON’. After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

[Sub LCD initialization process]
FIG. 119 shows the sub liquid crystal initialization process of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL by the MCU 900. As shown in the figure, the MCU 900 initializes the internal function (S891).

Next, the MCU 900 initializes the third serial line (S892).

Next, the MCU 900 performs screen initial setting of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 based on the horizontal resolution, the vertical resolution, and the brightness stored in the ROM (S893).

Next, the MCU 900 initializes the touch panel DD19T (S894).

Next, the MCU 900 sets the sub liquid crystal setting flag and the reset request flag to ‘OFF’ in the DRAM flag area and various storage areas (S895). After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal initialization process.

[Processing when receiving between sub-control and sub-LCD]
FIG. 120 shows the processing at the time of reception between the sub-control and the sub-liquid crystal by the MCU 900 of the sub-liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the command of the received data acquired from the third serial line in S864 is a'status request (see CMD: 43H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)' (S901). When the command of the acquired received data is'status request'(S901: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S902. If the command of the acquired received data is not'status request'(S901: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the process of S904.

Next, the MCU 900 registers a transmission request of a command indicating "status" in response to the "status request" (S902).

Next, the MCU 900 stores various parameter values included in the acquired received data in the status storage area of the DRAM (S903). After that, the MCU 900 ends the processing at the time of reception between the sub control and the sub liquid crystal.

In S904, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'setting completed (see CMD: 42H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)'. When the command of the acquired received data is'setting completed'(S904: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S905. If the command of the acquired received data is not "setting completed" (S904: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S906.

Next, the MCU 900 changes the setting of the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL with the set value of the sub liquid crystal setting storage area of the DRAM (S905). After that, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S912.

In S906, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'start parameter request confirmation (see CMD: 41H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)'. When the command of the acquired received data is ‘start parameter request confirmation’ (S906: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next process of S907. If the command of the acquired received data is not'confirm start parameter request'(S906: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S908.

Next, the MCU 900 sets the sub liquid crystal setting flag in the flag area of the DRAM to ‘ON’ (S907). After that, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S912.

In S908, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is a'sub LCD screen resolution setting (see CMD: 45H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)' command. When the command of the acquired received data is the'sub LCD screen resolution setting'command (S908: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the next processing of S909. If the command of the acquired received data is not the'sub LCD screen resolution setting'command (S908: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S910.

Next, the MCU 900 stores the set value of the sub liquid crystal screen resolution of the received data acquired in the sub liquid crystal setting storage area of the DRAM (S909). After that, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S912.

In S910, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'sub liquid crystal brightness setting (see CMD: 46H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)'. When the command of the acquired received data is'sub liquid crystal brightness setting'(S910: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S911. If the command of the acquired received data is not'sub liquid crystal brightness setting'(S910: No), the command of the acquired received data is'status request completed (see CMD: 44H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)', so the MCU900 Moves to the process of S912.

Next, the MCU 900 stores the brightness setting value of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 in the sub liquid crystal setting storage area of the DRAM (S911). According to such a process, when the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 is performed, the resolution and the brightness thereof are arbitrarily changed so that the operator who visually recognizes the simple test pattern through the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 can easily see the pattern. be able to.

Next, the MCU 900 registers a transmission request for a command indicating'reception confirmation'(S912). After that, the MCU 900 ends the processing at the time of reception between the sub control and the sub liquid crystal.

[Sub LCD self-diagnosis processing]
FIG. 121 shows the sub liquid crystal self-diagnosis process by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, the MCU 900 writes, for example, '55AAH' as a diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the DRAM by the verification check (S921).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area correctly matches the diagnosis value (S922). When the load value matches the diagnostic value (S922: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S924. If the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S922: No), the MCU900 proceeds to the next process of S923.

Next, the MCU 900 sets'self-diagnosis abnormality (see sub-liquid crystal I / F board error information shown in FIG. 57)'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S923).

Next, the MCU 900 reads the status (operating state) of the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL (S924).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the status of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL is normal (S925). When the status of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL is normal (S925: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the process of S927. When the status of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL is not normal (S925: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the next process of S926.

Next, the MCU 900 sets "WDT-sub liquid crystal abnormality (see sub liquid crystal I / F board error information shown in FIG. 57)" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S926).

Next, the MCU 900 reads the actual data (actual resolution, brightness, etc.) related to the sub liquid crystal image setting (S927).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the set value of the sub liquid crystal setting storage area and the actual data related to the sub liquid crystal image setting are the same set value (S928). When the set value of the sub liquid crystal setting storage area and the actual data related to the sub liquid crystal image setting are the same set value (S928: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the process of S930. When the set value of the sub liquid crystal setting storage area and the actual data related to the sub liquid crystal image setting do not match (S928: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the next process of S929.

Next, the MCU 900 sets "sub liquid crystal screen setting error (see sub liquid crystal I / F board error information shown in FIG. 57)" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S929).

Next, the MCU 900 reads temperature information (sensor temperature) based on a signal of a temperature sensor (not shown) incorporated in the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 (S930).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the sensor temperature is 100 ° C. or higher (S931). When the sensor temperature is 100 ° C. or higher (S931: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next process of S931. When the sensor temperature is less than 100 ° C. (S931: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S933.

Next, the MCU 900 sets'sub liquid crystal temperature abnormality (see sub liquid crystal I / F board error information shown in FIG. 57)'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S932).

Next, the MCU 900 performs an operation state determination process of the touch panel DD19T (S933).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the ON state (either a touch, flick, or pinch state) of the touch panel DD19T is detected for 30 minutes or more (S934). When the ON state of the touch panel DD19T is detected for 30 minutes or more (S934: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next process of S935. If the state is not detected for 30 minutes or more (S934: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S936.

Next, the MCU 900 sets'touch panel input error (see sub liquid crystal I / F board error information shown in FIG. 57)'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S935).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the status, the set value, or the data indicating the'temperature abnormality'is set in the error management area (S936). When any of the above data is set in the error management area (S936: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next process of S937. When none of the above data is set in the error management area (S936: No), the MCU900 ends the sub liquid crystal self-diagnosis process.

Next, the MCU 900 performs a sub liquid crystal operation stop process (S937). As a result, the operations of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T are stopped. After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal self-diagnosis process.

[Sub-control-sub-LCD transmission processing]
FIG. 122 shows the sub-control-sub-liquid crystal transmission process by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, the MCU900 adds 1 to the transmission cycle counter (S941). This transmission cycle counter is an addition counter for measuring the cycle of transmitting commands from the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL.

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the value of the transmission cycle counter is, for example, 50 (200 msec) or more as a predetermined value (S942). When the value of the transmission cycle counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S942: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S943. When the value of the transmission cycle counter is less than a predetermined value (S942: No), the MCU900 ends the sub-control-sub-liquid crystal transmission process.

Next, the MCU 900 clears the value of the transmission cycle counter (S943).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not error data exists in the error management area of the DRAM (S944). When the error data exists in the error management area (S944: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S945. If there is no error data in the error management area (S944: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S947.

Next, the MCU 900 issues an'error notification (see CMD: 45H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'command to the sub-control board SS in the error management area (CMD: 45H, D1: error information shown in the left column of FIG. 55). (Refer to) is added to create transmission data (S945). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the third serial line transmission process of S956 described later.

Next, the MCU 900 sets the reset request flag in various storage areas of the DRAM to ‘ON’ (S946). After that, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

In S947, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the sub liquid crystal setting flag in the flag area of the DRAM is ‘OFF’. When the sub liquid crystal setting flag is ‘OFF’ (S947: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S948. When the sub liquid crystal setting flag is not ‘OFF’ (S947: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S949.

Next, the MCU 900 creates transmission data for the'start parameter request (see CMD: 41H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'command to the sub-control board SS (S948). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the third serial line transmission process of S956 described later. After the processing of S948, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

In S949, the MCU 900 determines whether or not there is a transmission request for the'reception confirmation'command to the sub-control board SS. When there is a transmission request of the'reception confirmation'command (S949: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S950. If there is no transmission request for the'reception confirmation'command (S949: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S951.

Next, the MCU 900 creates transmission data for the'reception confirmation (see CMD: 44H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'command to the sub-control board SS (S950). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the third serial line transmission process of S956 described later. After the processing of S950, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

In S951, the MCU900 determines whether or not there is a request for transmitting a'status' command to the sub-control board SS. When there is a transmission request for the'status' command (S951: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S952. If there is no request to send the'status' command (S951: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S955.

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the data type of the DRAM status storage area is related to touch input (S952). When the data type of the status storage area is related to touch input (S952: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S953. When the data type of the status storage area is not related to the touch input, that is, related to the liquid crystal setting (S952: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the process of S954.

Next, the MCU 900 creates transmission data by adding data in the touch panel input area to the'status (see CMD: 43H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'command related to touch input to the sub-control board SS (S953). ). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the third serial line transmission process of S956 described later. After the processing of S953, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

In S954, the MCU 900 creates transmission data of a command indicating'status (see CMD: 43H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'related to the liquid crystal setting to the sub-control board SS. This transmission data is stored in the third transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the third serial line transmission process of S956 described later. After the processing of S954, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

In S955, the MCU 900 creates transmission data of a command indicating'parameter request (see CMD: 42H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'to the sub-control board SS. This transmission data is stored in the third transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the next S956 third serial line transmission process.

Next, the MCU 900 performs a third serial line transmission process (S956). By this transmission process, various commands are transmitted from the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL to the sub control board SS via the scaler board SK. After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub-control-sub-liquid crystal transmission process.

(Optical adjustment of projector device B2)
FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a test pattern projected during optical adjustment of the projector device B2. The factory inspector (also referred to as the quality assurance person) starts the application software for optical adjustment on the adjustment PC1000, and performs a predetermined operation according to the software menu to perform the fixed screen mechanism D and the front screen mechanism E1. Alternatively, the reel screen mechanism F1 can be operated to display the test pattern TP as shown in FIG. 123 on each projection surface. FIG. 123 shows, as an example, a state in which the test pattern TP is displayed on the reflective portion D1 of the fixed screen mechanism D. The factory inspection worker can observe such a display mode of the test pattern TP from the upper display window UD1 of the game machine 1.

The test pattern TP is, for example, a color scheme in which SMPTE (Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers) color bars are sprited in a circle and small circular patterns arranged at four corners are arranged on a crosshatch pattern in the background. Is.

Specifically, the factory inspector operates any of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 to be the projection target, and each time the projection target is switched. While observing the display mode of the test pattern TP, the projector device B2 can be adjusted so that the display mode is appropriate. As a result, for the projector device B2, horizontal position adjustment value, vertical position adjustment value, focus position adjustment value, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, contrast setting, gamma setting, test Optical adjustment can be performed for each item such as a pattern, horizontal position offset, vertical position offset, focus position offset, and the like.

In the present embodiment, at the time of adjustment work such as before assembling the game machine in, for example, identification symbols'A' to'C' are assigned to each of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1. Using these identification symbols, horizontal positions A to C adjustment values, vertical positions A to C adjustment values, and focus positions A to C adjustment values, which are different for each projection target, are set in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23. Other adjustment items (LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, contrast setting, gamma setting, test pattern, horizontal position offset, vertical position offset, focus position offset) are performed by the gaming machine. After being assembled, it is set in SRAM 401 of the sub-control board SS. It should be noted that the horizontal position offset, the vertical position offset, and the focus position offset can be changed by the maintenance worker at the site such as the amusement park by adjusting the offset.

On the other hand, FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a test pattern TP'and the like displayed on the screen (touch panel DD19T) of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 at the time of optical adjustment of the projector device B2 in the field such as a game hall. After the game machine 1 is installed in the game hall or the like, the maintenance worker can display the test pattern TP'or the like on the touch panel DD19T which is the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 by performing a predetermined operation. .. The maintenance worker can appropriately individually adjust the optical of the projector device B2 by using such a test pattern TP'.

The test pattern TP'displayed on the touch panel DD19T is different from the test pattern TP displayed directly on the projection target, and is displayed as an operation target that can be intuitively transformed as a virtual image by simulation. In addition, the touch panel DD19T displays buttons T1 and T2 for changing the settings of horizontal position offset, vertical position offset, focus position offset, and focus drift correction for each projection target, as well as trapezoidal distortion correction and LED brightness. , The button T3 and the indicator T4 for changing the settings of the white color temperature, the brightness, the contrast, and the gamma value are displayed, and the numeric keypad T5 for inputting various numerical values is also displayed.

Specifically, the maintenance worker displays the test pattern TP'or the like on the touch panel DD19T by performing a predetermined operation, and any one of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is projected. Operate to be the target. After that, the maintenance worker selects one of horizontal position offset, vertical position offset, focus position offset, and focus drift correction by operating the buttons T1 and T2, and directly presses the test pattern TP'by touch panel operation. Adjustments can be made so that the display mode is appropriate while changing. That is, in the test pattern TP', the display position changes up, down, left and right, and the image quality changes according to the operation of the maintenance worker. As a result, with respect to the projector device B2, the settings of the horizontal position offset, the vertical position offset, the focus position offset, and the focus drift correction can be changed for each different projection target. At this time, the maintenance worker can also observe the actual test pattern TP because the test pattern TP is projected from the projector device B2 on the national screen mechanism D at the same time. The horizontal position offset, the vertical position offset, the focus position offset, and the focus drift correction are set in the projector setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 of the sub control board SS and the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41.

In addition, the maintenance worker operates the button T3, the numeric keypad T5, etc. while observing the test pattern TP'with the actual test pattern TP to correct the trapezoidal distortion, LED brightness, white color temperature, brightness, contrast, and gamma value. It is possible to change the settings for each item such as by directly inputting numerical values. At this time, the overall shape or color tone of the test pattern TP'changes according to the operation of the maintenance worker. The values of each item such as trapezoidal distortion correction, LED brightness, white color temperature, brightness, contrast, and gamma value whose settings have been changed in this way are the projector set value storage area of SRAM 401 of the sub-control board SS and the sub-RAM board 41. It is set in the projector setting value storage area of.

Next, a modification of the present invention will be described. The components that are the same as or similar to those according to the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

(Cooling structure of projector device)
FIG. 125 shows a first modification of the projector device. The projector device X shown in the figure has a bottom plate X21 and a cover case X22. Inside the bottom plate X21 and the cover case X22, a lens unit B21 (partially omitted) including a projection lens 210, an LED light source (240R, 240G, 240B) and a DMD (similar to the above) An optical mechanism (not shown) including 241) and the like is provided, and an exhaust fan 245, heat radiating plates 2430, 2431, and a heat sink 243Xa are further provided. A heat sink 243Xc is externally attached to the outside of the cover case X22 so that the entire cover case X22 is exposed. An opening X22B for guiding the irradiation light from the projection lens 210 to the outside is provided on one surface of the cover case X22 (the front surface in FIG. 125). The projector device X of the first modification is directly attached to the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G, and is provided so as to directly guide the irradiation light to the projection target without passing through a mirror.

An LED light source (240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba) and a DMD substrate (241a) (not shown) are provided in contact with one surface (lower surface in FIG. 125) of the heat radiating plate 2430. Another heat radiating plate 2431 is arranged so as to overlap the other one side (upper side in FIG. 125) of the heat radiating plate 2430, and the two heat radiating plates 2430 and 2431 are surface-mounted by screws. A heat-conducting sheet (or heat-conducting gel) is attached to the surface where the heat-dissipating plate 2430 and the heat-dissipating plate 2431 are in contact with each other, and the heat-dissipating plate 2430 is spirally cut with a tap for fixing screws (shown). Z). A mounting hole for screwing with a screw is provided on the upper surface of the heat radiating plate 2431. Further, by removing the screws of the heat radiating plate 2431, the heat pipe 243Xd and the heat sink 243Xc can be removed. The heat radiating plate 2430 is connected so as to transfer the heat generated by the LED light source or the DMD substrate to the heat sink 243Xa via the heat pipe 243Xb. The heat dissipated in the air by the heat sink 243Xa is forcibly exhausted by the exhaust fan 245 through the exhaust port X22D provided in the cover case X22.

On the other hand, the heat radiating plate 2431 is connected so as to transfer heat to the heat sink 243Xc via the heat pipe 243Xd. The heat pipe 243Xd extends from the inside of the cover case X22 to the outside through the hole X22A provided in the cover case X22, and is connected to the heat sink 243Xc provided on the outside. That is, the heat radiating plate 2431 is connected so as to receive the heat generated by the LED light source or the DMD substrate from the heat radiating plate 2430 and further transfer the heat to the heat sink 243Xc via the heat pipe 243Xd. As a result, the heat generated by the LED light source and the DMD substrate is transmitted to the heat sink 243Xc located outside the cover case X22 through the heat radiating plate 2431 and the heat pipe 243Xd, and is guided to the outside of the projector device X by the heat sink 243Xc. The heat is exhausted. Even with such an external heat sink 243Xc, the heat accumulation inside the projector device X can be effectively eliminated, and overheating of optical components such as lenses can be prevented.

FIG. 126 shows a second modification of the projector device. The projector device X'shown in the figure has a bottom plate X21 and a cover case X22, as in the case of the first modification described above, and a lens unit B21 (partially not shown) including a projection lens 210 inside the bottom plate X21 and a cover case X22. An optical mechanism (not shown) including an LED light source (240R, 240G, 240B) and a DMD (241) is provided, and an exhaust fan 245, a heat sink 2430, and a heat sink 243Xa, 243Xc are provided. There is. The heat sink 243Xc is arranged as follows, unlike the one according to the first modification described above.

The heat sink 243Xc is directly bonded to one side (upper side in FIG. 126) of the heat radiating plate 2430, and is provided so that heat can be directly transferred from the heat radiating plate 2430. Further, the fin portion of the heat sink 243Xc is exposed to the outside through an opening X22C provided on one surface (upper surface in FIG. 126) of the cover case X22. According to such an arrangement structure of the heat sink 243Xc, the heat generated by the LED light source and the DMD substrate is efficiently transferred to the fin portion of the heat sink 243Xc located outside the cover case X22 through the heat radiating plate 2430, and the projector device X The heat will be exhausted outside the. Even with the heat sink 243Xc in which the fin portion is exposed to the outside, the heat accumulation inside the projector device X can be effectively eliminated, and overheating of optical parts such as a lens can be prevented.

FIG. 127 shows an arrangement form of the projector device according to the third modification. Although the detailed structure of the projector device X ”shown in the figure is not shown, the same structure as the projector device X'shown in FIG. 126 described above is adopted except that a heat sink exposed to the outside is not provided. That is, in the projector device X ”, a heat radiating plate 2430 is provided so as to face the opening X22C of the cover case X22 instead of the heat sink 243Xc described above, and the upper surface of the heat radiating plate 2430 is slightly protruding from the opening X22C. It is exposed (not shown in FIG. 127). In such a projector device X, a heat radiating plate 2430 exposed from the opening X22C of the cover case X22 is connected to the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G via a metal heat conductive member Y, and is not shown with respect to the upper surface wall G4. It is attached via an attachment. The upper surface wall G4 is made of a metal plate-like member having high thermal conductivity such as stainless steel. According to the attachment structure of such a projector device X ", it occurs inside the device. The heat is efficiently transferred to the upper surface wall G4 through the heat radiating plate 2430 and the heat guiding member Y, and the upper surface wall G4 itself functions as a heat radiating member. Therefore, the heat accumulation inside the projector device X "is effectively eliminated. It is possible to prevent overheating of optical parts such as lenses.

FIG. 128 shows a circuit configuration of a projector device applied to the fourth and subsequent modifications described later. The projector device B2 as shown in FIG. 33 is also applied to the fourth and subsequent modifications. Therefore, the same components as those described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 128, the projector device B2 applied to the fourth and subsequent modifications includes the first temperature sensor B25a, the second temperature sensor B25b, the intake air temperature sensor B26a, and the exhaust as electrical components. A temperature sensor B26b and a plurality of pulse sensors B27a, B27b, B27c are included. Further, the projector device B2 supplies electric power to intake fans 244A (FAN1), 244B (FAN2), exhaust fans 245 (FAN3), LED substrates 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba, DMD substrate 241a, and the like (not shown). The power supply circuit B20 is also included.

The first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b have the same functions as the temperature sensor B25 described above. The first temperature sensor B25a is provided so as to detect the temperature in the vicinity of the LED light source 240R on the LED substrate 240Ra and output the temperature detection signal to the projector control substrate B23. The second temperature sensor B25b is provided so as to detect the temperature in the vicinity of the LED light source 240G or the vicinity of the LED light source 240B on the LED substrate 240Ga or the LED substrate 240Ba and output the temperature detection signal to the projector control substrate B23. As described above, regarding the heat generation characteristics of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B, the LED light source 240G and the LED light source 240B tend to be relatively high, while the LED light source 240R tends to be relatively low. Specifically, the temperature detected by the second temperature sensor B25b tends to be higher than the temperature detected by the first temperature sensor B25a. As for the temperature sensors B25a and B25b of this type, only one of them may be provided according to the specifications. When the first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b are not particularly distinguished, they are referred to as the temperature sensor B25.

The intake air temperature sensor B26a is arranged near the intake port of the intake fan 244B (FAN2), detects the temperature of the air supplied from the outside to the inside of the projector device B2 through the intake fan 244B, and controls the projector. It is provided so as to output a temperature detection signal to the substrate B23. The exhaust temperature sensor B26b is arranged near the exhaust port of the exhaust fan 245 (FAN3), detects the temperature of the air discharged from the inside to the outside of the projector device B2 through the exhaust fan 245, and controls the projector. It is provided so as to output a temperature detection signal to the substrate B23. In general, the temperature detected by the exhaust temperature sensor B26b tends to be higher than the temperature detected by the intake air temperature sensor B26a. As for this type of temperature sensors B26a and B26b, only one of them may be provided according to the specifications. Further, the intake air temperature sensor B26a and the exhaust temperature sensor B26b may be referred to as a ventilation temperature sensor.

The pulse sensor B27a is provided so as to output a pulse signal corresponding to the rotation speed of the intake fan 244A (FAN1) to the projector control board B23 as a rotation speed detection signal of the FAN1. The pulse sensor B27b is provided so as to output a pulse signal corresponding to the rotation speed of the intake fan 244B (FAN2) to the projector control board B23 as a rotation speed detection signal of the FAN2. The pulse sensor B27c is provided so as to output a pulse signal corresponding to the rotation speed of the exhaust fan 245 (FAN3) to the projector control board B23 as a rotation speed detection signal of the FAN3. In the present embodiment, a relatively high rotation type is used for the intake fans 244A and 244B (FAN1, FAN2), and a relatively low rotation type is used for the exhaust fan 245 (FAN3). As a result, the rotation speed detected via the pulse sensors B27a and B27b corresponding to FAN1 and FAN2 tends to be higher than the rotation speed detected via the pulse sensor B27c corresponding to FAN3. Regarding this type of pulse sensors 27a, 27b, 27c, only one or two of them may be provided depending on the specifications. The pulse sensor may be configured by, for example, a photo interrupter.

Assuming the projector device B2 as described above, the fourth to 23rd modifications will be described below. In addition, each of the following modified examples does not necessarily use all of the temperature sensor and the pulse sensor, and can be realized by using only a part of them. Further, with respect to each of the following modified examples, any modified examples can be appropriately combined unless there is a special reason that makes the combination difficult, such as the technical preconditions being broken.

FIG. 129 shows the projector control main process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 as the process according to the fourth modification. The process shown in FIG. 129 is a partial improvement of the process shown in FIG. 107 described above so as to be suitable for the projector device B2 of FIG. 128.

As shown in FIG. 129, when the power is turned on, the control LSI 230 performs a projector initialization process (S1001). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 109.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM and the reception completion flag in the work area are ‘ON’ (S1002). When the reception completion flag is ‘ON’ (S1002: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S1003. When the reception completion flag is not “ON” (S1002: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S107.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires reception data from the reception storage area of the DRAM (S1003).

Next, the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM and the reception completion flag in the work area to ‘OFF’ (S1004).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired received data indicates'projector'(S1005). When the destination ID indicates'projector'(S1005: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S1006. When the destination ID does not indicate'projector'(S1005: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1007.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a sub-control-projector reception processing (S1006). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 110.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector self-diagnosis process (S1007). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 113. The projector self-diagnosis process can also be applied as a process as shown in FIG. 130, which will be described later.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S1008). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 114. The sub-control-projector transmission time process can also be applied as a process as shown in FIG. 135, which will be described later.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not an LED temperature abnormality (shutdown), a FAN rotation abnormality, a FAN temperature abnormality, or a voltage abnormality is written in the error management area of the DRAM (S1009). The LED temperature abnormality (shutdown) means an LED temperature abnormality that leads to a forced shutdown described later, and any temperature near the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B is determined using the LED temperature control table shown in FIG. 131 (a). Generated and stored when detected as above temperature. The FAN rotation abnormality means a FAN rotation abnormality that leads to a forced shutdown, and using the FAN temperature rotation speed control table shown in FIG. 134, it is assumed that any rotation speed of FAN1 to 3 is less than a predetermined rotation speed under a predetermined temperature environment. Generated and stored when detected. The FAN temperature abnormality is generated and stored when the intake air temperature in the vicinity of FAN2 is detected as a predetermined temperature or higher using the FAN temperature control table shown in FIG. 131 (b). The voltage abnormality is generated and stored when, for example, a voltage boost of less than a predetermined specified voltage value is detected in the power supplied from the power supply circuit B20. When any of these errors is written in the error management area (S1009: Yes), the control LSI 230 basically transmits an error notification command to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, so that the control LSI 230 of S1010 Move to processing. The error notification will be described later. On the other hand, when none of the abnormalities is written in the error management area (S1009: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1013. As the FAN temperature control table, a table as shown in FIG. 132, which will be described later, can be applied instead of the table shown in FIG. 131 (b). Further, a FAN temperature rotation speed control table as shown in FIG. 134, which will be described later, can also be applied.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS responds by, for example, returning a status request command in response to the error notification command transmission (S1010). When the sub CPU 400 responds (S1010: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1012. When the sub CPU 400 is not responding (S1010: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1011.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after confirming that any abnormality is written in the error management area of the DRAM (S1011). When the predetermined time has elapsed (S1011: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1012. When the predetermined time has not elapsed (S1011: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1013.

Next, the control LSI 230 sends a rotation stop command to the FAN 1 to 3 and a drive stop command to the LED driver 233 for driving the DLP control circuit 232 and the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B (S1012). As a result, the main operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly shut down.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM and the reset request flag in the work area are ‘ON’ (S1013). When the reset request flag is ‘ON’ (S1013: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S1014. When the reset request flag is not ‘ON’ (S1013: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1015.

Next, the control LSI 230 waits for the watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset (S1014). The watchdog timer reset wait is a process of performing an infinite loop process without clearing (or setting a predetermined value) the watchdog timer and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the control LSI 230. When the timer outputs a reset signal to the control LSI 230, the control LSI 230 is reset, so that the process is restarted from the first step (S1001) in the projector control main process (also referred to as “reboot”).

In S1015, the control LSI 230 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

Next, the control LSI 230 waits for a cycle of, for example, 4 msec (S1016). After that, the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1002.

FIG. 130 shows a self-diagnosis process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 as a process according to the fourth modification. The process shown in FIG. 130 is a partial improvement of the process shown in FIG. 113 described above so as to be a process suitable for the projector device B2 of FIG. 128 in conjunction with the projector control main process of FIG. 129.

As shown in FIG. 130, the control LSI 230 writes, for example, '55AAH' as a diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the DRAM by the verification check (S1021).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area correctly matches the diagnosis value (S1022). When the load value matches the diagnostic value (S1022: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1024. If the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S1022: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S1023.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'self-diagnosis abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1023). This self-diagnosis abnormality includes an error due to waiting for a reset of the watchdog timer (WDT) described later. When the error information related to the self-diagnosis abnormality including the WDT reset wait is set, the control LSI 230 transmits a command indicating an error notification in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S1008) shown in FIG. 129 described above. (See S817 in FIG. 135 to be described later), set the reset request flag to'ON'(see S818 and S819' in FIG. 135 to be described later), and described above according to the reset signal from the watchdog timer. The projector initialization process (S1001) shown in FIG. 129 is executed. The sub-control-projector transmission time processing and the projector initialization processing executed in this case will be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs LED temperature diagnosis processing (S1024). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the LED temperature based on the temperature detection signals from the first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired LED temperature is normal (S1025). When the acquired LED temperature is normal (S1025: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1027. When the acquired LED temperature is not normal (S1025: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S1026.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'LED temperature abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1026). Specifically, the first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b detect temperatures in the vicinity of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B. By measuring each temperature through the first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the measured temperature is equal to or higher than the predetermined temperature based on the LED temperature control table of FIG. 131 (a). If the temperature is equal to or higher than the predetermined temperature, error information indicating an abnormality related to a warning or forced shutdown is set in the error management area of the DRAM. The warning means a warning display before the forced shutdown, and the forced shutdown causes the main operations of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and FAN1 to 3 of the projector device B2 to be abnormal such as temperature and FAN rotation speed. It means to forcibly stop according to.

For example, as the error information of the LED (R) temperature abnormality related to the LED light source 240R, a warning is set when the temperature near the LED light source 240R detected by the first temperature sensor B25a is 85 ° C. or higher and lower than 90 ° C. If the temperature is 90 ° C. or higher, forced shutdown is set. Further, the error information of the LED (G) temperature abnormality related to the LED light source 240G and the error information of the LED (B) temperature abnormality related to the LED light source 240B are different from the error information of the LED (R) temperature abnormality, and the generation conditions are different. A warning is set when the temperature near the LED light source 240G or the vicinity of the LED light source 240B detected by the temperature sensor B25b is 100 ° C. or higher and less than 105 ° C., and a forced shutdown is set when the temperature is 105 ° C. or higher. When the error information related to the LED temperature abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S1008) shown in FIG. 129 described above (described later). (See S817 in FIG. 135), and without setting the reset request flag to'ON'(see S818 and S819'in FIG. 135 to be described later), a command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. (See S825 of FIG. 135, which will be described later). The sub-control-projector transmission time processing and the projector initialization processing executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a FAN rotation diagnosis process (S1027). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the FAN rotation speed based on the fan rotation speed signals from the pulse sensors B27a to B27c of the FAN1 to 3.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S1028). When the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S1028: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1030. When the acquired FAN rotation speed is not normal (S1028: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S1029.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'FAN rotation abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1029). Specifically, the pulse sensors B27a to B27c detect the rotation speeds of FAN1 to 3. Further, for example, the intake air temperature sensor B26a detects the intake air temperature of FAN2 as a reference FAN temperature. The control LSI 230 measures the respective rotation speeds through the pulse sensors B27a to B27c and also measures the FAN temperature through the intake air temperature sensor B26a, so that the FAN temperature is set to a predetermined temperature based on the FAN temperature rotation speed control table of FIG. 134. It is determined whether or not it is (for example, 32 ° C.) or less, and if the FAN temperature is not more than a predetermined temperature, any of the rotation speeds of FAN1 to 3 is a predetermined rotation speed individually defined (for example, FAN1: 4410 rpm, FAN2 If it is less than (4410 rpm, FAN3: 3710 rpm), error information indicating an abnormality related to forced shutdown is set in the error management area of the DRAM, and if the FAN temperature is higher than the predetermined temperature, any of FAN1 to 3 If the rotation speed is less than the specific rotation speed (for example, FAN1: 6090rpm, FAN2: 4410rpm, FAN3: 4410rpm) individually specified as a harsher condition than the above-mentioned one, error information indicating an abnormality related to forced shutdown is displayed. Set in the error management area of the DRAM.

For example, based on the FAN temperature rotation speed control table of FIG. 134, the error information of the rotation speed abnormality related to FAN1 is when the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27a is less than 4410 rpm when the FAN temperature is 32 ° C. or less. , Forced shutdown is set. Further, as the error information of the rotation speed abnormality related to FAN1, forced shutdown is set when the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27a is less than 6090 rpm when the FAN temperature is higher than 32 ° C. Based on the FAN temperature rotation speed control table of FIG. 134, forced shutdown is set for the error information of the rotation speed abnormality related to FAN2 and FAN3 when the same conditions are satisfied. When the error information related to the FAN rotation speed abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S1008) shown in FIG. 129 described above (S1008). A command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS without setting the reset request flag to'ON'(see S818 and S819'in FIG. 135 described later) without setting the reset request flag to'ON'. (See S825 in FIG. 135, which will be described later). The sub-control-projector transmission time processing and the projector initialization processing executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a FAN temperature diagnostic process (S1030). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the intake air temperature as the FAN temperature based on, for example, the temperature detection signal from the intake air temperature sensor B26a.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired FAN temperature is normal (S1031). When the acquired FAN temperature is normal (S1031: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1033. When the acquired FAN temperature is not normal (S1031: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S1032. For example, a temperature sensor may be installed in each of the FANs 1 to 3, and the FAN rotation speed may be controlled according to the FAN temperatures 1 to 3 detected by each temperature sensor.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'FAN temperature abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1032). Specifically, the intake air temperature sensor B26a detects the FAN temperature (intake air temperature) in the vicinity of FAN2. The control LSI 230 measures the FAN temperature through the intake air temperature sensor B26a to determine whether or not the FAN temperature is equal to or higher than the predetermined temperature based on the FAN temperature control table shown in FIG. 131 (b). For example, error information indicating an abnormality related to forced shutdown is set in the error management area of the DRAM. For example, as the error information of the FAN temperature abnormality, if the FAN temperature detected by the intake air temperature sensor B26a is 67 ° C. or higher, forced shutdown is set. When such error information related to the FAN temperature abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S1008) shown in FIG. 129 described above (described later). (See S817 in FIG. 135), and without setting the reset request flag to'ON'(see S818 and S819'in FIG. 135 to be described later), a command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. (See S825 of FIG. 135, which will be described later). The sub-control-projector transmission time processing and the projector initialization processing executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector power supply diagnosis process (S1033). In this process, the control LSI 230 detects the operating voltage of the electric power supplied from the power supply circuit B20 of the projector device B2.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S1034). When the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S1034: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1036. When the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is less than the specified voltage (S1034: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S1035.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'voltage abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1035). Specifically, for example, error information of a voltage abnormality indicating an abnormal voltage drop is set. When the error information related to such a voltage abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S1008) shown in FIG. 129 described above (described later). Without setting the reset request flag to'ON'(see S818 and S819'in FIG. 135, which will be described later), a command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS without setting the reset request flag to'ON'(see S817 in FIG. 135). See S825 in FIG. 135, which will be described later). The sub-control-projector transmission time processing and the projector initialization processing executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs DLP operation diagnosis processing (S1036). In this process, the control LSI 230 checks the operation of the DLP control circuit 232.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is normal (S1037). When the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is normal (S1037: Yes), the control LSI 230 ends the projector self-diagnosis process. If the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is not normal (S1037: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S1038.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'DLP error'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1038). When the error information related to such a DLP abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S1008) shown in FIG. 129 described above (described later). (See S817 in FIG. 135), after setting the reset request flag to'ON'(see S818 and S819'in FIG. 135 described later), the initial projector shown in FIG. 129 described above according to the reset signal from the watchdog timer. The resetting process (S1001) is executed. That is, since the command indicating the error notification is created as transmission data in S1008 and the reset request flag is set to'ON', the error notification command created in S1008 is the process of S727'in FIG. 136 after the reboot. Will be sent at. At this time, the error notification command or the information indicating the error notification can be stored in the EEPROM 231. In such a case, even if a voltage change (such as an abnormality due to a drop, a break, or a rise) occurs due to a power failure or restart, the commands and information can be retained without being erased. The sub-control-projector transmission time processing and the projector initialization processing executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector self-diagnosis process.

According to such a projector control main process and a projector self-diagnosis process, an error notification command is transmitted to the sub-control board SS in response to various abnormalities of the projector device B2, and at that time, a response from the sub-control board SS is received. If there is, the operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly shut down, so that it is possible to avoid malfunction due to heat accumulation of the projector device B2 and eliminate the discomfort of the image that lasts for a long time.

Further, even if there is no response from the sub-control board SS, the operation of the projector device B2 is automatically shut down after a predetermined time such as 30 seconds elapses, so that the malfunction of the projector device B2 can be reliably avoided. Can be done. In the case of a DLP error, that is, in the case of error processing by the watchdog timer, a reboot (initialization process) is performed, and an error transmission is performed after the reboot. In the case of this kind of DLP abnormality, there is a high possibility that the projector device B2 is frozen, and it is difficult to notify the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS (for example, the communication status is not normal, transmission). It is assumed that commands and information to be created cannot be created normally). Therefore, an error transmission is executed after the reboot. The DLP abnormality may be treated in the same manner as other errors, and the error related to the DLP abnormality may be transmitted before the reboot. Further, when the projector device B2 itself reboots or shuts down, communication with the sub CPU 400 is not performed for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) or more, so that the sub CPU 400 detects an abnormality and the projector from the sub CPU 400. A reboot instruction (or restart) may be given to the device B2. If the sub CPU 400 cannot receive the signal from the projector device B2 for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) or more, it is determined that the projector device B2 is likely to be executing the reboot process, and the signal is transmitted after the reboot process. When the sub CPU 400 does not receive the incoming error notification command (that is, when a time longer than 1000 ms, for example, 5000 ms has elapsed), the sub CPU 400 controls the projector device B2 to be forcibly rebooted. Alternatively, the error may be notified.

FIG. 131 shows an LED temperature control table and a FAN temperature control table stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 as reference tables according to the fourth modification.

As shown in FIG. 131 (a), in the LED temperature control table, the control conditions corresponding to the temperature abnormality of the LED light source 240R (LED (R)), the LED light source 240G (LED (G)), and the LED light source 240B ( The control conditions corresponding to the temperature abnormality of the LED (B)) are specified to be different.

For example, regarding the LED light source 240R (LED (R)), the operation is normally controlled when the LED temperature is 0 ° C. or higher and lower than 85 ° C., and the operation is controlled without stopping when the LED temperature is 85 ° C. or higher and lower than 90 ° C. However, it is controlled to perform a warning (warning display) as a temperature abnormality by the projected image on the screen or the display image of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and when the LED temperature becomes 90 ° C. or higher, the projector device B2 It is controlled to forcibly shut down the main operation. At the time of warning, the control LSI 230 performs the corresponding processing, and the command related to the error warning is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, and the projector device B2 displays a projected image indicating the warning on the screen. On the other hand, on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, an image showing the shutdown of the projector device B2 is displayed. At the time of forced shutdown, a command related to error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, so that the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image indicating the shutdown of the projector device B2.

On the other hand, regarding the LED light source 240G (LED (G)) and the LED light source 240B (LED (B)), if the LED temperature is 0 ° C. or higher and lower than 100 ° C., the operation is normally controlled and the LED temperature is 100 ° C. or higher 105. Although the operation is controlled without stopping at a temperature lower than ° C., it is controlled to give a warning (warning display) as a temperature abnormality by the projected image on the screen or the display image of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and the LED temperature is further increased. When the temperature rises above 105 ° C., the main operation of the projector device B2 is controlled to be forcibly shut down. Even in the case of such a warning, the corresponding processing is performed by the control LSI 230, and a command related to an error warning is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, and the projector device B2 indicates the warning on the screen. While the projected image is displayed, the sub-liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image showing the shutdown of the projector device B2. Further, even at the time of forced shutdown, a command related to error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, so that the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image indicating the shutdown of the projector device B2. The image indicating the warning or shutdown is projected by the projector device B2 and is also displayed on the liquid crystal display device DD19 in the same manner as the projected image. As a result, even when projection by the projector device B2 is difficult or impossible, or when display by the liquid crystal display device DD19 is difficult or impossible, an image indicating a warning or shutdown is displayed by either display means. It is possible to reliably notify the player and the game hall manager to that effect. At this time, in addition to the projection by the projector device B2 and the display by the liquid crystal display device DD19, an error occurs from the external centralized terminal board 31 of the game machine 1 to the management device of the game hall such as a hall computer or an island control computer. You may tell and notify. Further, as the display means of the present embodiment, a project evening device, a screen, a liquid crystal display device, a display device by lighting in dot units using an LED, a touch panel, a flexible liquid crystal display device, an illumination array (registered trademark), a transparent liquid crystal Display, transparent screen, movable accessory, non-movable accessory, etc. can be applied. The number of projector devices, screens, and liquid crystal display devices is not particularly limited. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a security signal is externally output from the main control board MS and the payout / launch control circuit (not shown) via the external centralized terminal board 31, but from the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. The security signal may be output externally.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131 (b), in the FAN temperature control table, the FAN temperature (intake air temperature) of the FAN 2 is basically targeted, and the control conditions corresponding to the FAN temperature are defined.

For example, if the FAN temperature is 0 ° C or higher and lower than 67 ° C, the operation is normally controlled, and if the FAN temperature is 67 ° C or higher, the main operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly shut down without warning (warning display). Is controlled by. Even during such a forced shutdown due to the FAN temperature, a command related to an error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, so that the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image indicating the shutdown of the projector device B2. Will be done. Also in this case, the image indicating the warning or shutdown is projected by the projector device B2 and is also displayed on the liquid crystal display device DD19 in the same manner as the projected image. As a result, even when projection by the projector device B2 is difficult or impossible, or when display by the liquid crystal display device DD19 is difficult or impossible, an image indicating a warning or shutdown is displayed by either display means. It is possible to reliably notify the player and the game hall manager to that effect. Further, in addition to the projection by the projector device B2 and the display by the liquid crystal display device DD19, the external centralized terminal board 31 of the game machine 1 notifies the management device of the game hall such as a hall computer or an island computer that an error has occurred. It may be notified.

According to such an LED temperature control table and a FAN temperature control table, the LED temperature related to the LED light source 240R (LED (R)), the LED light source 240G (LED (G)), and the LED light source 240B (LED (B)) is determined. When the temperature rises to a specified temperature (for example, LED (R): 85 ° C., LED (G), (B): 100 ° C.), a warning is given because it is determined to be abnormal, and the LED temperature further rises. Even if the temperature exceeds the specified temperature (for example, LED (R): 90 ° C., LED (G), (B): 105 ° C.), or the intake air temperature (FAN temperature) near FAN2 is lower than the LED temperature. When the temperature rises above the above temperature (for example, 67 ° C.), the main operation of the light source device B2 is temporarily stopped by forced shutdown. , It is possible to eliminate the discomfort of the image that lasts for a long time.

Further, according to the LED temperature control table and the FAN temperature control table, when the temperature of the LED (R) becomes, for example, 85 ° C. or higher, or the temperature of the LEDs (G), (B) becomes higher, for example, 100 ° C. or higher, the sub An error warning is issued to the CPU 400, and the temperature of the LED (R) rises to, for example, 90 ° C or higher, or the temperatures of the LEDs (G), (B) rise to, for example, 105 ° C or higher, or , When the intake air temperature of FAN2 is lower than the temperature (85 ° C.) at which the warning (error warning) of LED (R) is performed and becomes the specified temperature of FAN2, for example, 67 ° C. or higher, the projector device B2 operates. Is temporarily stopped by forced shutdown, so the malfunction due to heat accumulation of the projector device B2 should be notified in advance by a warning to the sub CPU 400 and then appropriately avoided to eliminate the discomfort of the image that lasts for a long time. Can be done. The temperature (85 ° C.) at which the warning of the LED (R) is performed is not limited to the LED (R), but is a temperature that serves as a criterion for determining the occurrence of an abnormality in the entire LED including the LED (G) and the LED (B). May be. That is, when there are a plurality of types of LEDs such as LEDs (R), LEDs (G), and LEDs (B), the presence or absence of an abnormality may be determined based on the temperature of any one type of LED. The intake air temperature of the FAN 2 is a temperature that can be recognized as the temperature around the intake fan, the temperature of the intake fan itself, the temperature outside the projector device, the outside air temperature, or the like.

Further, according to the LED temperature control table and the FAN temperature control table, for example, when the temperature of the LED (R) becomes 85 ° C. or higher, a warning is given to the sub CPU 400, and a warning related to error notification is given on the screen accordingly. Is projected and displayed, and an image showing a warning related to the same error notification is separately displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device DD19. Further, when the temperature of the LED (R) rises to, for example, 90 ° C. or higher, or when the intake temperature of the FAN2 rises to, for example, 67 ° C. or higher, an error notification is sent to the sub CPU 400, and a warning is given accordingly. After the images related to different error notifications are displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, the operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly stopped by the response from the sub CPU 400 to the error notification. As a result, the malfunction due to the heat accumulation of the projector device B2 is appropriately avoided after being notified in advance by the error notification related to the warning and the error notification related to the subsequent forced shutdown, and the discomfort of the image that lasts for a long time can be avoided. It can be resolved. In such a case, if there is no response from the sub CPU 400 even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 s) has elapsed, the shutdown can be forcibly performed.

FIG. 132 shows a FAN temperature control table stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 as a table according to the fifth modification. The table shown in FIG. 132 is an improved version of the FAN temperature control table shown in FIG. 131 (b).

In the FAN temperature control table shown in FIG. 132, the control conditions corresponding to the temperature abnormality of the intake air temperature (FAN2) and the control conditions corresponding to the temperature abnormality of the exhaust temperature (FAN3) are defined to be different.

For example, the intake air temperature is controlled to forcibly shut down the main operation of the projector device B2 when the temperature exceeds 67 ° C., as shown in FIG. 131 (b). At the time of forced shutdown, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image indicating the shutdown of the projector device B2. On the other hand, regarding the exhaust temperature, the operation is normally controlled until it reaches, for example, 75 ° C, which is somewhat higher than the intake temperature, and at 75 ° C or higher and lower than 80 ° C, the operation is controlled without stopping, but on the screen. It is controlled to perform a warning (warning display) as a temperature abnormality by the projected image and the display image of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and further, when the exhaust temperature becomes 80 ° C. or higher, the main operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly shut down. Be controlled. Even in the case of such a warning, the corresponding processing is performed by the control LSI 230, and a command related to an error warning is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, and the projector device B2 indicates the warning on the screen. While the projected image is displayed, the sub-liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image showing the shutdown of the projector device B2. Further, even at the time of forced shutdown, a command related to error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, so that the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image indicating the shutdown of the projector device B2.

FIG. 133 shows a process at the time of receiving a projector error notification by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as the process according to the sixth modification. The process shown in FIG. 133 is a partial improvement of the process shown in FIG. 93 described above so as to be suitable for the projector device B2 of FIG. 128.

As shown in FIG. 133, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector error occurrence process in response to an error notification from the projector control board B23 (S1041).

Next, if the projector error is a warning, the sub CPU 400 makes a display request to both the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the projector device B2 so as to notify the warning, while the projector device B2. In response to this, a response signal (command) corresponding to the error notification is transmitted (S1042). If the projector error is not a warning, the sub CPU 400 skips the process of S1042 and shifts to the next process of S1043.

Next, if the projector error is shutdown, the sub CPU 400 makes a display request to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 so that the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 notifies the sub liquid crystal display device B2 regarding the shutdown, and then the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. When the display device DD19 is notified of the shutdown, a response signal (command) corresponding to the error notification is subsequently transmitted to the projector device B2 (S1043).

Next, the sub CPU 400 makes a sound projector error generation output request to the speaker group 62 in order to notify the error of the projector control board B23 (projector device B2) by sound (S1044). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the projector error notification.

By using the FAN temperature control table of FIG. 132 in combination with the LED temperature control table of FIG. 131 (a) and executing the process at the time of receiving the projector error notification of FIG. 133, for example, the LED (R) When the temperature is 85 ° C. or higher, or the exhaust temperature of FAN3 is lower than that temperature, for example, 75 ° C. or higher, it is determined that there is an abnormality, and an error notification related to a warning is sent to the sub CPU 400, and further, the LED (R) When the temperature of the projector device B2 rises to, for example, 90 ° C. or higher, or when the intake temperature of FAN2 becomes lower than the exhaust temperature, for example, 67 ° C. or higher, the operation of the projector device B2 is automatically stopped by forced shutdown. The malfunction due to the heat accumulation of the projector device B2 can be appropriately avoided after notifying in advance by a warning to the sub CPU 400, and the discomfort of the image over a long period of time can be eliminated.

FIG. 134 shows a FAN temperature rotation speed control table stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 as a table according to the seventh modification.

As shown in FIG. 134, in the FAN temperature rotation speed control table, the shutdown control conditions are specified to be different based on the lower limit of the FAN rotation speed specified for each FAN 1-3. Further, as the FAN temperature, for example, the intake air temperature of FAN2 is applied.

For example, when the FAN temperature (FAN2) is 32 ° C. or lower, for FAN1 for intake, if the FAN rotation speed is less than 4410 rpm specified as the lower limit value, it is determined that the intake capacity is insufficient and a rotation speed error is made, and for intake For FAN2, when the FAN rotation speed is less than 4410 rpm specified as the lower limit value, it is judged as a rotation speed error due to insufficient intake capacity, and for FAN3 for exhaust, the FAN rotation speed is less than 3710 rpm specified as the lower limit value. When it becomes, it is judged that the rotation speed error is due to insufficient intake capacity. When the rotation speed error is determined in this way, the main operation of the projector device B2 is controlled to be forcibly shut down.

On the other hand, when the FAN temperature (FAN2) is higher than 32 ° C., it is required to exert a larger intake / exhaust (ventilation) capacity. Therefore, when the FAN temperature (FAN2) becomes higher than 32 ° C., the lower limit of a part of the FAN rotation speed is raised. As a result, when the FAN temperature (FAN2) is higher than 32 ° C., for FAN1 for intake, if the FAN rotation speed is less than 6090 rpm specified as the lower limit value higher than the above, it is determined that the intake capacity is insufficient and the rotation speed error. When the FAN rotation speed of FAN2 for intake becomes less than 4410 rpm, which is defined as the same lower limit value as above, it is determined that the rotation speed error is due to insufficient intake capacity, and for FAN3 for exhaust, the FAN rotation speed is described above. If it becomes less than 4410 rpm specified as a higher lower limit value, it is determined that the rotation speed error is due to insufficient intake capacity. Even when the rotation speed error is determined in this way, the main operation of the projector device B2 is controlled to be forcibly shut down.

According to such a FAN temperature rotation speed control table, when the FAN temperature becomes higher than, for example, 32 ° C., the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by forced shutdown, and even if the FAN temperature is 32 ° C. or less, such a temperature condition is established. Therefore, with respect to FAN3 for exhaust and FAN1 for intake, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by forced shutdown according to the respective FAN rotation speeds. Further, when the FAN temperature is 32 ° C. or lower, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by forced shutdown according to the FAN rotation speed of the intake FAN2 corresponding to the FAN temperature regardless of the temperature, so that the heat of the projector device B2 is generated. It is possible to appropriately avoid malfunctions due to accumulation according to the FAN temperature and the FAN rotation speed, and eliminate the discomfort of the image that lasts for a long time.

Further, according to the FAN temperature rotation speed control table, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by forced shutdown according to the FAN temperature and the FAN rotation speed of the FAN3 for exhaust, while for intake regardless of the detected FAN temperature. Since the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by the forced shutdown even according to the FAN rotation speed of the FAN2, the malfunction due to the heat accumulation of the projector device B2 can be appropriately avoided according to the FAN temperature and the FAN rotation speed for a long time. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort of the image that extends.

Further, according to the FAN temperature rotation speed control table, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by forced shutdown according to the FAN temperature of the FAN2 for intake, the FAN3 for exhaust, and the FAN rotation speed of FAN1 for intake. Therefore, the malfunction due to the heat accumulation of the projector device B2 can be appropriately avoided according to the FAN temperature and the FAN rotation speed, and the discomfort of the image over a long period of time can be eliminated.

In addition, all of FAN1 to 3 are provided with temperature sensors, and the FAN of each FAN1 to 3 according to the airflow temperature passing through each of the FAN1 to 3 detected by the respective temperature sensors. Stop control may be performed by the number of revolutions or shutdown.

FIG. 135 shows a process during transmission between the sub-control and the projector by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 as the process according to the eighth modification. The process shown in FIG. 135 is executed in S1008 in the projector control main process of FIG. 129 described above, and is a partial improvement of only the process of S819 shown in FIG. 114 described above. Therefore, in FIG. 135, the processes other than S819'are indicated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the process of S819' will be described.

As shown in FIG. 135, in S819', the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM and reset request flags in the work area to'ON'. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the processing at the time of transmission between the sub-control and the projector. That is, in the case of a self-diagnosis error or a DLP error including an error due to waiting for the watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset, the reset request flag'ON Waiting for the reset signal to be output from the watchdog timer (WDT) in response to', and when the reset signal is output, the projector initialization process shown in Fig. 136 below is executed by rebooting. It becomes.

FIG. 136 shows a projector initialization process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 as a process according to the eighth modification. The process shown in FIG. 136 is executed in S1001 in the projector control main process of FIG. 129 described above, and is a partial improvement of only the process of S727 shown in FIG. 109 described above. Therefore, in FIG. 136, the processes other than S727'are indicated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the process of S319' will be described.

As shown in FIG. 136, in S727', the control LSI 230 initializes various flags and work areas of the DRAM, and before the projector initialization process by rebooting (restarting), a self-diagnosis error (watchdog timer (WDT)). ) Or an'error notification'command indicating a DLP error is created, the'error notification' command is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector initialization process.

According to the projector control main process and the projector self-diagnosis process shown in FIGS. 129 and 130 and the sub-control-projector transmission time process and the projector initialization process shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the LED of the projector device B2 ( Even if an abnormality occurs in R, G, B), FAN1 to 3, or the power supply circuit B20 due to a thermal factor, the operation of the projector device B2 is forced by shutdown after an error notification is sent to the sub CPU 400 accordingly. Is stopped by. On the other hand, for example, if the watchdog timer is not cleared (or set to a predetermined value) and falls into an infinite loop and an abnormal process occurs, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped in this case as well, but a reboot (restart) is performed. When the watchdog timer is reset and the operation of the projector device B2 is restored, an error notification is sent to the sub CPU 400. Therefore, the sub CPU 400 is surely notified of various malfunctions of the projector device B2. It can be avoided.

As described above, when abnormal processing is performed using the watchdog timer, there is a high possibility that the projector device B2 is frozen, so it is unlikely that normal operation will be guaranteed, and an early reboot ( (Reset or restart, etc.) is required. Even if an attempt is made to send a transmission command at this stage, there is a high possibility that the transmission command will not be transmitted normally. Therefore, it is desirable to control so that an error notification is sent to the sub CPU 400 after rebooting. In this way, when the projector device B2 is frozen, the watchdog timer is not cleared and the time is up (including the count of the addition type and the subtraction type), so that the projector device B2 is rebooted and an error occurs after the reboot. Notification will be given. It should be noted that the reboot can also be recognized as a process of restarting. Further, when the abnormality processing is performed by using the watchdog timer, there is a high possibility that it is frozen and it is highly likely that normal projection is difficult. Therefore, the liquid crystal display device DD19 and the game machine 1 Components (for example, frame components, panel components, front door components, cabinets, reels, levers, payout control board segment indicators and light sources (mainly LEDs), segment displays provided on the housing. Reflects the projection of the device, light source (for example, LED), main body frame member, dish unit, game machine side component, button, front panel (including liquid display device), projector device B2 component, and projector device B2. The abnormality may be notified by various constituent members such as a reflective member, a decorative member protruding from the frame, and the like. According to this, even when various abnormalities are detected except when the abnormality processing is performed by using the watchdog timer, the abnormalities are caused by the projection by the constituent members of the game machine 1 and the projector device B2 described above. Can be notified and displayed (for example, error notification, warning, warning, abnormality notification, etc.).

Further, regarding the abnormal operation of the game machine 1 and the projector device B2, the external communication means (external centralized terminal plate 31, wireless communication means, short-range wireless communication, optical communication means, encrypted communication means, decryption communication) of the game machine 1 From means, encrypted and complex communication means, etc., and external communication means provided in the projector device B2, etc., the devices in the amusement park (for example, hall computer, island computer, sand device, outbox, each unit counting). Machines, game media rental devices with counters for each machine, data display, digital signage, representative lamps, call buttons, game media number notification means (for example, those that notify the number of game media by driving or emitting light from the case), The management device, peripheral devices, CR unit, etc.) may be notified that an error has occurred, and the gaming machine 1 may be used as one means by combining various of the illustrated devices, or by using a plurality of means. It is possible to combine various devices such as those used in the above or by adopting any one of the devices, and the game machine 1 can communicate with the outside using various communication modes. When such an error is notified to the outside, the manager of the game hall turns on / off the power of the game machine 1 (power interruption and power recovery, or change of setting, etc.), and the setting screen of the game machine. You can perform operations to eliminate errors from (setting screens for players, setting screens for amusement parks, etc.). In addition to medals and balls, various game media such as the number of game media on the data are assumed as the game media. It can also be applied to a game machine in which the number of game media (holding balls, payouts, lending balls, stored balls, credits, throws, number of shots, payouts, number of foul balls, etc.) on the data increases or decreases. It should be noted that holding balls, paying balls, lending balls, and storing balls are terms applicable to various game media such as medals and balls. Further, in the case of an error in performing a reboot in the present embodiment, error information (self-diagnosis error, DLP error, reset request flag, etc.) stored before the reboot is performed at the time of restart is stored (for example, in the EEPROM. Since it is stored (stored in a storage area that is not cleared before and after rebooting, etc.), it is possible to notify an error during the initialization process that is executed at restart, and clear various flags and work areas after the error notification (1). It is also possible to clear a part or all, clear only the work area related to error notification, etc.). Further, it is also possible to simply use the watchdog timer to determine whether or not communication between the boards or communication between the control devices is normally performed. In this case as well, abnormality detection using the watchdog timer can be performed. It can also be expressed as doing. Further, the error information transmitted to the sub CPU 400 after the projector device B2 is rebooted is transmitted at the time of the initialization process executed at the time of power-on or reboot, but the present invention is not limited to this. The error information may be transmitted in the step after the conversion process.

FIG. 137 shows a projector control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as the process according to the ninth modification. The process shown in FIG. 137 is a partial improvement of the process shown in FIG. 88 described above so as to be suitable for the projector device B2 of FIG. 128.

As shown in FIG. 137, the sub CPU 400 receives a command indicating that the source ID of the received data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 is'projector'for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) or more. It is determined whether or not this is done (S1051). If the command has not been received for a predetermined time or longer (S1051: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S1052. When some command is received within a predetermined time (S1051: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1053. At this time, if the received data is normal, the received data is transmitted at a cycle of, for example, 500 ms using a transmission cycle counter, so that the presence or absence of the received data is monitored based on 1000 ms, which is a longer time. ing.

Next, the sub CPU 400 outputs a projector error occurrence display request to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL in order to display the error of the projector control board B23 (projector device B2) on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 (S1052). ). As a result, if there is no response from the projector device B2 even after a lapse of time such as 500 ms or more, an image or the like notifying the error of the projector device B2 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

In S1053, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the source ID of the received data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area indicates'projector'. When the source ID indicates'projector'(S1053: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1054. If the source ID does not indicate'projector'(S1053: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector control reception data consistency check process for controlling the projector device B2 (S1054). In this process, the sub CPU 400 checks whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the values of '81H' to '8BH' indicating the transmission command from the projector control board B23 shown in FIG. Then, the check result is returned as a return value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines from the return value of the check result whether or not there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S1055). When there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S1055: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1056. If there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S1055: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1057.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (S1056). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

In S1057, the sub CPU 400 performs projector-controlled reception processing. This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 89 described above.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the projector drift correction process (S1058). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 95 described above. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

According to such a projector control process, the operation of the projector device B2 should be restored by, for example, a reboot, but the sub CPU 400 has a predetermined time longer than the transmission time interval (for example, 500 ms) of the projector device B2 (for example, 500 ms). For example, if there is no predetermined response from the projector device B2 even after 1000 ms), it is determined that some kind of malfunction has occurred in which the projector device B2 cannot be restored by rebooting, and this is indicated by an image related to error notification. It can be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. As a result, any malfunction of the projector device B2 can be reliably and promptly notified by error notification and then avoided. The predetermined time is not limited to 1000 ms as an example, and various times can be set, for example, if the transmission time interval in one communication is 500 ms, the time is 500 ms or more.

FIG. 138 shows a projector-controlled reception process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as the process according to the tenth modification. In the process shown in FIG. 138, the process of S448 shown in FIG. 89 described above is changed to the process of FIG. 140 described later, and only the process of S449 is deleted. Therefore, in FIG. 138, the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 89 are used to omit the description, and the case of S445: No and the process of S450 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 138, when there is no request to change the projector set value (S445: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S450. In S450, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request command transmission process. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector-controlled reception processing. In the tenth modification, the parameter request command transmitted from the projector control board B23 does not include parameter values such as setting change and status, and for example, focus position setting change including origin adjustment of focus position described later. A parameter value indicating whether or not the request is for changing the projector setting value is included. That is, it is possible to transmit a parameter request command from the projector control board B23 at an arbitrary timing, and based on the parameter value included in such a command, whether or not there is a request to change the projector setting value in S445. Is determined. When the parameter request command is transmitted from the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 at an arbitrary timing, the sub CPU 400 receives the parameter request command (or when it is received), the projector device B2 If there is a request to change the projector setting value such as adjusting the focus position, changing the projection content, moving the screen, etc., the projector setting value or parameter can be transmitted to the projector device B2. In this way, the projector device B2 side can control the transmission timing of the command transmitted from the sub CPU 400, and the projector device B2 periodically transmits the parameter request command to the sub CPU 400. It is also possible to notify the sub CPU 400 that the command can be received. Further, the timing at which the parameter request command is transmitted from the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 to the sub CPU 400 is set to a predetermined barrier (for example, 500 ms interval, constant interval, constant cycle, etc.), but the present invention is not limited to these. When the sub CPU 400 determines that the parameters of the projector device B2 are changed, the parameters may be transmitted to the projector control board B23. Further, when a parameter request command is transmitted from the projector control board B23 at predetermined intervals, transmission / reception processing in one process (for example, transmission / reception processing while the projector device is running, transmission / reception processing during parameter change in the projector device, error in progress). It is conceivable that the parameter request command is received multiple times in the transmission / reception processing of the above), and it is assumed that the start of the transmission / reception processing in one processing and the command reception of the parameter request do not correspond one-to-one. In such a case, it is desirable that the sub CPU 400 independently transmits to the projector control board B23 at an arbitrary timing as described above. Regarding the parameter request command, the reception confirmation command transmitted from the projector device B2 to the sub CPU 400, or the setting completion command transmitted from the sub CPU 400 to the projector device B2, the commands are duplicated and have a special meaning. Unless otherwise specified, some commands may be discarded. By sending and receiving commands periodically in this way, while monitoring that the communication status is normal, unnecessary commands are discarded (or only the reception confirmation of what is received is performed, and the subsequent processing is performed. The process can be simplified by doing so.

FIG. 139 shows a projector drift correction process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as the process according to the tenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 139 is a partial improvement of the process shown in FIG. 95 described above so as to be suitable for the projector device B2 of FIG. 128.

As shown in FIG. 139, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a request to change the focus position setting based on the parameter request command from the projector control board B23 (S1061). This focus position setting change request is issued when the focus position should be changed while performing drift correction after returning the focus position to the focus origin described later. When there is a request to change the focus position setting (S1061: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1062. When there is no request to change the focus position setting (S1061: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1063. Regarding the movement to the focus position, a method of obtaining the focus position after incorporating the drift correction in advance and a method of moving the focus position according to the offset value without incorporating the drift correction are performed, and then the drift correction is applied. There is a method of moving the focus position, but one of the methods may be applied, or one of the methods may be appropriately selected depending on the situation. Further, the focus position may be moved by drift correction and then the predetermined focus position may be further moved depending on the situation, or the focus movement may be performed from the position before the movement to the position after the movement. The focus position may be moved. As the focus control at that time, the position before the movement is grasped, the position after the movement is grasped without grasping the position before the movement, or only the movement amount is grasped. Various controls such as are conceivable.

In S1062, the sub CPU 400 sets a status request command with the projector control board B23 as the transmission destination in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41. At this time, the drift correction temperature is specified as a parameter in the status request command. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. The command set in the process of S1062 is transmitted to the projector control board B23 by the process of S450 of FIG. 138 described above.

In S1063, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is the'drift correction temperature'. When the reception command is'drift correction temperature'(S1063: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1064. If the reception command is not the'drift correction temperature'(S1063: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the drift correction temperature from the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and also acquires the position coefficient of the focus position (S1064). As described above, the position coefficient of the focus position is a constant factor for obtaining the optimum correction position (focus correction value) according to the temperature characteristics for each of the focus positions A to E.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the focus drift correction value by multiplying the acquired drift correction temperature and the position coefficient (S1065). The focus drift correction value means a value obtained by correcting the focus position according to the ambient temperature, as described above.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the latest focus drift correction value calculated in S1065 is equal to the existing correction value in the focus correction value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S1066). When the latest focus drift correction value is equal to the existing correction value (S1066: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. When the latest focus drift correction value is different from the existing correction value (S1066: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1067.

Next, the sub CPU 400 overwrites and saves the focus drift correction value in the focus correction value storage area (S1067).

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for requesting a setting change of the focus drift correction value to the projector control board B23 (S1068).

Next, the sub CPU 400 adds 1 to the focus drift correction number counter (S1069). The drift correction number counter is an addition counter for accumulating the number of times the focus position drift correction is performed in response to the focus drift correction value being rewritten by the drift correction temperature. The focus drift correction count counter is set with an initial value in the process determined to perform focus drift correction after returning the focus position to the focus origin described later, and 1 is added when the focus drift correction is actually performed. To. That is, when the focus drift correction is performed by returning to the focus origin, -1 is set as the initial value of the focus drift correction number counter in order to count the next focus drift correction as the first time. The initial value of the focus drift correction number counter is also set when the projector device B2 is started. Further, since the case where the focus drift correction is performed after returning the focus position to the origin is counted as the first focus drift correction, the initial value of the focus drift correction counter may be set to 0. Further, when the initial value of the focus drift correction counter is set to 0, the count when the focus drift correction is performed by returning to the focus origin may not be performed. Regarding focus drift correction, the temperature when the previous focus drift correction was performed (the temperature of the LED, fan, projector device, etc.) is compared with the temperature when the focus drift correction is performed this time, and based on the comparison result. It may be performed according to the amount of change in temperature, or it depends on the temperature at the time of (or when) the focus is moved (including the electric focus movement and the image movement by software image processing) and other predetermined conditions. The focus may be adjusted.

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the focus position and the focus drift correction value in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S1070). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. As a result, the drift correction of the focus position is performed according to the drift correction temperature. The drift correction is a process of moving the drift correction temperature from the focus position before the correction by the difference amount according to the drift correction, and the drift error included in the difference amount increases as the number of drift corrections increases. With regard to such drift error, the focus position is once returned to the focus positions A to E (hereinafter referred to as "focus origin"), which are the reference positions for each projection surface, and then focused to the position according to the adjustment value and offset. By moving the position and then moving the focus position by the difference amount according to the drift correction, the drift error accumulated up to that point is eliminated. This will be described later. Regarding the calculation of the focus position, the electric focus position offset and the focus correction value, which are necessary information for that purpose, may be transmitted from the sub CPU 400, and the projector device B2 may perform the calculation based on the information. In addition, the drift error is considered to be caused by the following factors. That is, since the electric focus adjustment according to the drift correction temperature is physically performed by making full use of the focus motor 242C, if this is performed for each change of 1 ° C., the focus motor 242C is driven and controlled extremely finely. It becomes. At this time, if the focus motor 242C is driven quickly and with high accuracy so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player while projecting an image, the possibility of so-called motor step-out occurs increases, and when the motor step-out occurs, the control circuit There will be an error between the focus position recognized on the side and the actual physical focus position. Since such a phenomenon is likely to occur when the electric focus adjustment is performed extremely finely, the electric focus is in the case of a predetermined drift correction temperature (for example, in the case of a temperature change of 1 to 5 ° C.) as described later. It can be dealt with by controlling not to make adjustments. Further, if the drive speed of the focus motor 242C is suppressed, the possibility of motor step-out may be reduced, but there is a demerit such as a long focus time, and the required focus is required when the image is continuously projected. If the electric focus adjustment is performed over time, the player will be distorted or uncomfortable with the image. It is considered that this is particularly likely to occur when a plurality of projection targets (screens) are provided and the projection targets are changed as in the present embodiment. Therefore, when the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the image is visually disturbed (for example, during a demonstration, during darkening, in the case of a stage change for production, etc.), the drive speed of the focus motor 242C is set to a normal case. It is also possible to deal with it by using a slower speed.

FIG. 140 shows a projector setting change process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the tenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 140 is a partial improvement of the process shown in FIG. 91 described above so as to be suitable for the projector device B2 of FIG. 128.

As shown in FIG. 140, the sub CPU 400 extracts the setting change contents of the projector setting value received as an argument (S1071).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a horizontal position offset (horizontal position positions A to E offset) (S1072). When the setting change content is a horizontal position offset (S1072: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1073. When the setting change content is not the horizontal position offset (S1072: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1074.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a horizontal position offset command transmission process (S1073). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the horizontal position offset (horizontal position A to E offset) in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and issues a command to the projector control board B23 to set the horizontal position offset. Send to. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process. The horizontal position offset (horizontal image position offset) in the present embodiment is the horizontal position of the projected image in which the offset is adjusted in the horizontal direction from the reference position for each projection plane, and the entire projected image is adjusted without electric focus adjustment. Means the position where is finely tuned horizontally.

In S1074, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a vertical position offset. When the setting change content is a vertical position offset (S1074: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1075. When the setting change content is not the vertical position offset (S1074: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1076.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a vertical position offset command transmission process (S1075). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the vertical position offset in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits a command for setting the vertical position offset to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process. The vertical position offset (vertical image position offset) in the present embodiment is the vertical position of the projected image whose offset is adjusted in the vertical direction from the reference position for each projection plane, and the entire projected image is adjusted without electric focus adjustment. Means the position where is fine-tuned vertically. That is, since the horizontal position offset and the vertical position offset control which two-dimensional position in the projection range the projected image is displayed, the projected image can be moved without electric focus adjustment. Is. The focus position may be moved by the electric focus adjustment, and the horizontal position and the vertical position of the projected image may be moved at the time of rendering, and the position of the projected image may be changed by software-like image processing. Further, the electric focus adjustment may be performed based on the values of the horizontal position offset and the vertical position offset.

In S1076, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a focus offset. When the setting change content is the focus offset (S1076: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1077. When the setting change content is not the focus offset (S1076: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1079.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus origin adjustment instruction transmission process (S1077). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 141. After that, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus position offset command transmission process (S1078). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the focus position offsets A to E in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and controls the projector a command (focus position offset command) for setting the focus position offsets A to E. It is transmitted to the substrate B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S1079, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is focus drift correction. When the setting change content is focus drift correction (S1079: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1080. If the setting change content is not focus drift correction (S1079: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1082.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus origin adjustment instruction transmission process (S1080). This process is the same as the process of S1077, and will be described later with reference to FIG. 141. After that, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus drift correction value command transmission process (S1081). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the focus drift correction values A to E in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sets the focus drift correction values A to E (focus drift correction value command). Is transmitted to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S1082, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the LED brightness setting. When the setting change content is the LED brightness setting (S1082: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1083. When the setting change content is not the LED brightness setting (S1082: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1084.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the LED brightness setting command transmission process (S1083). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the LED brightness setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits a command for setting the LED brightness to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S1084, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a trapezoidal distortion correction value. When the setting change content is the trapezoidal distortion correction value (S1084: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1085. When the setting change content is not the trapezoidal distortion correction value (S1084: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1086.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs trapezoidal distortion correction value command transmission processing (S1085). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the trapezoidal distortion correction value in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits a command for setting the trapezoidal distortion correction value to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S1086, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a contrast setting. When the setting change content is the contrast setting (S1086: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1087. When the setting change content is not the contrast setting (S1086: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1088.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a contrast setting command transmission process (S1087). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the contrast setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits a command for setting the contrast to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S1088, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a gamma setting. When the setting change content is a gamma setting (S1088: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1089. When the setting change content is not a gamma setting (S1088: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1090.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a gamma setting command transmission process (S1089). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the gamma setting in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and transmits a command for setting the gamma value to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S1090, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the white color temperature. When the setting change content is the white color temperature (S1090: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1091. When the setting change content is not the white color temperature (S1090: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1092.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a white color temperature command transmission process (S1091). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the white color temperature in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and transmits a command for setting the white color temperature to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S1092, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is brightness. When the setting change content is brightness (S1092: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1093. When the setting change content is not brightness (S1092: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1094.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a brightness command transmission process (S1093). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the brightness in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits a command for setting the brightness to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S1094, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a test pattern. When the setting change content is a test pattern (S1094: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1095. If the setting change content is not a test pattern (S1094: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a test pattern command transmission process (S1095). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the test pattern in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and transmits a command for setting the test pattern to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process. Such a projector setting change process is executed when a maintenance worker in the amusement park or an inspection worker makes various optical adjustments to the projector device B2 before shipping from the factory.

FIG. 141 shows a focus origin adjustment instruction transmission process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the tenth modification.

As shown in FIG. 141, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag of the focus is ‘ON’ (S1101). This origin adjustment flag is flag information for designating whether or not to return the focus position to the focus origin. When the focus origin adjustment flag is ‘ON’ (S1101: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1102. When the focus origin adjustment flag is not ‘ON’ (S1101: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment instruction transmission process.

In S1102, the sub CPU 400 sets a command indicating a focus origin adjustment instruction. This command is transmitted to the projector control board B23 by the process of S1078 and the process of S1081 of FIG. 140 described above together with the focus position offset command or the focus drift correction value command.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to ‘OFF’. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment instruction transmission process.

FIG. 142 shows a projector control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as the process according to the tenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 142 is a partial improvement of the process shown in FIG. 88 described above so as to be suitable for the projector device B2 of FIG. 128.

As shown in FIG. 142, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the source ID of the received data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 indicates'projector'(S1110). When the source ID indicates'projector'(S1110: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1111. When the source ID does not indicate'projector'(S4311: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1118.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector control reception data consistency check process for controlling the projector device B2 (S1111). In this process, the sub CPU 400 checks whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the values of '81H' to '8BH' indicating the transmission command from the projector control board B23 shown in FIG. Then, the check result is returned as a return value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets 0 in the reception counter of the projector control reception data (S1112). This reception counter is for counting commands transmitted from the control LSI 230 in a transmission cycle of 500 ms as an example in the present embodiment. For example, if the value of the reception counter is 3 or more, it means that at least 1000 ms or more has passed since the reception counter was reset to 0.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data from the return value of the check result obtained by the processing of S1111 (S1113). When there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S1113: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1114. If there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S1113: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1115.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (S1114). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1118.

In S1115, the sub CPU 400 performs the focus origin adjustment determination process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 143.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs projector-controlled reception processing (S1116). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 138 described above.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the projector drift correction process (S1117). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 139 described above. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

In S1118, the sub CPU 400 adds 1 to the reception counter of the projector control reception data.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the reception counter of the projector control reception data is 3 or more (S1119). That is, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not at least 1000 ms or more has elapsed since the reception counter was reset. When the value of the reception counter is 3 or more and at least 1000 ms or more has elapsed (S1119: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1120. On the other hand, when the value of the reception counter is less than 2 and 1000 ms has not elapsed (S1119: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

In S1120, the sub CPU 400 causes the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 to display an image or the like related to the error notification. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

FIG. 143 shows a focus origin adjustment determination process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the tenth modification.

As shown in FIG. 143, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not it is at the time of demo transition (at the time of receiving the demo command) (S1121). The demo means a state in which an image similar to the actual effect is displayed by the projector device B2 or the like when a predetermined time elapses without inserting a medal, and the demo command is the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS. Is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 when shifting to the demo mode. The transmission process of this demo command will be described later with reference to FIG. 151. At the time of demo transition (S1121: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1128. If it is not the time of the demo transition ((S1121): No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1122.

In S1122, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the game state is at the start of the chance time (hereinafter, referred to as “CT”). The CT is, for example, a gaming state in which the reel screen mechanism F1 is used as a projection target and the image for production is displayed. The transition of the gaming state including this CT will be described later with reference to FIG. 152. When the CT is started (S1122: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1128. If it is not at the start of CT, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1123.

In S1123, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the origin adjustment of the focus position is selected by the setting by the member menu. The member menu is called as a screen as shown in FIG. 124 when, for example, a player performs a predetermined operation (for example, a password input operation) on the touch panel DD19T, and the focus position is set on the screen of the member menu. The player can arbitrarily select whether or not to adjust the origin. When the origin adjustment of the focus position is selected by the member menu (S1123: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1128. When the origin adjustment of the focus position is not selected by the member menu, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1124.

In S1124, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether or not the drift correction number is, for example, 30 times or more as a predetermined value. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S1124: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1125. When the number of drift corrections is less than a predetermined value (S1124: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1126.

In S1125, the sub CPU 400 sets -1 as an initial value in the focus drift correction number counter. After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1128.

In S1126, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the number of symbol fluctuations (or the number of games, the number of starts, etc.) has reached, for example, 300 times or more in the state where the origin adjustment flag of the focus is ‘OFF’. The symbol variation count means the number of times counted each time the symbol (identification information) variation display is started by rotationally driving the reels RL, RC, and RR. The number of times the symbol changes (the number of times the identification information changes and is displayed) is counted using a change number counter. When the origin adjustment flag of the focus is'OFF'and the number of symbol fluctuations reaches, for example, 300 times or more (S1126: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1127. Even when the focus origin adjustment flag is ‘OFF’, if the number of symbol fluctuations is less than 300 (S1126: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment determination process.

In S1127, the sub CPU 400 clears the value of the fluctuation count counter that counts the number of symbol fluctuations when the origin adjustment flag of the focus is in the'OFF'state.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to ‘ON’ (S1128).

Next, the sub CPU 400 makes a request to change the focus position setting in order to change the focus position while performing drift correction after returning the focus position to the focus origin (S1129). In this process, the sub CPU 400 stores the setting change request data including the origin adjustment of the focus position in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits this data to the projector device B2. The focus position setting change request data includes the content of returning the focus position to the focus origin and then changing the focus position. As a result, for example, when the screen on which the image is projected is switched, the projector device B2 controls the focus mechanism 242 based on the focus position setting change request data to temporarily return the focus position to the focus origin, respectively. The projection lens 210 can be focused while performing drift correction at the focus position according to the screen of. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment determination process.

According to the processing of FIGS. 138 to 143, the focus position is compensated by the drift correction even when the temperature of the projector device B2 rises, and the drift error is accumulated for each drift correction. By changing the setting so that the focus position returns to the focus origin once according to the game state (CT) of the above and the setting in the member menu, all the drift errors accumulated up to that point are removed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the deterioration of the image quality due to the drift correction at an appropriate timing for the image projected from the projector device B2 while performing the drift correction in the electric focus control.

Further, even when the number of drift corrections is, for example, 30 or more as a predetermined number, the setting is changed so that the focus position returns to the focus origin at the time of drift correction, so that all the drift errors accumulated up to that point are removed. Therefore, with respect to the image projected from the projector device B2 while repeatedly performing the drift correction, the deterioration of the image quality due to the drift correction can be effectively suppressed.

Further, even if the number of symbol fluctuations is set to 300 times or more without returning to the focus origin, the setting is changed so that the focus position returns to the focus origin, and the drift accumulated up to that point. Since all the errors are removed, it is possible to effectively suppress the deterioration of the image quality due to the drift correction for the image projected from the projector device B2 by repeatedly changing the focus position.

The control subject for changing the focus position setting is not limited to the sub CPU 400, and for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector device B2 itself may change the focus position setting. In this case, the control LSI 230 automatically adjusts the focus position by monitoring the LED temperature, for example, and performing feedback control so as to perform drift correction after temporarily returning the focus position to the focus origin according to the LED temperature. be able to. At this time, whether or not the setting is changed with the origin adjustment of the focus position can be appropriately determined according to the flags and conditions related to the origin adjustment of the focus position.

Further, according to the present embodiment, for example, a main series of processes of the projector control process is executed in response to a command transmitted from the projector device B2 in a transmission cycle of 500 ms, and the focus position is determined by the process of S1115 in this series of processes. It is determined whether or not to adjust the origin of. Therefore, the timing at which the origin adjustment of the focus position is actually performed may be delayed from the time when the predetermined condition is satisfied due to a slight time lag, but especially for the setting change accompanied by the origin adjustment of the focus position. The command may be immediately transmitted to the control LSI 230 of the projector device B2 when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, when it is necessary to send a command to change the focus position, the command may be sent immediately at that time. The projector device B2 can immediately adjust the origin of the focus position in response to receiving such a command, and can change the focus position while performing drift correction.

FIG. 144 shows the effect content determination process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as the process according to the eleventh modification. The process shown in FIG. 144 corresponds to the effect content determination process of S222 shown in FIG. 71, which is suitable for being executed while adjusting the origin of the focus position. Further, FIG. 145 shows a display example of an image projected by the projector device B2 according to the eleventh modification.

As shown in FIG. 144, the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content according to the command received by being transmitted from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS (S1131).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the determined effect content, whether or not the effect involves a change in the focus position that requires screen switching (S1132). When the effect involves changing the focus position (S1132: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1137. When the effect does not involve changing the focus position (S1132: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1133.

In S1133, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether or not the drift correction number is, for example, 15 times or more as a predetermined value. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S1133: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1134. When the number of drift corrections is less than a predetermined value (S1133: No), the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content determined in the process of S1131, and ends the effect content determination process.

In S1134, the sub CPU 400 discards the effect content determined in the process of S1131 and then changes the effect content to an effect accompanied by a change in the focus position.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to ‘ON’ (S1135).

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus drift correction number counter to -1 as an initial value (S1136).

Then, the sub CPU 400 requests to change the focus position setting in order to project the image while changing the focus position while performing drift correction after returning the focus position to the focus origin once as an effect changed in the process of S1134. (S1137). As a result, as the image for production projected from the projector device B2, for example, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), when the focus position returns to the focus origin once, so-called out-of-focus occurs, and it corresponds to, for example, an internal winning combination. The image becomes difficult to see the pattern, and then, as shown in FIG. 145 (b), the image is displayed so that the pattern can be clearly seen by gradually adjusting the focus position to the position corresponding to the screen to be projected. ..

According to such an effect content determination process, the focus position is compensated by the drift correction even if the temperature of the projector device B2 rises, and the drift error is accumulated for each drift correction, but from the out-of-focus as shown in FIG. 145. Since the focus position can be once returned to the focus origin in order to project an image for production that changes to a clearly visible state, all the drift errors accumulated up to that point can be removed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of image quality due to the drift correction while using the image projected from the projector device B2 while performing the drift correction in the electric focus control.

Further, the image shown in FIG. 145 is relatively changed from, for example, a state in which the initial focus is deviated and the visibility is lowered to a state in which the focus is gradually adjusted and the visibility is improved. It is possible to provide a state in which the visibility changes due to the change in the image as video content for production. More specifically, as such a video expression, a predetermined production image (for example, a specific small) that notifies the player of the lottery result such as an internal winning combination, a rare role, a reach symbol, a jackpot symbol, etc. As a role (cherries, watermelons, numbers, letters, symbols, characters and other images, images, effects, etc.), the effect is to look through a telescope so that the initially blurred image gradually becomes clearer. Can be provided. At this time, since the outline and color scheme of the projected predetermined effect image are vaguely visible to the player, when performing the effect with the origin adjustment, the effect with the origin adjustment is set to, for example, 10000 ms. At the same time, if the time required for adjusting the origin in the production is, for example, 2500 ms, a common image such as a treasure box is displayed for the first 1500 ms, and the remaining 1000 ms and the end of the production (elapse of the production time for 7500 ms). The predetermined effect image described above may be displayed. In this way, when the origin is adjusted and the player vaguely grasps the outline and color scheme, the final display content is not known, and the notification is performed by the effect image at the timing when the outline becomes clear. You can also do it. In the production involving the origin adjustment, the timing of the origin adjustment within the production time is determined, for example, at the same time as the start of the production in 10000 ms, in the middle of the production when 5000 ms has elapsed, or when 7500 ms has elapsed. It can be changed as appropriate according to the production, such as the timing according to the end of the production, and the information regarding the timing of such origin adjustment may be stored in advance or changed as appropriate according to the situation. Or you may choose. In addition, when the production time is not predetermined (for example, when the identification symbol capable of displaying the game result to the player is stopped according to the operation of the operation means), the treasure box or a predetermined production is performed. The timing of displaying the image is the operation of the player's operation means (for example, the operation of the stop button of the reel, the operation of the operation means for production provided in the game machine, the operation of the lever, the operation of payout, the operation of lending, 1). The displayed timing may differ depending on the operation of the bet or MAX bet, the operation of the button that can be moved to the standby position and the protruding position and can be pressed at any position, etc.) In such a case, for example. The origin adjustment may be executed on condition that the operating means is operated while the identification symbol is changing. Then, when it is determined in advance that it is the execution period of the effect of performing the origin adjustment, the origin adjustment is executed on the condition that the operating means is operated, the origin adjustment is performed, and the above-mentioned treasure box or a predetermined effect image is performed. May be displayed.

FIG. 146 shows an effect content determination process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the twelfth modification. The process shown in FIG. 146 corresponds to a modified example of the process shown in FIG. 144.

As shown in FIG. 146, the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content according to the command received by being transmitted from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS (S1141).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the determined effect content, whether or not the effect involves a change in the focus position that requires screen switching (S1142). In the case of an effect involving a change in the focus position (S1142: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1148. In the case of an effect that does not involve changing the focus position (S1142: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1143.

In S1143, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether or not the drift correction number is, for example, 15 times or more as a predetermined value. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S1143: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1144. When the number of drift corrections is less than a predetermined value (S1143: No), the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content determined in the process of S1141 and ends the effect content determination process.

In S1144, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the received command, whether or not the internal winning combination is a specific internal winning combination corresponding to a rare combination such as a so-called RT transition combination or a bonus combination. When the internal winning combination is a specific internal winning combination (S1144: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1145. When the internal winning combination is not a specific internal winning combination (S1144: No), the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content determined in the process of S1141 and ends the effect content determination process.

In S1145, the sub CPU 400 discards the effect content determined in the process of S1141 and then changes the effect content to an effect accompanied by a change in the focus position.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to ‘ON’ (S1146).

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus drift correction number counter to -1 as an initial value (S1147).

Then, the sub CPU 400 requests the setting change of the focus position in order to project the image while changing the focus position while performing the drift correction after returning the focus position to the focus origin once as the effect changed in the process of S1145. (S1148). According to this, the production content once determined is changed according to the internal winning such as a rare role having a relatively low winning probability, and the production image projected from the projector device B2 at that time is shown in FIG. 145. An image similar to the one shown will be displayed. It should be noted that such an effect content determination process may be executed only when the number of games reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific internal winning combination winning internally.

Even with such an effect content determination process, the focus position can be once returned to the focus origin when projecting an image for effect, which has a relatively low appearance frequency, and all the accumulated drift errors at that time can be removed. This makes it possible to suppress image quality deterioration caused by drift correction.

FIG. 147 shows the effect content determination process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as the process according to the thirteenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 147 corresponds to a modified example of the process shown in FIG. 144 or FIG. 146.

As shown in FIG. 147, the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content according to the command received by being transmitted from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS (S1151).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the determined effect content, whether or not the effect involves a change in the focus position that requires screen switching (S1152). In the case of an effect involving a change in the focus position (S1152: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1157. When the effect does not involve changing the focus position (S1152: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1153.

In S1153, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether or not the drift correction number is, for example, 15 times or more as a predetermined value. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S1153: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1154. When the number of drift corrections is less than a predetermined value (S1153: No), the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content determined in the process of S1151 and ends the effect content determination process.

In S1154, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the effect content determined by the process of 1151 is an effect accompanied by darkening of the image. The effect accompanied by darkening of the image means, for example, an effect in which the image is temporarily darkened when the projection target is switched from one screen to another. In the case of an effect accompanied by darkening of the image (S1154: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1155. When the effect is not accompanied by darkening of the image (S1154: No), the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content determined in the process of S1151 and ends the effect content determination process.

In S1155, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to ‘ON’ while setting the effect content determined in the process of S1151.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus drift correction number counter to -1 as an initial value (S1156).

Then, the sub CPU 400 requests to change the focus position setting in order to project a relatively dark image while changing the focus position while performing drift correction after returning the focus position to the focus origin once when the image is darkened. (S1157). According to this, when the image is darkened due to the switching of the screen, the image projected from the projector device B2 is displayed as an image that looks relatively dark and the out-of-focus state cannot be visually recognized. .. It should be noted that such an effect content determination process may be executed only when the image is simply darkened to a predetermined level without switching the screen.

According to such an effect content determination process, the focus position can be temporarily returned to the focus origin in a specific effect state of darkening of an image whose out-of-focus is difficult for the player to understand, and all the accumulated drift errors at that time are removed. This makes it possible to suppress deterioration in image quality due to subsequent drift correction.

FIG. 148 shows a drift correction temperature table stored in the sub ROM board 42 of the sub control board SS as a table according to the 14th modification.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the drift correction temperature table, for example, the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25 is effectively applied as a data value according to the state of temperature change. Whether or not it is specified in a predetermined temperature range.

For example, with respect to the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25, when the temperature change per minute is 10 ° C. or more, the drift correction temperature defined as the data valid value A is applied. According to this, the drift correction temperature is applied as it is as a data valid value A regardless of the temperature difference from a predetermined reference temperature. That is, when there is a relatively rapid temperature change, the drift correction temperature is valid as it is as a data value for calculating the focus drift correction value.

On the other hand, with respect to the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25, when the temperature change per minute is less than 10 ° C., the drift correction temperature defined as the data valid value B is applied. According to this, the drift correction temperature becomes 0 ° C. as the applicable data valid value B when the temperature difference from the predetermined reference temperature is detected within the range of 0 ° C. to ± 11 ° C. , + 11 ° C or higher and -11 ° C or lower, it is applied as it is as the applicable data valid value B. That is, when the temperature changes relatively slowly, the drift correction temperature is not valid as a data value for calculating the focus drift correction value unless the temperature difference from the reference temperature exceeds ± 11 ° C., and the temperature. Drift correction is not performed within the temperature range of ± 11 ° C. The temperature change per minute in the present embodiment is, for example, the temperature measured at a predetermined time (for example, a time not limited to 1 minute, which may be obtained by time management by a real-time clock or the like). And the average value obtained by dividing the total value of the added temperatures by the number of measurements, and the maximum and minimum values of the temperatures measured at a predetermined time are obtained, and the value between the maximum and minimum values and the previous drift correction are obtained. The result of comparison with the temperature at the time of performing the above (or the temperature at the time of turning on the power, etc.) may be obtained as the temperature change per minute.

FIG. 149 shows a projector drift correction process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the 14th modification. The process shown in FIG. 149 corresponds to a modification of the process shown in FIG. 95 or 139 described above, and is partially improved as a process using the drift correction temperature table of FIG. 148.

As shown in FIG. 149, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a focus position setting change request based on the parameter request command from the projector control board B23 (S1161). When there is a request to change the focus position setting (S1161: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1163. When there is no request to change the focus position setting (S1161: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1162.

In S1162, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is, for example, 120 (corresponding to approximately 1 minute) or more as a predetermined value. The drift correction monitoring counter is, for example, an addition counter for measuring the time for monitoring the temperature change per minute. When the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S1162: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1163. When the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is less than a predetermined value (S1162: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1165.

In S1163, the sub CPU 400 clears the value of the drift correction monitoring counter.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets a status request command with the projector control board B23 as the transmission destination in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S1164). At this time, the drift correction temperature is specified as a parameter in the status request command. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. The command set in the process of S1164 is transmitted to the projector control board B23 by the process of S450 of FIG. 138 described above.

In S1165, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is the'drift correction temperature'. When the reception command is'drift correction temperature'(S1165: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1166. When the reception command is not'drift correction temperature'(S1165: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process.

In S1166, the sub CPU 400 acquires the drift correction temperature from the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and also acquires the position coefficient of the focus position. As described above, the position coefficient of the focus position is a constant factor for obtaining the optimum correction position (focus correction value) according to the temperature characteristics for each of the focus positions A to E.

Next, the sub CPU 400 refers to the drift correction temperature table of FIG. 148 based on the temperature change per minute, and selects a data value of the drift correction temperature effective as the focus drift correction value (S1167). At this time, for example, when the temperature change per minute is 10 ° C. or higher, the drift correction temperature is selected as it is as the data valid value A regardless of the temperature difference from the predetermined reference temperature. On the other hand, when the temperature change per minute is less than 10 ° C., the drift correction temperature is 0 ° C. as the data valid value B if the temperature difference from the predetermined reference temperature is within the range of 0 ° C. to ± 11 ° C. If it is selected and is +11 ° C. or higher and -11 or lower, it is directly selected as the data valid value B.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the focus drift correction value by multiplying the drift correction temperature and the position coefficient selected as the data valid value (S1168). As described above, the focus drift correction value means a value obtained by correcting the focus position according to the ambient temperature (drift correction temperature). At this time, if 0 ° C. is selected as the effective data value, the focus drift correction value becomes 0, and the drift correction is not performed.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the latest focus drift correction value calculated in S1168 is equal to the existing correction value in the focus correction value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S1169). When the latest focus drift correction value is equal to the existing correction value (S1169: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. When the latest focus drift correction value is different from the existing correction value (S1169: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1170.

In S1170, the sub CPU 400 overwrites and saves the focus drift correction value in the focus correction value storage area.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for requesting a setting change of the focus drift correction value to the projector control board B23 (S1171).

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus drift correction number counter to -1 as an initial value (S1172).

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the focus position and the focus drift correction value in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S1173). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. As a result, when the drift correction temperature is selected as a data valid value other than 0, the drift correction of the focus position is performed.

According to such a projector drift correction process, for example, a temperature range in which the drift correction is invalid is set according to a temperature change per minute, and the drift correction may or may not be performed even at the same drift correction temperature. Yes, drift correction is performed appropriately according to the temperature change situation. This also makes it possible to reduce the drift error accumulated for each drift correction as much as possible, and thus effectively suppress the deterioration of the image quality of the image projected from the projector device B2.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a drift correction temperature table stored in the sub ROM board 42 of the sub control board SS as a table according to the fifteenth modification. This drift compensation temperature table corresponds to a modification of the drift compensation temperature table shown in FIG. 148.

As shown in FIG. 150, in the drift correction temperature table, for example, the drift of the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25 is determined according to the state of temperature change and whether or not the demo is displayed. Whether or not the correction temperature is effectively applied as a data value is specified in a predetermined temperature range.

For example, when the drift correction temperature obtained through the temperature sensor B25 is 10 ° C. or more per minute (in the case of temperature change a) in a case other than during the demo display, the data valid value A is set. The specified drift compensation temperature is applied. According to this, the drift correction temperature is applied as it is as a data valid value A regardless of the temperature difference from a predetermined reference temperature. That is, when there is a relatively rapid temperature change while projecting a predetermined image according to the game state, for example, as an effect display other than during the demo display, the drift correction temperature is a data value for calculating the focus drift correction value. It is valid as it is.

On the other hand, even when the demo is not displayed, the data is valid when the temperature change per minute is less than 10 ° C. (in the case of temperature change b) for the drift correction temperature obtained through the temperature sensor B25. The drift correction temperature specified as the value B'is applied. According to this, when the temperature difference from the predetermined reference temperature is detected within the range of 0 ° C. to ± 6 ° C., the drift correction temperature is 0 ° C. as the applicable data valid value B'. If it is detected at + 6 ° C or higher and -6 ° C or lower, it is applied as it is as the applicable data valid value B'. That is, when the temperature changes relatively slowly except during the demo display, the drift correction temperature is effective as a data value for calculating the focus drift correction value unless the temperature difference from the reference temperature exceeds ± 6 ° C. Therefore, the drift correction is not performed within the temperature range of ± 6 ° C.

Further, during the demo display, the drift correction temperature defined as the data valid value B is applied to the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25 regardless of the temperature change per minute. According to this, the drift correction temperature becomes 0 ° C. as the applicable data valid value B when the temperature difference from the predetermined reference temperature is detected within the range of 0 ° C. to ± 11 ° C. , + 11 ° C or higher and -11 ° C or lower, it is applied as it is as the applicable data valid value B. That is, since it is not necessary to project an image with high image quality even after drift correction during the demo display, the drift correction temperature is focused as long as the temperature difference from the reference temperature does not exceed ± 11 ° C. It is not valid as a data value for calculating the drift correction value, and the drift correction is not performed within the temperature range of ± 11 ° C. for the temperature difference.

FIG. 151 shows a demo command transmission process by the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS as the process according to the fifteenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 151 is sequentially executed in, for example, the medal acceptance / start check process of S103 shown in FIG. 59 described above, or in order with each process shown in FIG. 59.

As shown in FIG. 151, the main CPU 300 determines whether or not a medal can be inserted (including a state in which the BET button can be operated) (S1181). When the medal can be inserted (S1181: Yes), the main CPU 300 shifts to the next process of S1182. If the medal cannot be inserted (S1181: No), the main CPU 300 ends the demo command transmission process.

In S1182, the main CPU 300 determines whether or not the error flag is '1'. The error flag is flag information for indicating whether or not there is a communication error or the like between the main control board MS and its connection board, and if there is an error, "1" is set. When the error flag is '1' (S1182: Yes), the main CPU 300 shifts to the process of S1188. When the error flag is "0" instead of "1" (S1182: No), the main CPU 300 shifts to the next processing of S1183.

In S1183, the main CPU 300 determines whether or not the demo command transmission flag is '1'. The demo command transmission flag is flag information for indicating whether or not the demo command can be transmitted to the sub-control board SS, and is set to "1" when the demo command can be transmitted. When the demo command transmission flag is '1' (S1183: Yes), the main CPU 300 shifts to the process of S1186. When the demo command transmission flag is "0" instead of "1" (S1183: No), the main CPU 300 shifts to the next processing of S1184.

In S1184, the main CPU 300 sets the initial value of the demo command transmission timer. The demo command transmission timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the waiting time until the demo command is transmitted, and a numerical value corresponding to the waiting time such as 30s or 60s is set as an initial value.

Next, the main CPU 300 sets the demo command transmission flag to '1' (S1185).

Next, the main CPU 300 subtracts 1 from the value of the demo command transmission timer (S1186).

Next, the main CPU 300 determines whether or not the value of the demo command transmission timer is '0' (S1187). When the value of the demo command transmission timer is '0' (S1187: Yes), the main CPU 300 shifts to the next processing of S1188. If the value of the demo command transmission timer is not '0' (S1187: No), the main CPU 300 shifts to the next processing of S1188.

In S1188, the main CPU 300 determines whether or not an error such as a communication error is occurring between the main control board MS and the connection board thereof. If an error is occurring (S1188: Yes), the main CPU 300 shifts to the process of S1192. If no error is occurring (S1188: No), the main CPU 300 proceeds to the next process of S1189.

In S1189, the main CPU 300 generates demo command data, and stores the generated demo command data in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The stored demo command data is transmitted to the sub-control board SS in the data transmission process (command transmission process) of S127 shown in FIG. 60. As a result, a demo image is projected from the projector device B2 as a demo display.

Next, the main CPU 300 sets the demo command transmission flag to '0' (S1190).

Next, the main CPU 300 sets the error flag to '0' (S1191). After that, the main CPU 300 ends the demo command transmission process.

In S1192, the main CPU 300 sets the error flag to '1' and ends the demo command transmission process. In this case, the demo is not displayed because an error is occurring.

According to the projector drift correction process using the drift correction temperature table shown in FIG. 150 depending on whether or not the demo is displayed, the temperature range in which the drift correction is invalid differs depending on whether or not the demo is displayed. While the invalid temperature range is relatively wide during the demo display, the invalid temperature range is relatively narrow or the invalid temperature range itself disappears except during the demo display. That is, the frequency of drift correction can be changed not only by the drift correction temperature but also by the demo display, and the frequency of drift correction can be suppressed even if the state of the demo display becomes long, so that the accumulated drift error can be obtained for each drift correction. It can be reduced as much as possible, and the deterioration of the image quality of the image projected from the projector device B2 can be effectively suppressed.

FIG. 152 shows the transition of the gaming state according to the 16th modified example.

As shown in FIG. 152, the gaming machine 1 as a pachislot machine has a plurality of gaming states, and the plurality of gaming states include, for example, a normal gaming state and a bonus gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "BB"). ), Chance zone (hereinafter referred to as "CZ"), ART gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "ART"), and chance time (hereinafter referred to as "CT") are included.

For example, the normal gaming state is a gaming state in which a transition lottery to CZ, BB, etc. is performed according to the internal winning combination, and when the transition lottery is won, the transition to CZ, BB, or the like is performed. In this normal gaming state, for example, the front screen mechanism E1 is used to display an image for production.

BB is a game state in which a so-called regular bonus is repeatedly performed until the number of medals paid out exceeds a predetermined number, and while shifting from CZ, ART or CT depending on the internal winning combination, a normal game state is performed according to a predetermined end condition. In addition to the above, a lottery for adding the number of ART games and a lottery for the first hit of ART are performed, and when these lottery are won, the number of ART games is added or the game is shifted to ART. For example, in the normal gaming state or in the BB that has transitioned from CZ, the image for production is displayed using the front screen mechanism E1, and in the BB that has transitioned from ART, the image for production is displayed using the reel screen mechanism F1. In the BB of the ART addition zone shifted from CT, the image for production is displayed while appropriately switching the fixed screen mechanism D and the reel screen mechanism F1.

The CZ shifts from the normal game state according to the internal winning combination, while performing a transition lottery to CT via ART, BB, or ART, and when the transition lottery is won, a game that shifts to ART, BB, or CT. It is in a state. In this CZ, for example, the front screen mechanism E1 is used to display an image for production.

The ART refers to a state in which the sub CPU 400 notifies the reel stop operation so that the internal winning combination is won or not won in favor of the player, and this AT is combined with the so-called replay high probability state (RT). It is a game state controlled by. During ART, the internal winning combination can be won so as to increase the number of medals won without reducing it as much as possible. Therefore, as the number of ART games increases, more medals can be obtained. The ART shifts from BB, CZ, or CT according to the internal winning combination, while the transition lottery to BB or CT is performed, and when the transition lottery is won, the ART shifts to BB or CT. In this ART, for example, a fixed screen mechanism D is used to display an image for production. For example, in the case of shifting from ART to CT, if a game is played for the purpose of aligning a specific symbol combination during the replay high probability state, and a lottery capable of aligning the specific symbol combination is won, ART. It is possible to add the number of games and the number of CT sets.

In CT, for example, the winning probability of small wins such as bells, watermelons, cherries, etc. does not change, but regardless of the internal wins, it is possible to win any small win depending on the stop operation by the player's so-called push. In addition, it is a gaming state in which the reels are controlled, and the maximum value (maximum number of slip displays) of the number of slip frames is basically set to 1, for example, for one or a plurality of reels during CT. By the way, in the game state other than CT, the maximum value of the number of sliding frames is 4. The CT shifts from ART according to the internal winning combination, while the transition lottery to ART, the additional lottery for the number of ART games, and the additional lottery for the number of CT sets are performed, and when these lottery are won, the CT shifts to ART. Or add the number of ART games and the number of CT sets. Such CT continues for the number of games in addition to the number of games specified. In this CT, an image for directing is displayed using the reel screen mechanism F1.

In this way, at the start of each gaming state, the screen to be projected by the projector device B2 is appropriately switched. Then, in particular, at the start of CT in which an image is projected onto a specific screen (reel screen mechanism F1), the focus position is once returned to the focus origin and then the focus position is changed while performing drift correction. It has become. As a result, all the drift errors accumulated up to that point are removed. Therefore, with respect to the image projected from the projector device B2 while performing drift correction during the electric focus control, image quality deterioration due to drift correction can be effectively suppressed each time the CT is performed.

The plurality of gaming states are not limited to these, and may include, for example, a state in which the winning probability of transition to CZ is high or a low probability even in the normal gaming state, and other states. Similarly, the gaming state may include states having different probabilities of shifting to a more advantageous gaming state.

FIG. 153 shows a focus adjustment frequency setting table stored in the sub ROM board 42 of the sub control board SS as a table according to the 17th modification.

As shown in FIG. 153, in the focus adjustment frequency setting table, the number of symbol fluctuations since the origin adjustment (readjustment) of the previous focus position was performed depending on whether the focus position change frequency is relatively high or low. Is stipulated to request a setting change to perform the next origin adjustment when, for example, reaches 150 times or 300 times. The case where the focus position is changed relatively frequently corresponds to, for example, the CT described above using FIG. 152, and the case where the change frequency is relatively low corresponds to a gaming state other than during such CT. Equivalent to. During CT, there is a possibility of hitting the BB of the ART addition zone, so the frequency of changing the focus position is relatively high. In addition, in FIG. 153, as an example, it is determined whether or not to perform origin adjustment (re-adjustment) on the condition of the number of symbol fluctuations, but in addition, for example, the number of winnings of a rare small role and the rare small It may be stipulated that whether or not to perform the next origin adjustment is determined on the condition of the specific number of times the effect is executed from the winning combination, the elapsed time since the previous origin adjustment was performed, or the like. Further, for example, in a gaming machine provided with a so-called pseudo BB, since it may fluctuate 150 times or more during BB, it may be applied as a case where the change frequency is relatively high in BB.

FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the effect content determination process of the sub-control board SS according to the 17th modification. The process shown in FIG. 154 is a process using the focus adjustment frequency setting table of FIG. 153, and corresponds to a modified example of the process shown in FIGS. 144, 146, or 147.

As shown in FIG. 154, the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content according to the command received by being transmitted from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS (S1201).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the determined effect content, whether or not the effect involves a change in the focus position that requires screen switching (S1202). In the case of an effect involving a change in the focus position (S1202: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1208. If the effect does not involve changing the focus position (S1202: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1203.

In S1203, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether or not the drift correction number is, for example, 15 times or more as a predetermined value. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S1203: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1204. When the number of drift corrections is less than a predetermined value (S1203: No), the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content determined in the process of S1201 and then shifts to the process of S1209.

In S1204, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a specific small combination such as a rare small combination. When the internal winning combination is a specific small combination (S1204: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1205. When the internal winning combination is not a specific small combination (S1204: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1209.

In S1205, the sub CPU 400 discards the effect content determined in the process of S1201 and then changes the effect content to an effect according to the winning of a specific small winning combination accompanied by a change in the focus position.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to ‘ON’ (S1206).

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus drift correction number counter to -1 as an initial value (S1207).

Then, the sub CPU 400 requests the setting change of the focus position in order to project the image while changing the focus position while performing the drift correction after returning the focus position to the focus origin once as the effect changed in the process of S1205. (S1208). As a result, as the image for production projected from the projector device B2, for example, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), when the focus position returns to the focus origin once, so-called out-of-focus occurs and corresponds to a specific small role. The symbol becomes difficult to see, and then, as shown in FIG. 145 (b), the symbol corresponding to a specific small role can be clearly seen by gradually adjusting the focus position to the position corresponding to the screen to be projected. An image like this is displayed.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the gaming state is a bonus (BB) (S1209). When the game state is the bonus (BB) (S1209: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1210. When the game state is not the bonus (BB) (S1209: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1212.

In S1210, the sub CPU 400 further determines whether or not the effect mode is the effect mode of the ART addition zone during the bonus. In the effect mode in the BB of the ART addition zone, the fixed screen mechanism D and the reel screen mechanism F1 are appropriately switched, so that the change frequency (number of fluctuations) of the focus position is relatively high (more) than in the other effect modes. )Become. Then, in the case of the effect mode of the ART addition zone during the bonus (S1210: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1211. If the bonus is not in the effect mode of the ART addition zone (S1210: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1212.

In S1211, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus change frequency to'high'. That is, the case where the focus change frequency is “high” in the focus adjustment frequency setting table of FIG. 153 is referred to. As a result, when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 150 times after the origin adjustment (re-adjustment) of the focus position was performed last time, the sub CPU 400 once returns the focus position to the focus origin by readjustment and then performs drift correction. While doing this, the image is projected while changing the focus position. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the effect content determination process.

On the other hand, in S1212, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus change frequency to'low'. That is, the case where the focus change frequency is “low” in the focus adjustment frequency setting table of FIG. 153 is referred to. As a result, when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 300 times, which is more than the previous 150 times, after the origin adjustment (re-adjustment) of the focus position is performed last time, the sub CPU 400 once returns the focus position to the focus origin by readjustment. After that, the image is projected while changing the focus position while performing drift correction. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the effect content determination process.

According to the effect content determination process using the focus adjustment frequency setting table of FIG. 153, the change frequency is changed in a specific game state (effect mode) in which the frequency of changing the focus position is relatively high as the screen is switched. Since the focus position is more likely to be adjusted to the origin than in the effect mode in other gaming states where there is relatively little, the focus adjustment error that accumulates with each change in the focus position is also reduced according to the frequency of changes in the focus position. As a result, deterioration of the image quality of the image due to the focus adjustment error can be effectively suppressed.

FIG. 155 shows a focus origin adjustment determination process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the 18th modification. The process shown in FIG. 155 corresponds to a modified example of the process shown in FIG. 143.

As shown in FIG. 155, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not it is at the time of demo transition (at the time of receiving the demo command) (S1221). At the time of demo transition (S1221: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1228. If it is not the time of the demo transition ((S1221): No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1222.

In S1222, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the CT is started as the gaming state. When it is the start of CT (S1222: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1228. If it is not at the start of CT, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1223.

In S1223, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the origin adjustment of the focus position is selected by the setting by the member menu. When the origin adjustment of the focus position is selected by the member menu (S1223: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1228. When the origin adjustment of the focus position is not selected by the member menu, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1224.

In S1224, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether or not the drift correction number is, for example, 30 times or more as a predetermined value. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S1224: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1225. When the number of drift corrections is less than a predetermined value (S1224: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1226.

In S1225, the sub CPU 400 sets -1 as an initial value in the focus drift correction number counter. After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1228.

In S1226, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not a condition according to the change frequency of the focus position, that is, a predetermined condition according to the change frequency of the focus position defined in the focus adjustment frequency setting table of FIG. 153 is satisfied. .. For example, when the frequency of change of the focus position is "high" and the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 150 times since the origin adjustment of the focus position was performed last time, or when the frequency of change of the focus position is "low". When the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 300 times (S1226: Yes) since the origin adjustment of the focus position was performed last time, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1227. On the other hand, even if the focus position change frequency is "high", the previous origin adjustment or the number of symbol fluctuations has not reached 150 times, or even if the focus position change frequency is "low", from the previous origin adjustment. When the number of symbol fluctuations has not reached 300 (S1226: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment determination process.

In S1227, the sub CPU 400 clears the value of the fluctuation number counter that counts the fluctuation number of the focus position when the origin adjustment flag of the focus is in the'OFF'state.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to ‘ON’ (S1228).

Next, the sub CPU 400 requests to change the focus position setting in order to change the focus position while performing drift correction after temporarily returning the focus position to the focus origin (S1229). In this process, the sub CPU 400 stores the setting change request data including the origin adjustment of the focus position in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits this data to the projector device B2. The focus position setting change request data includes the content of returning the focus position to the focus origin and then changing the focus position. As a result, for example, when the screen on which the image is projected is switched, the projector device B2 controls the focus mechanism 242 based on the focus position setting change request data to temporarily return the focus position to the focus origin, respectively. The projection lens 210 can be focused while performing drift correction at the focus position according to the screen of. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment determination process.

According to such a focus origin adjustment determination process, the condition for adjusting the origin of the focus position is switched according to the frequency of changing the focus position, and the focus adjustment error can be appropriately reduced, which is caused by the focus adjustment error. Deterioration of image quality of images can be effectively suppressed.

FIG. 156 is a diagram showing a communication sequence at the time of activation of the projector device B2 and the sub CPU 400 according to the 19th modification.

As shown in FIG. 156, when the communication between the projector device B2 and the sub-control board SS is established at the time of starting the game machine 1, the control LSI 230 of the projector device B2 issues a command for requesting start parameters to the sub-control board SS. It is transmitted to the CPU 400. The sub CPU 400 that has received the start parameter request command transmits the start parameter request confirmation command to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the start parameter request confirmation command transmits the reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the LED brightness setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the LED brightness setting command, the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B are controlled based on the LED brightness specified by the command. At this time, according to the LED brightness setting command, for example, 100% brightness is specified as the default value as shown in FIG. 157. The control LSI 230 that has received the LED brightness setting command transmits the reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the keystone distortion correction command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the keystone distortion correction command, the focus mechanism 242 is controlled based on the keystone distortion correction value specified by the command. At this time, according to the keystone distortion correction command, for example, 40 is specified as the default value (trapezoidal distortion correction value) for the keystone distortion correction, as shown in FIG. 157. The control LSI 230 that has received the keystone distortion correction command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the white color temperature setting command to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the white color temperature setting command controls the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B based on the white color temperature specified by the command. At this time, according to the white color temperature setting command, for example, 1 is specified as the default value of the white color temperature as shown in FIG. 157. The control LSI 230 that has received the white color temperature command transmits the reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the horizontal image position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the command for setting the horizontal image position offset, the focus mechanism 242 is controlled based on the offset value of the horizontal image position specified by the command. At this time, according to the command for setting the horizontal image position offset, the value of the horizontal image position offset held by the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM231) is set as shown in FIG. 157. The control LSI 230 that has received the command for setting the horizontal image position offset transmits the command for confirming reception to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the command for setting the vertical image position offset to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the command for setting the vertical image position offset, the focus mechanism 242 is controlled based on the offset value of the vertical image position specified by the command. At this time, according to the command for setting the vertical image position offset, the value of the vertical image position offset held by the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM231) is set as shown in FIG. 157. The control LSI 230 that has received the command for setting the vertical image position offset transmits the command for confirming reception to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the brightness setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the brightness setting command, the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B are controlled based on the brightness setting value specified by the command. At this time, according to the brightness setting command, for example, 50 is specified as the default value of brightness as shown in FIG. 157. The control LSI 230 that has received the brightness setting command transmits the reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the contrast setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the contrast setting command, the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B are controlled based on the contrast setting value specified by the command. At this time, according to the contrast setting command, for example, 50 is specified as the default value of contrast as shown in FIG. 157. The control LSI 230 that has received the contrast setting command transmits the reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the gamma setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the gamma setting command, the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B are controlled based on the gamma setting value specified by the command. At this time, according to the gamma setting command, for example, 1 is specified as the default value of the gamma value, as shown in FIG. 157. The control LSI 230 that has received the gamma setting command transmits the reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the electric focus position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the command for setting the electric focus position offset, the focus mechanism 242 is controlled based on the offset value of the electric focus position specified by the command. At this time, according to the command for setting the electric focus position offset, the value of the electric focus position offset held by the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM231) is set as shown in FIG. 157. The control LSI 230 that has received the command for setting the electric focus position offset transmits the command for confirming reception to the sub CPU 400. Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the setting completion command to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 that has received the command transmits the reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400. This ends the communication sequence at startup.

As described above, at the time of activation, the communication sequence as shown in FIG. 156 is performed as one set. A command for requesting a start parameter may be transmitted from the projector device B2 during such a communication sequence, but in this case, the sub CPU 400 discards the command. Further, if the reception confirmation command transmitted from the control LSI 230 to the sub CPU 400 does not show the correct reception result, it is retransmitted by the retry process until the correct reception result is shown, for example, up to 10 times.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a communication sequence between the projector device B2 and the sub CPU 400 according to the 19th modification during normal operation.

As shown in FIG. 158, during the normal operation of the projector device B2, the control LSI 230 of the projector device B2 transmits a parameter request command to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. Upon receiving the parameter request command, the sub CPU 400 transmits the status request “LED temperature (R)” command (see FIG. 159) to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the command of the status request "LED temperature (R)", the control LSI 230 uses the temperature detected by the first temperature sensor B25a as the LED temperature (R) and indicates the LED temperature (R) (see FIG. 159). Is transmitted to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command (see FIG. 159) of the status request “LED temperature (G)” to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the command of the status request "LED temperature (G)", the control LSI 230 uses the temperature detected by the second temperature sensor B25b as the LED temperature (G) and indicates the LED temperature (G) (see FIG. 159). Is transmitted to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command (see FIG. 159) of the status request “LED temperature (B)” to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the command of the status request "LED temperature (B)", the control LSI 230 uses the temperature detected by the second temperature sensor B25b as the LED temperature (B) and indicates the LED temperature (B) (see FIG. 159). Is transmitted to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command (see FIG. 159) of the status request “intake FAN temperature” to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the command of the status request "intake FAN temperature", the control LSI 230 transmits a command (see FIG. 159) indicating the intake FAN temperature to the sub CPU 400, using the temperature detected by the intake temperature sensor B26a of the FAN 2 as the intake FAN temperature. To do.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command (see FIG. 159) of the status request “FAN1 rotation speed” to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the command of the status request "FAN1 rotation speed" transmits a command (see FIG. 159) indicating the FAN1 rotation speed to the sub CPU 400, using the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27a of the FAN1 as the FAN1 rotation speed. To do.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command (see FIG. 159) of the status request “FAN2 rotation speed” to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the command of the status request "FAN2 rotation speed" transmits a command (see FIG. 159) indicating the FAN2 rotation speed to the sub CPU 400, using the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27b of the FAN2 as the FAN2 rotation speed. To do.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command (see FIG. 159) of the status request “FAN3 rotation speed” to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the command of the status request "FAN3 rotation speed" transmits a command (see FIG. 159) indicating the FAN3 rotation speed to the sub CPU 400, using the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27c of the FAN3 as the FAN3 rotation speed. To do.

After that, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for completing the status request to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 that has received the command transmits a command for confirming reception to the sub CPU 400. As a result, the communication sequence in the normal operation of the projector device B2 is completed.

As described above, the communication sequence during normal operation as shown in FIG. 158 is performed as one set every 30 s, for example, after the end of the communication sequence at startup. In such a communication sequence, when a reception confirmation command that does not show a correct reception result is transmitted from the control LSI 230 to the status request command transmitted from the sub CPU 400 to the control LSI 230, for example, it is correct up to 10 times. The reception confirmation command is retransmitted by the retry process until the reception result is shown.

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a communication sequence at the time of screen switching between the projector device B2 and the sub CPU 400 according to the 19th modification. The screen switching time referred to here means after the screen to be projected is changed from one screen to another.

As shown in FIG. 160, at the time of screen switching, the control LSI 230 of the projector device B2 transmits a parameter request command to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. The sub CPU 400 that has received the parameter request command transmits the electric focus position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. According to the command for setting the electric focus position offset, as shown in FIG. 161, the value of the electric focus position offset held by the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM231) is set as the setting information of the corresponding screen after the change. As a result, the focus position is offset with respect to the focus origin of the changed screen. The control LSI 230 that has received the command for setting the electric focus position offset transmits the command for confirming reception to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for setting the horizontal image position offset to the control LSI 230. According to the horizontal image position offset setting command, as shown in FIG. 161, the value of the horizontal image position offset held by the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM231) is set as the setting information of the corresponding screen after the change. .. As a result, the horizontal image position is offset adjusted with respect to the changed screen. The control LSI 230 that has received the command for setting the horizontal image position offset transmits the command for confirming reception to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for setting the vertical image position offset to the control LSI 230. According to the command for setting the vertical image position offset, as shown in FIG. 161, the value of the vertical image position offset held by the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM231) is set as the setting information of the corresponding screen after the change. .. As a result, the vertical image position is offset adjusted with respect to the changed screen. The control LSI 230 that has received the command for setting the vertical image position offset transmits the command for confirming reception to the sub CPU 400. Although not shown in FIG. 160, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the setting completion command to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 that has received the command transmits the reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400 again. After that, the parameter request command is retransmitted to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command (see FIG. 161) of the status request “drift correction temperature” to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the command of the status request "drift correction temperature", the control LSI 230 transmits a command (see FIG. 161) indicating the drift correction temperature to the sub CPU 400, using the temperature detected by the temperature sensor B25 as the drift correction temperature.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for completing the status request to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 that has received the command transmits a command for confirming reception to the sub CPU 400. Although not shown in FIG. 160, the control LSI 230 that has transmitted the command then transmits the parameter request command (see FIG. 161) to the sub CPU 400 again.

After that, the sub CPU 400 that has received the parameter request command transmits a command for ordering the electric focus drift correction to the control LSI 230. As a result, in the projector device B2, the focus position offset-adjusted with respect to the focus origin is further compensated and adjusted by drift correction based on the drift correction temperature indicated by the above-mentioned command. Then, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a setting completion command to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 that has received the command confirms reception. Command is sent to the sub CPU 400. As a result, the communication sequence at the time of screen switching ends.

As described above, the communication sequence at the time of screen switching is performed as a set of procedures as shown in FIG. 160 when the screen to be projected is changed. In such a communication sequence, when a reception confirmation command that does not show a correct reception result is transmitted from the control LSI 230 to the sub CPU 400, a reception confirmation command is executed by retry processing until the correct reception result is shown, for example, up to 10 times. Is retransmitted.

According to such a communication sequence, the focus position is offset adjusted each time the screen is switched, and the focus position is adjusted with high accuracy by drift correction according to the temperature, so that the focus is adjusted in a situation where the temperature changes. Frequent adjustments can also suppress image distortion and deterioration of image quality, and can continuously project high-quality images while switching screens.

Further, since the horizontal and vertical positions of the projected image are adjusted each time the screen is switched, the image is projected from the projector device B2 to the appropriate horizontal and vertical projection positions for each screen. It is possible to perform image correction physically and softly.

Further, since the focus position varies depending on the temperature condition of the projector device B2 although the offset is adjusted, it takes a predetermined time to acquire the temperature from the projector device B2 in order to perform the drift correction at the time of screen switching. .. That is, it is assumed that the screen can be switched even while the temperature is acquired from the projector device B2 depending on the predetermined time. On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned communication sequence at the time of screen switching, the offset adjustment of the horizontal image position and the vertical image position is performed after the focus position is offset adjusted, and then the focus position is readjusted by the drift correction. Since the drift correction is finally performed by taking a step-by-step procedure, even if the screen switching operation is frequently performed, the image distortion can be suppressed with high accuracy. High-quality images can be continuously projected.

FIG. 162 shows the main control main process executed on the main control board of the pachinko machine according to the 20th modification.

In the pachinko machine, when the power is turned on, the main CPU of the main control board first performs the initial setting process (S1231). In this process, the main CPU performs processes such as access permission to the main RAM, backup restoration, and initialization of the work area. Next, the main CPU updates the initial value random number (S1232). In this process, the main CPU updates the initial random number counter value.

Next, the main CPU performs a special symbol control process (S1233). In this process, the main CPU performs a predetermined control process regarding the progress of the special symbol game and the first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device.

Next, the main CPU performs a normal symbol control process (S1234). In this process, the main CPU performs a predetermined control process regarding the progress of the normal symbol game and the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device.

Next, the main CPU performs control processing of the symbol display device (S1235). In this process, the main CPU performs display control of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the variable display of the normal symbol based on the execution results of the special symbol control process and the normal symbol control process.

Next, the main CPU performs a game information data generation process (S1236). In this process, the main CPU generates game information data to be transmitted to a hall computer or the like of a game store, and stores the game information data in the main RAM.

Next, the main CPU performs a storage / game state data generation process (S1237). In this process, the main CPU generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub-control board of the pachinko machine based on the value of the probability change flag and the value of the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM. To do. After that, the main CPU returns to the process of S1232, and repeats the process after S1232 described above.

FIG. 163 shows a system timer interrupt process executed on the main control board of the pachinko machine according to the 20th modification.

In the pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU interrupts the main process at a predetermined cycle and executes the system timer interrupt process even while the main process is being executed. Specifically, the main CPU executes the system timer interrupt process as shown in FIG. 157 according to the clock pulse generated in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 ms) from the reset clock pulse generation circuit.

As shown in FIG. 157, the main CPU saves the data (information) of each register (S1241). Next, the main CPU performs random number update processing (S1242). In this process, the main CPU updates various random value values extracted from the jackpot determination counter, the symbol determination counter, the hit determination counter, the fall determination counter, the fluctuation pattern determination counter, the effect pattern determination counter, and the like. ..

The jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter lack fairness if the counter value update timing is indefinite. Therefore, the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter are updated at periodic timings such as 2 ms in order to ensure fairness.

Next, the main CPU performs the switch input detection process (S1243). In this process, the main CPU detects winning or passing through various starting ports, various winning ports, and a ball passing detector.

Next, the main CPU performs a timer update process (S1244). Specifically, the main CPU is of various timers such as a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control board and the sub control board, and a large winning opening opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening. Perform update processing.

Next, the main CPU performs command output processing (S1245). In this process, the main CPU transmits various commands such as a winning command, a variation command, and a demo command to the sub CPU of the sub control board. For example, a demo command is sent when a predetermined time elapses without firing a game ball after the end of the change of the special symbol.
(For example, it is transmitted when the state in which the game is not performed continues for 3 minutes or more.

Next, the main CPU performs game information output processing (S1246). In this process, the main CPU outputs various information related to the game processed by the main control board, the sub control board, the payout / launch control circuit, and the like to the hall computer of the game store.

Next, the main CPU restores the data of each register saved in S1241 (S1247). After that, the main CPU ends the system timer interrupt process.

Even in such a pachinko machine, by mounting the projector device B2 or the like, the same effect as that of the above-mentioned pachislot machine can be exhibited.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment. In the above embodiment, a pachislot machine and a pachinko machine have been described as typical examples of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The various techniques of the present invention described above can be applied to other game machines, and can be applied to, for example, an enclosed game machine. Further, the general-purpose technology can be applied to various gaming machines such as gaming machines and slot machines in addition to the gaming machines mentioned above.

Further, it goes without saying that the numerical values, information, components and the like shown in the above embodiments are merely examples, and can be appropriately changed within the scope of the present invention. For example, a value or number may include 0, and may even include negative or positive values.

For example, in the present embodiment, there are various conditions such as the number of counts and the number of executions, and there is a process of determining the number of executions and the execution time (execution period) which is the execution period, but the numerical values are limited in any of them. It is not something that is done. For example, when it is a condition that it is executed three times or more, it may be a condition that it is executed once or more or 0 times or more depending on the initial value. This is defined as the number of executions of 3 times or more as a predetermined condition, and when determining whether or not it has been executed 3 times or more, from a software point of view, it is basically whether or not it has been executed. As long as it can be determined, it is necessary to determine whether it is 1 or 0 in terms of information theory (coding theory). On the contrary, the same applies to the case of determining whether or not the execution is performed, and it is determined whether the information theory (coding theory) is 0 or 1.

In other words, determining the presence or absence of execution is synonymous with determining whether the binary value corresponding to the execution unit is 1 or 0, which sets the flag to "ON" when executed and the flag is set. Even when determining whether or not it is "ON", as a result, whether or not there is a signal input that sets the flag to "ON" (whether or not the signal has been received once or multiple times, input It is equivalent to determining whether or not there was, whether or not it was output, etc.). From this, even when determining the presence or absence of a flag, the number of executions itself is not counted, but it is synonymous with determining the number of executions (counting number, counting result, interrupting number, etc.) as a unit. , The determination of the flag and the determination of the number of times can be executed by essentially the same comparison calculation process.

The same applies when determining the time. For example, when determining the execution time, it is synonymous with determining whether the binary value corresponding to the execution time is 1 or 0, so the determination depends on the presence or absence of the flag. It can be executed by a simple comparison operation process. However, when the determination is made using a flag or a variable, it may be determined by negative logic that the value is 0 when the value is 0, and the value is 1 when the determination is made.

Further, when the game machine is started, the pack light may be turned off until communication is established, for example, in order to prevent an afterimage phenomenon from occurring in the sub liquid crystal display device.

Further, since the movable screen is not returned to the standby position at the time of error notification, the error notification image may be projected according to the screen to be projected at that time.

Further, the projector device of the present embodiment is configured to be capable of projecting onto a plurality of screens, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the projector device includes one screen or a plurality of screens. It suffices if it can be projected onto either screen. In addition, the projection target is not limited to the screen, for example, the accessory, the board, the front panel, the outer frame, the main body frame, the cabinet, the upper plate, the lower plate, the player, the ceiling above the game machine, and the passage from the game machine. Various projection forms such as projection toward the ceiling can be considered. Further, as the projection method, for example, various methods such as so-called rear project evening, front project evening, a rear projector that reflects the projected light, and a front projector that reflects the projected light can be applied. It can be made by combining a plurality of different methods.

Further, the intake fan and the exhaust fan in the present embodiment are ventilation means capable of ventilating the inside of the projector device by rotating their components. That is, the ventilation means includes an intake means or an exhaust means, and the control for the intake means (conditions for shutdown and warning, etc.) in the present embodiment is also applicable to the exhaust means, and is applicable to the exhaust means. Control can also be applied to the intake means.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below as an appendix.

(About Appendix A)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying images for games (for example, JP-A-6-3506 and JP-A-2009-24459). reference). In such a game machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, as the operating time becomes longer, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector main body, so that problems due to heat occur in the optical parts, the substrate, etc. provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens. The image may be blurred or noise may occur due to thermal deformation. Due to such a malfunction of the projection device, there is a possibility that the image projected by the game may be uncomfortable.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of avoiding malfunction of a projection device and eliminating discomfort in an image.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix A1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A gaming machine (eg, gaming machine 1 or the like) including a projection device capable of projecting an image (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) and a control means (for example, a sub-control board SS or the like) for controlling the production. ,
The projection device
Ventilation means for ventilation (for example, intake fan 244B (FAN2), etc.) and
Ventilation temperature detecting means (for example, intake air temperature sensor B26a or the like) for detecting the temperature near the ventilation means, and
When the temperature detected by the ventilation temperature detecting means becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined temperature, a transmitting means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for transmitting error information which is information indicating an abnormality to the control means, and With
When the control means receives the error information, the control means responds to the error information to the projection device.
The projection device is further provided with an operation stop means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for stopping the operation during operation when the response to the error information is received.

According to such a configuration, for example, when the temperature in the vicinity of the ventilation means of the projection device rises as the operating time becomes longer and the temperature rises above a predetermined temperature, error information indicating an abnormality is transmitted to the control means for the error information. Since the operation during operation is forcibly stopped in response to the response from the control means, it is possible to avoid malfunction due to heat accumulation of the projection device and eliminate the discomfort of the image for a long time.

(Appendix A2)
A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The operation stop means is characterized in that, after the transmission means transmits the error information, if there is no response to the error information from the control means and a predetermined time elapses, the operation during operation is stopped.

According to such a configuration, even if the temperature exceeds a predetermined temperature and there is no response from the control means to the error information, the operation during operation is automatically stopped after a predetermined time elapses, so that the heat pool of the projection device is accumulated. It is possible to surely avoid the malfunction due to.

(About Appendix B)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying images for games (for example, JP-A-6-3506 and JP-A-2009-24459). reference). In such a game machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, as the operating time becomes longer, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector main body, so that problems due to heat occur in the optical parts, the substrate, etc. provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens. The image may be blurred or noise may occur due to thermal deformation. Due to such a malfunction of the projection device, there is a possibility that the image projected by the game may be uncomfortable.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of eliminating the discomfort of an image by appropriately determining a malfunction of a projection device in advance and avoiding it as appropriate. And.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix B1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game machine (for example, a game machine 1 or the like) equipped with a projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image.
The projection device
Optical means for projecting images (for example, LED light sources 240R, 240B, 240G, DMD241, etc.) and
An internal temperature detecting means (for example, a temperature sensor B25 or the like) for detecting the temperature near the optical means, and
Ventilation means for ventilation (for example, intake fan 244B (FAN2), etc.) and
Ventilation temperature detecting means (for example, intake air temperature sensor B26a or the like) for detecting the temperature near the ventilation means, and
When the temperature detected by the internal temperature detecting means is equal to or higher than the first temperature, the abnormality determining means for determining an abnormality (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) and the like.
When the temperature detected by the internal temperature detecting means becomes a second temperature or higher higher than the first temperature, or when the temperature detected by the ventilation temperature detecting means becomes a third temperature or higher, the system is in operation. (For example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, etc.) and the operation stop means for stopping the operation of
The second temperature is set higher than the third temperature.

According to such a configuration, for example, when the temperature near the optical means rises as the operating time becomes longer and the temperature rises above the first temperature, it is determined to be abnormal, and the temperature near the optical means rises further above the second temperature. If the temperature near the ventilation means becomes 3rd temperature or higher, which is lower than the 2nd temperature, the operation during operation is stopped. Therefore, the malfunction due to the heat accumulation of the projection device is judged in advance and avoided as appropriate. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort of images that last for a long time.

(About Appendix C)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying images for games (for example, JP-A-6-3506 and JP-A-2009-24459). reference). In such a game machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, as the operating time becomes longer, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector main body, so that problems due to heat occur in the optical parts, the substrate, etc. provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens. The image may be blurred or noise may occur due to thermal deformation. Due to such a malfunction of the projection device, there is a possibility that the image projected by the game may be uncomfortable.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of eliminating the discomfort of an image by appropriately determining a malfunction of a projection device in advance and avoiding it as appropriate. And.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix C1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game machine (for example, a game machine 1 or the like) equipped with a projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image.
The projection device
With a first optical means (for example, LED light source 240R, etc.) and a second optical means (for example, LED light source 240B, 240G, etc.) for projecting an image,
A first internal temperature detecting means (for example, a first temperature sensor B25a or the like) for detecting the temperature of the first optical means, and
A second internal temperature detecting means (for example, a second temperature sensor B25b or the like) for detecting the temperature of the second optical means, and
Ventilation means for ventilation (for example, intake fan 244B (FAN2), etc.) and
Ventilation temperature detecting means (for example, intake air temperature sensor B26a or the like) for detecting the temperature near the ventilation means, and
When the temperature detected by the first internal temperature detecting means becomes the first temperature or higher, or when the temperature detected by the second internal temperature detecting means becomes the second temperature or higher, it is abnormal. Abnormality determination means for determining the presence (for example, control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) and
When the temperature detected by the first internal temperature detecting means becomes a third temperature or higher higher than the first temperature, or the temperature detected by the second internal temperature detecting means is higher than the second temperature. When the temperature becomes higher than the fourth temperature, or when the temperature detected by the ventilation temperature detecting means becomes the fifth temperature or higher, the operation stopping means (for example, the projector control board B23) for stopping the operating operation Control LSI 230, etc.)
The first temperature is set higher than the fifth temperature, and the second temperature is set higher than the first temperature.

According to such a configuration, for example, as the operating time becomes longer, heat accumulation occurs in the projection device, so that the temperature near the first optical means becomes higher than the first temperature, or the temperature near the second optical means becomes higher. When the temperature becomes higher than the first temperature and becomes the second temperature or higher, it is determined to be abnormal, and the temperature near the first optical means rises to the third temperature or higher, or the temperature near the second optical means rises to the fourth. When the temperature rises above the temperature, or when the temperature near the ventilation means rises above the fifth temperature, which is lower than the first temperature, the operation during operation is stopped. Therefore, after determining in advance the malfunction due to the heat accumulation of the projection device. It is possible to avoid it as appropriate and eliminate the discomfort of the image that lasts for a long time.

(About Appendix D)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying images for games (for example, JP-A-6-3506 and JP-A-2009-24459). reference). In such a game machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, as the operating time becomes longer, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector main body, so that problems due to heat occur in the optical parts, the substrate, etc. provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens. The image may be blurred or noise may occur due to thermal deformation. Due to such a malfunction of the projection device, there is a possibility that the image projected by the game may be uncomfortable.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a game machine capable of eliminating the discomfort of an image by notifying the malfunction of the projection device in advance and appropriately avoiding it. The purpose.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix D1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A projection device capable of projecting an image (for example, a projector device B2 or the like), a display means capable of displaying information (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device DD19 or the like), and a control means for controlling an effect (for example, a sub control board SS). Etc.) and a gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1 etc.)
The projection device
Optical means for projecting images (for example, LED light sources 240R, 240B, 240G, DMD241, etc.) and
An internal temperature detecting means (for example, a temperature sensor B25 or the like) for detecting the temperature near the optical means, and
Ventilation means for ventilation (for example, intake fan 244B (FAN2), etc.) and
Ventilation temperature detecting means (for example, intake air temperature sensor B26a or the like) for detecting the temperature near the ventilation means, and
When the temperature detected by the internal temperature detecting means is equal to or higher than the first temperature, the first abnormality determining means for determining the first abnormality (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) and the like.
When the temperature detected by the internal temperature detecting means becomes a second temperature or higher higher than the first temperature, or the temperature detected by the ventilation temperature detecting means is a third temperature or higher different from the second temperature. In the case of, the second abnormality determining means (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for determining the second abnormality, and
With
The control means
In response to the first abnormality, the projection device is made to project the first information, and the display means is made to display the first information.
In response to the second abnormality, the display means displays second information different from the first information, and responds to the projection device.
The projection device is further provided with an operation stop means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for stopping the operation during operation when the response is received from the control means.

According to such a configuration, for example, heat is accumulated in the projection device as the operating time becomes longer, and when the temperature near the optical means becomes the first temperature or higher, the image related to the first information is projected and displayed. At the same time, an image related to the first information is displayed separately, and when the temperature near the optical means rises to the second temperature or higher, or when the temperature near the ventilation means rises to the third temperature or higher, the second temperature is correspondingly displayed. The image related to the information is displayed, and the operating operation is forcibly stopped by the response from the control means. As a result, the malfunction due to the heat accumulation of the projection device can be appropriately avoided after being notified in advance by the first information and the second information thereafter, and the discomfort of the image for a long time can be eliminated. it can.

(About Appendix E)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying images for games (for example, JP-A-6-3506 and JP-A-2009-24459). reference). In such a game machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, as the operating time becomes longer, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector main body, so that problems due to heat occur in the optical parts, the substrate, etc. provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens. The image may be blurred or noise may occur due to thermal deformation. Due to such a malfunction of the projection device, there is a possibility that the image projected by the game may be uncomfortable.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of eliminating the discomfort of an image by appropriately determining a malfunction of a projection device in advance and avoiding it as appropriate. And.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix E1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game machine (for example, a game machine 1 or the like) equipped with a projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image.
The projection device
Optical means for projecting images (for example, LED light sources 240R, 240B, 240G, DMD241, etc.) and
An internal temperature detecting means (for example, a temperature sensor B25 or the like) for detecting the temperature near the optical means, and
Intake means for intake (for example, intake fan 244B (FAN2), etc.) and
Exhaust means for exhausting (for example, exhaust fan 245 (FAN3)) and
An intake air temperature detecting means (for example, an intake air temperature sensor B26a or the like) that detects a temperature in the vicinity of the intake air means,
Exhaust temperature detecting means (for example, exhaust temperature sensor B26b or the like) for detecting the temperature in the vicinity of the exhaust means, and
When the temperature detected by the internal temperature detecting means is equal to or higher than the first temperature, or when the temperature detected by the exhaust temperature detecting means is equal to or higher than the second temperature, an abnormality determining means for determining an abnormality ( For example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) and
When the temperature detected by the internal temperature detecting means becomes a third temperature or higher higher than the first temperature, or when the temperature detected by the intake air temperature detecting means becomes a fourth temperature or higher, the operation is in progress. (For example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, etc.) and the operation stop means for stopping the operation of the above are provided.
The second temperature is set higher than the fourth temperature, and the first temperature is set higher than the second temperature.

According to such a configuration, for example, heat accumulation occurs in the projection device as the operating time becomes longer, so that the temperature near the optical means is equal to or higher than the first temperature, or the temperature near the exhaust means is lower than the first temperature. When it becomes 2 temperatures or more, it is judged as abnormal, and when the temperature near the optical means rises to the 3rd temperature or more, or when the temperature near the intake means becomes the 4th temperature or more, which is lower than the 2nd temperature, it is in operation. Since the operation is automatically stopped, it is possible to prevent the malfunction due to the heat accumulation of the projection device in advance and to avoid it as appropriate, and to eliminate the discomfort of the image for a long time.

(About Appendix F)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying images for games (for example, JP-A-6-3506 and JP-A-2009-24459). reference). In such a game machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, as the operating time becomes longer, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector main body, so that problems due to heat occur in the optical parts, the substrate, etc. provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens. The image may be blurred or noise may occur due to thermal deformation. Due to such a malfunction of the projection device, there is a possibility that the image projected by the game may be uncomfortable.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately avoiding malfunction of a projection device depending on a situation and eliminating discomfort in an image. ..

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix F1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game machine (for example, a game machine 1 or the like) equipped with a projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image.
The projection device
Exhaust fan (for example, exhaust fan 245 (FAN3), etc.) and
The first intake fan (for example, intake fan 244A (FAN1), etc.) and
A second intake fan different from the first intake fan (for example, an intake fan 244B (FAN2), etc.) and
A temperature detecting means (for example, intake air temperature sensor B26a, etc.) for detecting the temperature at a predetermined location, and
Exhaust rotation speed detecting means (for example, pulse sensor B27c or the like) for detecting the rotation speed of the exhaust fan, and
A first intake air rotation speed detecting means (for example, pulse sensor B27a or the like) for detecting the rotation speed of the first intake air fan, and
A second intake air rotation speed detecting means (for example, pulse sensor B27b or the like) for detecting the rotation speed of the second intake air fan, and
When the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means becomes the first temperature or higher, the operation stopping means (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for stopping the operation during operation is provided.
The operation stopping means is
When the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is lower than the first temperature and is equal to or lower than the second temperature, and the rotation speed detected by the exhaust rotation speed detecting means is less than the first rotation speed, the vehicle is in operation. The second rotation speed in which the rotation speed detected by the exhaust rotation speed detection means is higher than the first rotation speed when the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is higher than the second temperature. If it becomes less than, stop the operation during operation and
When the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is equal to or lower than the second temperature, and the rotation speed detected by the first intake rotation speed detecting means is less than the second rotation speed, the vehicle is in operation. When the operation is stopped and the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is higher than the second temperature, the rotation speed detected by the first intake rotation speed detecting means is higher than the second rotation speed. If the number of revolutions is less than the number of revolutions, the operation during operation is stopped and the operation is stopped.
Regardless of the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, when the rotation speed detected by the second intake rotation speed detecting means becomes less than the second rotation speed, the operation during operation is stopped. And.

According to such a configuration, for example, heat is accumulated in the projection device as the operating time becomes longer, and when the temperature near the predetermined location becomes the first temperature or higher, the operating operation is stopped, while the first operation is stopped. Even if the temperature is lower than the temperature, the operation during operation is stopped according to the rotation speed of the exhaust fan and the first intake fan based on the second temperature, and if the temperature is lower than the first temperature, the second intake fan is stopped regardless of the temperature. Since the operation during operation is stopped according to the rotation speed of the projector, malfunctions due to heat accumulation of the projection device are appropriately avoided according to the temperature and the rotation speed of the fan, and the discomfort of the image that lasts for a long time is eliminated. can do.

(About Appendix G)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying images for games (for example, JP-A-6-3506 and JP-A-2009-24459). reference). In such a game machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, as the operating time becomes longer, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector main body, so that problems due to heat occur in the optical parts, the substrate, etc. provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens. The image may be blurred or noise may occur due to thermal deformation. Due to such a malfunction of the projection device, there is a possibility that the image projected by the game may be uncomfortable.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately avoiding malfunction of a projection device depending on a situation and eliminating discomfort in an image. ..

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix G1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game machine (for example, a game machine 1 or the like) equipped with a projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image.
The projection device
A first ventilation fan for ventilation (for example, an exhaust fan 245 (FAN3), etc.) and
A second ventilation fan (for example, an intake fan 244B (FAN2)) that ventilates differently from the first ventilation fan.
Ventilation temperature detecting means (for example, intake air temperature sensor B26a or the like) for detecting the temperature near the second ventilation fan, and
A first rotation speed detecting means (for example, pulse sensor B27c or the like) for detecting the rotation speed of the first ventilation fan, and
A second rotation speed detecting means (for example, pulse sensor B27b or the like) for detecting the rotation speed of the second ventilation fan, and
It is provided with an operation stop means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for stopping the operation during operation.
The operation stopping means is
When the temperature detected by the ventilation temperature detecting means is equal to or lower than the first temperature, and the rotation speed detected by the first rotation speed detecting means is less than the first rotation speed, the operation during operation is performed. When the temperature detected by the ventilation temperature detecting means is higher than the first temperature while being stopped, the second rotation speed detected by the first rotation speed detecting means is higher than the first rotation speed. If it becomes less than, stop the operation during operation and
Regardless of the temperature detected by the ventilation temperature detecting means, when the rotation speed detected by the second rotation speed detecting means becomes less than the second rotation speed, the operation during operation is stopped. And.

According to such a configuration, for example, heat is accumulated in the projection device as the operating time becomes longer, so that the operating device is in operation according to the temperature near the second ventilation fan and the rotation speed of the first ventilation fan. While the operation is stopped, the operation during operation is stopped according to the rotation speed of the second ventilation fan regardless of the detected temperature, so that the malfunction due to the heat accumulation of the projection device is caused by the temperature and the rotation of the fan. Depending on the number, it can be avoided as appropriate to eliminate the discomfort of the image that lasts for a long time.

(About Appendix H)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying images for games (for example, JP-A-6-3506 and JP-A-2009-24459). reference). In such a game machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, as the operating time becomes longer, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector main body, so that problems due to heat occur in the optical parts, the substrate, etc. provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens. The image may be blurred or noise may occur due to thermal deformation. Due to such a malfunction of the projection device, there is a possibility that the image projected by the game may be uncomfortable.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately avoiding malfunction of a projection device depending on a situation and eliminating discomfort in an image. ..

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix H1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game machine (for example, a game machine 1 or the like) equipped with a projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image.
The projection device
A first ventilation fan for ventilation (for example, an exhaust fan 245 (FAN3), etc.) and
A second ventilation fan that ventilates differently from the first ventilation fan (for example, an intake fan 244A (FAN1), etc.) and
A temperature detecting means (for example, intake air temperature sensor B26a, etc.) for detecting the temperature at a predetermined location, and
A first rotation speed detecting means (for example, pulse sensor B27c or the like) for detecting the rotation speed of the first ventilation fan, and
A second rotation speed detecting means (for example, pulse sensor B27a or the like) for detecting the rotation speed of the second ventilation fan, and
It is provided with an operation stop means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for stopping the operation during operation.
The operation stopping means is
When the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is equal to or lower than the first temperature, and the rotation speed detected by the first rotation speed detecting means is less than the first rotation speed, the operation during operation is stopped. When the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is higher than the first temperature, the rotation speed detected by the first rotation speed detecting means is less than the second rotation speed higher than the first rotation speed. If it becomes, stop the operation during operation and
When the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is equal to or lower than the first temperature, and the rotation speed detected by the second rotation speed detecting means is less than the second rotation speed, the operation during operation When the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is higher than the first temperature, the third rotation speed detected by the second rotation speed detecting means is higher than the second rotation speed. When it becomes less than, it is characterized in that the operation during operation is stopped.

According to such a configuration, for example, heat is accumulated in the projection device as the operating time becomes longer, so that the projection device operates according to the detected temperature and the rotation speeds of the first ventilation fan and the second ventilation fan. Since the operation inside is stopped, it is possible to appropriately avoid malfunction due to heat accumulation of the projection device according to the temperature and the rotation speed of the fan, and to eliminate the discomfort of the image that lasts for a long time.

(About Appendix I)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying images for games (for example, JP-A-6-3506 and JP-A-2009-24459). reference). In such a game machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, as the operating time becomes longer, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector main body, so that problems due to heat occur in the optical parts, the substrate, etc. provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens. The image may be blurred or noise may occur due to thermal deformation. Due to such a malfunction of the projection device, there is a possibility that the image projected by the game may be uncomfortable.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of surely notifying and avoiding a malfunction of a projection device and eliminating the discomfort of an image. And.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix I1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A gaming machine (eg, gaming machine 1 or the like) including a projection device capable of projecting an image (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) and a control means (for example, a sub-control board SS or the like) for controlling the production. ,
The projection device
Optical means for projecting images (for example, LED light sources 240R, 240B, 240G, DMD241, etc.) and
Ventilation means for ventilation (for example, intake fan 244B (FAN2), etc.) and
Optical abnormality detecting means for detecting an abnormality of the optical means (for example, control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) and
Ventilation abnormality detecting means (for example, control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for detecting the abnormality of the ventilation means, and
Power supply abnormality detecting means (for example, control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for detecting an abnormality related to the power supply, and
Initialization means (for example, control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) that initializes at startup, and
An exception handling means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) that performs an exception handling using a watchdog timer, and
With
When an abnormality is detected by at least one of the optical abnormality detecting means, the ventilation abnormality detecting means, and the power supply abnormality detecting means, information on the abnormality is given to the control means before the processing corresponding to the abnormality is performed. And send
Information about an abnormality with respect to the control means when the abnormality processing is executed by the abnormality handling means, in the initialization processing executed by the initialization means after that, or after the initialization processing is executed. Is characterized by sending.

According to such a configuration, for example, when an abnormality occurs in the optical means, the ventilation means, or the power supply of the projection device, the processing corresponding to the abnormality is performed after the information on the corresponding abnormality is transmitted to the control means. On the other hand, when an abnormality process is performed using the watchdog timer, the projection device is initialized and information about the abnormality is transmitted to the control means, so that the malfunction of the projection device is surely notified. It is possible to avoid it and eliminate the discomfort of the image that lasts for a long time.

(About Appendix J)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying images for games (for example, JP-A-6-3506 and JP-A-2009-24459). reference). In such a game machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, as the operating time becomes longer, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector main body, so that problems due to heat occur in the optical parts, the substrate, etc. provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens. The image may be blurred or noise may occur due to thermal deformation. Due to such a malfunction of the projection device, there is a possibility that the image projected by the game may be uncomfortable.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a gaming machine capable of surely and promptly notifying a malfunction of a projection device, avoiding it, and eliminating the discomfort of an image. With the goal.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix J1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A projection device capable of projecting an image (for example, a projector device B2 or the like), a display means capable of displaying information (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device DD19 or the like), and a control means for controlling an effect (for example, a sub control board SS). Etc.) and a gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1 etc.)
The projection device
Optical means for projecting images (for example, LED light sources 240R, 240B, 240G, DMD241, etc.) and
Ventilation means for ventilation (for example, intake fan 244B (FAN2), etc.) and
Optical abnormality detecting means for detecting an abnormality of the optical means (for example, control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) and
Ventilation abnormality detecting means (for example, control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for detecting the abnormality of the ventilation means, and
Power supply abnormality detecting means (for example, control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for detecting an abnormality related to the power supply, and
Initialization means (for example, control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) that initializes at startup, and
An exception handling means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) that performs an exception handling using a watchdog timer, and
Transmission means (for example, control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) that transmits information to the control means at predetermined time intervals, and
With
The transmission means
When an abnormality is detected by at least one of the optical abnormality detecting means, the ventilation abnormality detecting means, and the power supply abnormality detecting means, information on the abnormality is given to the control means before the processing corresponding to the abnormality is performed. And send
Information about an abnormality with respect to the control means when the abnormality processing is executed by the abnormality processing means, in the initialization processing executed by the initialization means after that, or after the initialization processing is executed. And send
The control means is characterized in that when information is not received from the projection device for a time longer than the predetermined time interval, the display means displays information indicating an abnormality.

According to such a configuration, for example, when an abnormality occurs in the optical means, the ventilation means, or the power supply of the projection device, the processing corresponding to the abnormality is performed after the information on the corresponding abnormality is transmitted to the control means. On the other hand, when the abnormality processing is performed by using the watchdog timer, the projection device is initialized, the information about the abnormality is transmitted to the control means, and the projection is performed even if a time longer than the predetermined time interval elapses. If no information is received from the device, information indicating an abnormality of the projection device is displayed on the display means. As a result, it is possible to reliably and promptly notify the malfunction of the projection device and avoid it, and to eliminate the discomfort of the image for a long time.

(About Appendix K)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying images for games (for example, JP-A-6-3506 and JP-A-2009-24459). reference). In such a game machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, as the operating time becomes longer, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector main body, so that problems due to heat occur in the optical parts, the substrate, etc. provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens. The image may be blurred due to thermal deformation, or the focus may be out of focus due to focus adjustment. That is, as the temperature change of the projection device becomes larger, the image quality of the image projected with the game tends to gradually deteriorate.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing deterioration of image quality due to a temperature change of a projection device and eliminating discomfort of an image.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix K1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game machine (for example, a game machine 1 or the like) equipped with a projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image.
The projection device
A focus mechanism for projecting an image (for example, a focus mechanism 242 of a projection lens 210) and
A temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensor B25, etc.) that detects the temperature near a predetermined location, and
A focus control means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, a sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, etc.) that controls the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection means is provided.
The focus control means is characterized in that, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the focus mechanism is once returned to a predetermined reference state, and then the focus mechanism is controlled according to the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means. ..

According to such a configuration, the focus mechanism is controlled by, for example, drift correction even if the temperature of the projection device changes, and the drift error accumulated for each drift correction is also set to a predetermined reference state when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Since it is removed by returning to, the deterioration of the image quality of the image projected via the focus mechanism can be effectively suppressed, and the discomfort of the image can be eliminated.

(About Appendix L)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying images for games (for example, JP-A-6-3506 and JP-A-2009-24459). reference). In such a game machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, as the operating time becomes longer, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector main body, so that problems due to heat occur in the optical parts, the substrate, etc. provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens. The image may be blurred due to thermal deformation, or the focus may be out of focus due to focus adjustment. That is, as the temperature change of the projection device becomes larger, the image quality of the image projected with the game tends to gradually deteriorate.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing deterioration of image quality due to a temperature change of a projection device and eliminating discomfort of an image.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix L1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game machine (for example, a game machine 1 or the like) equipped with a projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image.
The projection device
A focus mechanism for projecting an image (for example, a focus mechanism 242 of a projection lens 210) and
A temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensor B25, etc.) that detects the temperature near a predetermined location, and
A focus control means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, a sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, etc.) that controls the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection means is provided.
When the number of times the focus mechanism is controlled reaches a predetermined number of times, the focus control means returns the focus mechanism to a predetermined reference state and then causes the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means. It is characterized by performing control.

According to such a configuration, the focus mechanism is controlled by, for example, drift correction even if the temperature of the projection device changes, and the drift error accumulated for each drift correction also becomes the focus mechanism when the number of times the focus mechanism is controlled reaches a predetermined number. Is removed by returning to a predetermined reference state, so that deterioration of the image quality of the image projected via the focus mechanism can be effectively suppressed, and the discomfort of the image can be eliminated.

(About Appendix M)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying images for games (for example, JP-A-6-3506 and JP-A-2009-24459). reference). In such a game machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, as the operating time becomes longer, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector main body, so that problems due to heat occur in the optical parts, the substrate, etc. provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens. The image may be blurred due to thermal deformation, or the focus may be out of focus due to focus adjustment. That is, as the temperature change of the projection device becomes larger, the image quality of the image projected with the game tends to gradually deteriorate.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing deterioration of image quality due to a temperature change of a projection device and eliminating discomfort of an image.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix M1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game machine (for example, a game machine 1 or the like) equipped with a projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image.
The projection device
A focus mechanism for projecting an image (for example, a focus mechanism 242 of a projection lens 210) and
A temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensor B25, etc.) that detects the temperature near a predetermined location, and
A focus control means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, a sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, etc.) that controls the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection means is provided.
When the focus control means is projecting a predetermined image from the projection device, the focus control mechanism controls the focus mechanism to return to a predetermined reference state once, thereby reducing the visibility of the predetermined image. One state is set, and then the focus mechanism is controlled according to the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means to set the second state in which the visibility of the predetermined image is at least higher than that of the first state. It is characterized by.

According to such a configuration, the focus mechanism is controlled by, for example, drift correction even if the temperature of the projection device changes, and the drift error accumulated for each drift correction is also measured by the focus mechanism in a predetermined reference state while projecting a predetermined image. Since it is removed by returning to, the deterioration of the image quality of the image projected via the focus mechanism can be effectively suppressed, and the discomfort of the image can be eliminated. Further, as a predetermined image, for example, the first state in which the focus is initially deviated and the visibility is lowered is relatively changed to the second state in which the focus is gradually adjusted and the visibility is improved. It is possible to provide a state in which the visibility changes as video content for production.

(About Appendix N)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying images for games (for example, JP-A-6-3506 and JP-A-2009-24459). reference). In such a game machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, as the operating time becomes longer, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector main body, so that problems due to heat occur in the optical parts, the substrate, etc. provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens. The image may be blurred due to thermal deformation, or the focus may be out of focus due to focus adjustment. That is, as the temperature change of the projection device becomes larger, the image quality of the image projected with the game tends to gradually deteriorate.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing deterioration of image quality due to a temperature change of a projection device and eliminating discomfort of an image.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix N1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A gaming machine equipped with a projection device capable of projecting an image (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) and an identification information display means (for example, reels RL, RC, RR, main display window DD4, etc.) capable of variablely displaying identification information. (For example, game machine 1 etc.)
The projection device
A focus mechanism for projecting an image (for example, a focus mechanism 242 of a projection lens 210) and
A temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensor B25, etc.) that detects the temperature near a predetermined location, and
A focus control means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, a sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, etc.) that controls the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection means is provided.
When the number of times the identification information is variablely displayed by the identification information display means reaches a predetermined number of times, the focus control means returns the focus position of the focus mechanism to a predetermined reference position and then detects it by the temperature detection means. It is characterized in that the focus mechanism is controlled according to the temperature.

According to such a configuration, the focus mechanism is controlled by, for example, drift correction even if the temperature of the projection device changes, and the drift error accumulated for each drift correction is also focused when the number of times of variation display of the identification information reaches a predetermined number. Since the position is removed by returning to a predetermined reference position, deterioration of the image quality of the image projected via the focus mechanism can be effectively suppressed, and the discomfort of the image can be eliminated.

(About Appendix O)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying images for games (for example, JP-A-6-3506 and JP-A-2009-24459). reference). In such a game machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, as the operating time becomes longer, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector main body, so that problems due to heat occur in the optical parts, the substrate, etc. provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens. The image may be blurred due to thermal deformation, or the focus may be out of focus due to focus adjustment. That is, as the temperature change of the projection device becomes larger, the image quality of the image projected with the game tends to gradually deteriorate.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing deterioration of image quality due to a temperature change of a projection device and eliminating discomfort of an image.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix O1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game machine (for example, a game machine 1 or the like) equipped with a projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image.
The projection device
A focus mechanism for projecting an image (for example, a focus mechanism 242 of a projection lens 210) and
A temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensor B25, etc.) that detects the temperature near a predetermined location, and
A focus control means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, a sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, etc.) that controls the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection means is provided.
While projecting a darkened image via the focus mechanism, the focus control means returns the focus mechanism to a predetermined reference state and then controls the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means. It is characterized by doing.

According to such a configuration, the focus mechanism is controlled by, for example, drift correction even if the temperature of the projection device changes, and the drift error accumulated for each drift correction is also determined by the focus mechanism in a predetermined reference state during projection of a darkened image. Since it is removed by returning to, the deterioration of the image quality of the image projected through the focus mechanism can be effectively suppressed, and the behavior of the focus mechanism is difficult to see on the darkened image, which makes the image uncomfortable. It can be resolved.

(About Appendix P)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying images for games (for example, JP-A-6-3506 and JP-A-2009-24459). reference). In such a game machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, as the operating time becomes longer, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector main body, so that problems due to heat occur in the optical parts, the substrate, etc. provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens. The image may be blurred due to thermal deformation, or the focus may be out of focus due to focus adjustment. That is, as the temperature change of the projection device becomes larger, the image quality of the image projected with the game tends to gradually deteriorate.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing deterioration of image quality due to a temperature change of a projection device and eliminating discomfort of an image.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix P1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game machine (for example, a game machine 1 or the like) equipped with a projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image.
The projection device
A focus mechanism for projecting an image (for example, a focus mechanism 242 of a projection lens 210) and
A temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensor B25, etc.) that detects the temperature near a predetermined location, and
A focus control means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, a sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, etc.) that controls the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection means is provided.
The focus control means has a predetermined temperature range that invalidates the control of the focus mechanism, which is variably defined according to a temperature change per predetermined time based on the temperature detected by the temperature detection means. It is characterized in that the focus mechanism is controlled according to the temperature only when the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is outside the predetermined temperature range.

According to such a configuration, the focus mechanism is controlled by, for example, drift correction, even if the temperature of the projection device changes, and in particular, a predetermined temperature range (temperature range in which drift correction is invalid) according to the temperature change per predetermined time. By changing, the drift correction is not always performed depending on the temperature condition. As a result, for example, the drift error accumulated for each drift correction can be reduced as much as possible, and the deterioration of the image quality of the image projected via the focus mechanism can be effectively suppressed, and the discomfort of the image can be eliminated. be able to.

(About Appendix Q)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying images for games (for example, JP-A-6-3506 and JP-A-2009-24459). reference). In such a game machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, as the operating time becomes longer, heat tends to be accumulated inside the projector main body, so that problems due to heat occur in the optical parts, the substrate, etc. provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens. The image may be blurred due to thermal deformation, or the focus may be out of focus due to focus adjustment. That is, as the temperature change of the projection device becomes larger, the image quality of the image projected with the game tends to gradually deteriorate.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing deterioration of image quality due to a temperature change of a projection device and eliminating discomfort of an image.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix Q1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game machine (for example, a game machine 1 or the like) equipped with a projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image.
The projection device
A focus mechanism for projecting an image (for example, a focus mechanism 242 of a projection lens 210) and
A temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensor B25, etc.) that detects the temperature near a predetermined location, and
A focus control means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, a sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, etc.) that controls the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection means is provided.
The focus control means has a first temperature range that invalidates the control of the focus mechanism, which is defined to be changeable depending on whether or not a demo image is being projected, and a second temperature narrower than the first temperature range. The focus mechanism is controlled according to the temperature only when the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is outside the first temperature range while the demo image is being projected. It is characterized in that the focus mechanism is controlled according to the temperature only when the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is outside the second temperature range while projecting an image other than the image.

According to such a configuration, the focus mechanism is controlled by the temperature change of the projection device, for example, by drift correction, and in particular, the temperature range in which the drift correction is invalid is relative depending on whether or not the demo image is being projected. By changing the wide first temperature range and the relatively narrow second temperature range, drift correction is not always performed depending on the image being projected together with the temperature. As a result, for example, the drift error accumulated for each drift correction can be reduced as much as possible, and the deterioration of the image quality of the image projected via the focus mechanism can be effectively suppressed, and the discomfort of the image can be eliminated. be able to.

(About Appendix R)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying images for games (for example, JP-A-6-3506 and JP-A-2009-24459). reference). In such a game machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, as the frequency of focus adjustment increases, the focus may deviate significantly, and the image quality of the image projected with the game may gradually deteriorate.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing deterioration of image quality according to the frequency of focus adjustment and eliminating discomfort in an image. ..

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix R1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image on a plurality of projection surfaces (for example, the reflection surfaces of the reflection portions D1 to D4, the projection surface E11a, the projection surface F1a, etc.), and among the plurality of projection surfaces. A projection surface drive mechanism (for example, front screen drive mechanism E2, reel screen drive mechanism F2) that switches by shifting at least one projection surface (for example, projection surface E11a, projection surface F1a, etc.) relative to the projection device. Etc.) and a game machine (for example, game machine 1 etc.)
The projection device
A focus mechanism for projecting an image on each of the plurality of projection surfaces (for example, a focus mechanism 242 of a projection lens 210) and
Focus adjustment means (for example, control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS) that adjusts the focus mechanism each time the projection surface drive mechanism switches at least one of the plurality of projection planes. Etc.) and equipped with
It has a first projection mode in which the frequency at which the projection plane is switched is a predetermined frequency, and a second projection mode in which the frequency at which the projection plane is switched is less than that in the first projection mode.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the focus adjusting means returns the focus mechanism to a predetermined focus reference position and then performs readjustment, and in the first projection mode, the readjustment is performed more than in the second projection mode. It is characterized by increasing frequency.
The projection mode may include, for example, a mode of image projection by the projector device B2, and may be an effect mode in a game, such as the frequency of focus position adjustment according to the game (effect mode, game mode, etc.) and the screen. It is also possible to change the control content of the projector drift correction process when the frequency of changing the positions of the projection surface E11a and the projection surface F1a changes.

According to such a configuration, in the first projection mode in which the frequency of adjusting the focus mechanism (focus adjustment) is relatively high as the projection plane is switched, it is predetermined as compared with the second projection mode in which the frequency is relatively low. Since the frequency of returning to a predetermined focus reference position and readjusting increases according to the conditions of, the focus adjustment error accumulated for each focus adjustment can be reduced according to the frequency of focus adjustment, and eventually the focus mechanism can be used. Deterioration of the image quality of the image projected through the image can be effectively suppressed, and the discomfort of the image can be eliminated.

(About Appendix S)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying images for games (for example, JP-A-6-3506 and JP-A-2009-24459). reference). In such a game machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, as the frequency of focus adjustment increases, the focus may deviate significantly, and the image quality of the image projected with the game may gradually deteriorate.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing deterioration of image quality and eliminating discomfort in an image even when focus adjustment is frequently performed. And.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix S1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image on a plurality of projection surfaces (for example, the reflection surfaces of the reflection portions D1 to D4, the projection surface E11a, the projection surface F1a, etc.), and among the plurality of projection surfaces. A projection surface drive mechanism (for example, front screen drive mechanism E2, reel screen drive mechanism F2) that switches by shifting at least one projection surface (for example, projection surface E11a, projection surface F1a, etc.) relative to the projection device. Etc.) and a game machine (for example, game machine 1 etc.)
The projection device
A focus mechanism for projecting an image on each of the plurality of projection surfaces (for example, a focus mechanism 242 of a projection lens 210) and
Focus adjustment means (for example, control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS) that adjusts the focus mechanism each time the projection surface drive mechanism switches at least one of the plurality of projection planes. Etc.) and
It is provided with an internal temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensor B25 or the like) for detecting the internal temperature.
Each time the projection plane is switched, the focus adjusting means adjusts the focus position by the focus mechanism based on preset offset information, and the focus is adjusted according to the temperature detected by the internal temperature detecting means. It is characterized by adjusting the focus position by a mechanism.

According to such a configuration, the focus position is adjusted based on the offset information each time the projection plane is switched, and at that time, the focus position is adjusted with high accuracy by, for example, drift correction according to the temperature, so that the temperature It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the image quality and eliminate the discomfort of the image by frequently performing the focus adjustment in the situation where the temperature changes.

(Appendix S2)
A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The projection device
An image position changing means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, a sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, etc.) capable of changing the position of the image projected on the projection surface is provided.
The image position changing means is characterized in that each time the projection surface is switched, the position of the image to be projected is adjusted based on the position information in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.

According to such a configuration, the horizontal and vertical positions of the projected image are adjusted each time the projection plane is switched, so that the projection position of the image with respect to each projection plane can be appropriately set.

(About Appendix T)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying images for games (for example, JP-A-6-3506 and JP-A-2009-24459). reference). In such a game machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the angle of view may deviate greatly each time the screen (projection surface) is switched, and there is a possibility that the appearance of the projected image may gradually change with the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a gaming machine capable of projecting an image at an appropriate position even by switching the projection surface and eliminating the discomfort of the image. The purpose is to do.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix T1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image on a plurality of projection surfaces (for example, the reflection surfaces of the reflection portions D1 to D4, the projection surface E11a, the projection surface F1a, etc.), and among the plurality of projection surfaces. A projection surface drive mechanism (for example, front screen drive mechanism E2, reel screen drive mechanism F2) that switches by shifting at least one projection surface (for example, projection surface E11a, projection surface F1a, etc.) relative to the projection device. Etc.) and a game machine (for example, game machine 1 etc.)
The projection device
An image position changing means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, a sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, etc.) capable of changing the position of the image projected on the projection surface is provided.
The image position changing means is characterized in that each time the projection surface is switched, the position of the image to be projected is adjusted based on the position information in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.

According to such a configuration, the horizontal and vertical positions of the projected image are adjusted each time the projection plane is switched, so that the projection position of the image with respect to each projection plane can be appropriately set, and the image can be set appropriately. Discomfort can be eliminated.

(Appendix T2)
A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The projection device
A focus mechanism for projecting an image on each of the plurality of projection surfaces (for example, a focus mechanism 242 of a projection lens 210) and
Focus adjustment means (for example, control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS) that adjusts the focus mechanism each time the projection surface drive mechanism switches at least one of the plurality of projection planes. Etc.) and equipped with
When the projection surface is switched, the focus position is adjusted by adjusting the focus mechanism by the focus adjusting means after the position of the image to be projected is adjusted by the image position changing means. To do.

According to such a configuration, when the projection plane is switched, the horizontal and vertical positions of the projected image are adjusted, and then the focus position of the focus mechanism is adjusted, so that the horizontal and vertical directions are adjusted. Deterioration of image quality can be suppressed not only by the position of but also by the focus position.

(About others)
As a gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-13801). However, since this pachinko gaming machine does not have a function as a gaming machine equipped with a projector device as in the present invention, it has not been possible to improve the interest. The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine provided with a projector device capable of improving the interest.

1 Game machine G Cabinet G4 Top wall A Display unit B1 Projector cover B12 Upper wall B2, X, X', X "Projector device B20 Power supply circuit B21 Lens unit B22, X22 Case B23 Projector control board B25 Temperature sensor B25a First temperature Sensor B25b Second temperature sensor B26a Intake temperature sensor B26b Exhaust temperature sensor B27a to B27c Pulse sensor 210 Projection lens 230 Control LSI
240R, 240G, 240B LED light source 241 DMD
242 Focus mechanism 242A Rack member 242B Reed screw 242C Focus motor 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D, 243Xa, 243Xc Heat sink 244A, 244B Intake fan 245 Exhaust fan 400 Sub CPU
401 SRAM
700 MCU
710 Multi-output scaler LSI
2430, 2431 Heat dissipation plates D1 to D4 Reflector E11a Projection surface (movable projection surface)
F1a projection plane (movable projection plane)
E2 Front screen drive mechanism F2 Reel screen drive mechanism MS Main control board SS Sub control board SK Scaler board RD Reel drive board DS Door relay board FC1 First optical fiber cable FC2 Second optical fiber cable DD19 Sub liquid crystal display device DD19T Touch panel

Claims (2)

A game including a projection device capable of projecting an image on a plurality of projection surfaces and a projection surface drive mechanism that switches by displaced at least one projection surface of the plurality of projection surfaces relative to the projection device. It ’s a machine,
The projection device
An image position changing means capable of changing the position of the image projected on the projection surface, and
A focus mechanism for projecting an image on each of the plurality of projection surfaces, and
A focus adjusting means for adjusting the focus mechanism each time at least one of the plurality of projection planes is switched by the projection plane driving mechanism is provided.
The focus adjusting means, each time the projection plane is switched at the timing in which the projection surface is moving operation is completed on the basis of the difference between the change operation time by moving the operating time and the focus adjustment means according to the projection plane driving mechanism, There line adjustment of the focus position by adjusting the focus mechanism,
The game machine is characterized in that the change operation time is composed of a data transmission time associated with a change in the focus position setting and an operation time of the focus mechanism . When the switches are pre SL projection plane, after said positioning of the projected image is performed by the image position changing means, characterized in that the focus position by the focus mechanism is adjusted by the focus adjusting means is adjusted The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images